CITD Ug MaterialNX9.0

Basic
NX is an interactive Computer-Aided Design, Computer-Aided Manufacturing, and Computer-Aided

Engineering (CAD/CAM/CAE) system. The CAD functions automate the normal engineering, design, and
drafting capabilities found in today's manufacturing companies. The CAM functions provide NC
programming for modern machine tools using the NX design model to describe the finished part. The
CAE functions provide a number of product, assembly, and part performance simulation abilities, across a
broad range of engineering disciplines.
NX functions are divided into "applications" of common capabilities. These applications are supported by
a prerequisite application called NX Gateway. Every NX user must have NX Gateway; however, the other
applications are optional and may be configured to meet the needs of each individual user.
NX is a fully three-dimensional, double precision system that allows you to accurately describe almost any
geometric shape. By combining these shapes, you can design, analyze, and create drawings of your
products.
Once the design is complete, the Manufacturing application allows you to select the geometry describing
the part, enter manufacturing information such as cutter diameter, and automatically generate a cutter
location source file (CLSF), which can be used to drive most NC machines.
Basic Mouse Operations
The following table describes several ways to use the mouse to interact with NX dialogs and windows.
Click = Left mouse button
Middle mouse button = Middle mouse button, or the wheel
Right-click = right mouse button
To Use
Select menus and select options in dialogs. Click
Cycle through all the required steps in a dialog (in Click the middle mouse button
green) prior to clicking the OK or Apply button.
Perform equivalent of OK or Apply button (in Click the middle mouse button
green) after all required steps have been satisfied.
Cancel Press Alt + middle mouse button HP: Extend Char +

middle mouse button
Display Cut/Copy/Paste popup menu Right-click in a text entry field
Select contiguous items. Shift + Click in a list box
Select or de-select non-contiguous items. Ctrl + Click in a list box

Zoom while the point under the cursor remains Rotate the mouse wheel.
static.
Launch the View Popup Right-click on the graphics area but not on the model,
or press Ctrl + right-click anywhere in the graphics
area.
Launch an object-specific popup. Right-click over the object.
Invoke the Default Action for an object. Double-click over the object.
Rotate a view. Press and drag the middle mouse button in the view.
Pan a view. Drag the middle + right mouse buttons, or Shift +

middle mouse button, in the view.
Zoom into a view. Drag the middle + left mouse buttons, or Ctrl +
middle mouse button in the view.
Click on >start> all programs> Siemens NX 9.0> NX9.0

TO OPEN A NEW FILE
CLICK ON FILE> NEW>SELECT THE TEMPLATE AS MODEL> SELECT THE UNITS> ENTER
FILE NAME, WORKING DIRECTORY> CLICK ON 0K BUTTON
INITIALLY IT WILL BE OPENED INTO MODELING ENVIRONMENT AS FOLLOWS

TO SWITCH ON TO SKETCHER ENVIRONMENT CLICK ON MENU DROP DOWN LIST>
INSERT > SKETCH IN THE TASK ENVIRONMENT

SELECT THE SUITABLE SKETCHING PLANE AND REFERENCE AXIS FOR SKETCH ORIENTATION
> CLICK OK
The Sketcher Interface
Like other NX applications, Sketcher has its own interface, with customizable toolbars,
right mouse button menus, and other components. Here are the major elements in the
default Sketcher interface:
Ribbon bar interface
The NX Ribbon bar interface provides access to frequently used

commands with a minimum number of mouse clicks while maintaining a
maximum graphics window area.
NX window
# Component Description
Quick Access
1 Contains commonly used commands such as Save and Undo.
toolbar
2 Ribbon bar Organizes commands in each application into tabs and groups.
Contains the Menu, Selection Group, View Group, and Utility
3 Top Border bar
Group commands.
Contains navigators and palettes, including the Part Navigator
4 Resource bar
and the Roles tab.
Graphics
5 Lets you model, visualize, and analyze models.
window
Left, Right, and
6 Bottom Border Displays the commands you add.
bars
7 Cue/Status line Prompts you for the next action, and displays messages.
NX Ribbon bar
# Component Description
Organizes commands into groups of related functions in each
1 Tab
application.
Organizes commands by function on each tab. Related
2 Group
commands appear in lists and galleries.
3 Command Finds commands.

Finder
4 Full Screen Maximizes screen space.
5 Minimize Collapses the groups on the Ribbon tab.

Ribbon
6 Help Displays on-context Help (F1).
7 Lets you turn on or turn off commands in each group.

Toolbar
Options
Select any curve command like line , the input mode in Nx we can have in two ways
1.coordinate mode
Here we give input data in terms of X-coordinate ,Y-coordinate.
2.parameter mode
Here we give input data in terms of length and angle or radius and angle for arcs.
We can switch on from one mode to another mode as shown below.
Dynamic Input Boxes
Dynamic input boxes accept XC/YC values or object parameter values. Depending on the type of curve
you create, one or more dynamic input boxes display on the graphics window and move with the cursor.
Two sets of dynamic input boxes can display for Profile, Line, Arc, and Circle curve options:
XC and YC coordinate values: This is the default for the first point.
XC 23.85
YC 48.65
Object Parameter values: The second set are curve parameter values specific to the type of
curve selected and displays for the second point. Here is an example of the Line input
parameters.
Length 0.05
Angle 12.09
The first column displays the name of a parameter and the second column contains parameter values. To
move between dynamic input boxes, press TAB or ENTER. To specify a value, type it in the appropriate
box and press ENTER.
Clearing Input Box Values
To clear a value, double-click the box and press BACKSPACE.

Locking and Unlocking Values
You can lock the parameter value of a dynamic input box. For example, to lock the XC-coordinate value,
enter a value and press TAB. The XC value updates with the locked value. As you move the cursor, the
YC value continuously updates to reflect the cursor position.
To unlock a value, clear the dynamic input box.
Snap Point options on the Selection Bar
Some Snap Point options are unavailable for certain functions. Snap Point provides the following point
types on the Selection bar:
Snap Point Options
Enables the Snap Point options so that snapping to points on objects occurs.
Enable Snap
Point
Lets you select the end points of lines, arcs, conics, splines, all edge types, and all
End Point centerlines except full and partial circular centerlines.
Lets you select the mid points of lines, open arcs, and all edge types.
Mid Point
Lets you select a control point of a geometric object. Control points include existing
Control Point
points, end points of conics, center points of circles, end points and knot points of
splines, and end points and mid points of lines and open arcs. Supports the
following drafting object types: linear centerline, full and partial bolt circle, offset
center point, cylindrical centerline, block centerline, and target point.
Intersection Lets you select a point at the intersection of two curves with one pick. Supports
Point the following drafting object types: linear centerline, cylindrical centerline,
symmetrical centerline, and block centerline.
Arc Center
Lets you select an arc center point, circular centerline, and bolt circle centerline.
Quadrant
Point Lets you select the quadrant points of a circle.
Lets you select an existing point. Supports the following drafting object types:
Existing Point offset centerpoint, intersection point, target point, tolerance feature instance, and
linear centerline.
Tangent Point Lets you select a tangent point on circles, conics, solid edges, section edges, solid
silhouettes, full and partial bolt circles, full and partial centerlines.
Two-curve Lets you select the intersection point of two objects that do not fit within the
Intersection selection ball by making two separate picks. Supports the following objects: line,
circle, conic, spline, solid edge, section edge, solid silhouette, section segment,
linear centerline, diameter centerline, and block centerline.
When you select this option, the rest of the Snap Point options are unavailable.
Point on
Curve Lets you select a point on a curve.
Point on
Surface Lets you select a point on a surface.
Point
Opens the Point Constructor dialog box.
Constructor
Deselecting objects
You can deselect a single object, multiple objects, or deselect and select objects simultaneously.
To de-select a single object, press Shift and click an object.
To deselect a group of objects, hold Shift and the left mouse button and drag the cursor over the
objects you want to deselect. Once they are highlighted, release the buttons.
Right click in the que line bar and select all the toolbars used in the sketcher
To activate all the options in the selected tool bar click on add or remove button and
select all the options as follows.

Profile Options
Object Type
Lets you create a line. This is the default mode when you initially choose the Profile
Line option. The first line you draw uses XY-coordinates if you have not selected an
endpoint. The system uses length and angle parameters for the second line in a string
or if you select a snap point or endpoint. Lines drawn off of the sketch plane are
projected onto the sketch plane.
Lets you create an arc. While stringing from line to arc, you create a two point arc. If
Arc you string an arc from a normal quadrant (see Quadrant Symbol ), you create a three
point arc. You also create a three point arc if the first object drawn in string mode is an
arc.
Input Mode
Lets you specify curve creation using X and Y coordinate values.

Coordinate
Mode
Lets you specify a curve object's parameters. Lines use Length and Angle
Parameter parameters. Arcs use Radius and Sweep Angle parameters. Circles use a Diameter
Profile Overview
This option lets you create a series of connected lines and/or arcs in string mode; that is, the end of
the last curve becomes the beginning of the next curve. For example, here's a pipe vise profile which you
can easily create in one series of mouse clicks with Profile:
Pipe Vise Profile

Line-Arc Transitioning and the Quadrant Symbol
You can transition from line creation to arc creation by pressing and dragging MB1. Alternately, you can
change creation curve type by choosing the Line or Arc icons. When you transition from a line to an arc
or from one arc to another arc, the quadrant zone symbol displays:
Transitioning from a Line to an Arc

The quadrant that contains the curve and its opposite vertex are tangent quadrants (quadrants 1 and 2).
Quadrants 3 and 4 are perpendicular quadrants. You control the direction of the arc by placing the cursor
inside of one of the quadrants and then moving the cursor out of the quadrant in either a clockwise or
counterclockwise direction. If you move your cursor out from one of the tangent quadrants, the arc
extends in a tangent direction to the line or arc at its endpoint. If you move your cursor out from one of the
perpendicular quadrants, the arc extends in a direction perpendicular to the line or arc at its endpoint.
Tangent and Perpendicular Quadrants in the Tangent and Quadrants in the Counterclockwise
Clockwise Direction Direction
If you change your mind about which quadrant to sketch from, move the cursor back into the quadrant of
your choice before you click to place the second point of the arc.
Chaining Arcs
In profile string mode, after you create an arc, the Profile option switches to line mode. To create a series
of chained arcs, double-click the arc option.
Stopping String Mode
You can stop string mode by clicking MB2, provided an on-screen constraint is not previewed. (If a
constraint is previewed, MB2 locks that constraint.)
Pressing the Esc key while previewing a line or arc cancels the preview and closes the profile.
Pressing Esc again before starting a new profile exits the Profile option.
Constraints
If turned on from the Inferred Constraints Setting, you create the following constraints:
A Point on Curve constraint between the arc center and the previous line.
A Tangent and a Coincident constraint whenever applicable.
Snapping to Geometry Anywhere in an Assembly

You can use inferred constraints to snap new curves to control points anywhere in an assembly. That is,
when you create a curve, you can infer its position and orientation by referring to points, curves, and
edges outside the current work part. To enable snapping anywhere in an assembly, you must:
1. Turn off the Create Inferred Constraints option.
2. Turn on the Reference Outside Work Part option in Inferred Constraint Settings. Note that
this option is active only when Create Inferred Constraints is off.
Line Overview
Use his command to create lines with constraint inferencing.
Line Start Point With XC and YC Inputs
Line End Point With Length and Angle Inputs
To lock a mode, double-click either the XY or Parameters icon.
Line at a Relative Angle
You can create a line at a relative angle to another line by first locking in a parallel, perpendicular, or
collinear constraint to the original line. After locking, the Length and Relative Angle input boxes display:
Length 23.855
Relative Angle 45.0
When you specify a relative angle and confirm it with Tab or Enter, the new direction displays with a
second, dashed help line. The angle is with respect to the previewed constraint line. Positive angles are
measured counterclockwise. Negative angles are measured clockwise.
Relative Angle Using Coincident Constraint
You can change the angle by tabbing to the Angle box and entering a new value, or by clearing the input
box.
Arc Method
Arc by Three Points
Lets you create an arc that passes through three points or which passes through two points (start, end,
point on arc). During rubberbanding, the line can snap tangent to all types of curves or edges, including
lines, arcs, ellipses, conics and splines.
You can change the third point to an endpoint instead of a point on the arc if you move the cursor
through one of the circular markers.
Pass Cursor through Marker
Third Point becomes Endpoint

Select two points, specify a radius value, and press ENTER. You can them move the cursor to preview
four possible arcs.
Lets you create an arc by defining the center, then the start and endpoints.
Arc by Center
and Endpoints
Input Mode
Lets you use coordinate values to specify points for the arc.
Coordinate
Mode
Lets you specify the Radius parameter for an Arc by Three Points. For an Arc
Parameters by Center and Endpoints, you specify the Radius and Sweep Angle
parameters.
Circle overview
Lets you create circles using one of two methods:
Circle by Center and Diameter (left) and Circle by 3 Points (right)

You can use either coordinate values or parameters for both methods.
While you are rubberbanding a circle, it can snap tangent to all types of curves or edges, including lines,
arcs, ellipses, conics and splines, if the Tangent constraint is on in Inferred Constraints Settings.
Derived Lines
This option lets you create new lines from existing lines using any of the following methods:
To offset a line from a base line, click MB1 on the base, and click MB1 again to place the new line.
Offsetting a Line From a Baseline
To offset multiple lines from the same base line, hold Ctrl and click MB1 on the base line. Then click MB1
again to place each new line.
Offsetting Multiple Lines From the Same Baseline
When you select two parallel lines, Sketcher creates a line at the intervening midpoint. You can set the
line length graphically or enter a value in the Length input box.
Creating a Line at the Midpoint of Two Parallel Lines
When you select two nonparallel lines (intersection not required), Sketcher constructs a bisector line. You
can place the line graphically or enter a value in the Length input box. You can also place the bisector in
any quadrant of the angled lines.
Constructing a Bisector Line
Trim single or multiple objects
1. On the Sketch Curve toolbar, click Quick Trim , or select EditQuick Trim.
2. To preview the trim, move the cursor over a curve.

3. To complete the trim, click the left mouse button.
4. To trim multiple curves, drag the cursor over the target curves. NX trims each curve as the cursor
passes over it.
Note that each trim is a separate operation. For this example, you would need to press Ctrl+Z
twice to undo both trims.
Trim to a virtual intersection
1. On the Sketch Curve toolbar, click Quick Trim , or select EditQuick Trim.
2. Under Boundary Curve, click Select Curve.
3. Select a boundary curve in the graphics window and click the middle mouse button.
4. Move the cursor over the curve you want to trim. NX previews the trim.
5. To complete the trim, click the left mouse button.
Pressing the Esc key deselects any selected boundary curves. Pressing the Esc key again, or
when no boundary curves are selected, exits Quick Trim.
1. On the Sketch Curve toolbar, click Quick Extend , or select EditQuick Extend.
2. To preview the extension, move the cursor over the curve toward the end you want to extend.
3. To complete the extension, click the left mouse button.
4. To extend multiple objects, drag the cursor over the objects you want to extend. NX extends each
curve as the cursor passes over it.
Note that each extension is a separate operation. For this example, you would need to press
Ctrl+Z twice to undo both extensions.
Extend to a virtual intersection
1. On the Sketch Curve toolbar, click Quick Extend , or select EditQuick Extend.
2. Under Boundary Curve, click Select Curve.
3. Select a boundary curve in the graphics window and click the middle mouse button.
4. Move the cursor over the curve you want to extend. NX previews the extension.
5. To complete the extension, click the left mouse button.
Make Corner overview
Creates a corner by extending and/or trimming two input curves to a common intersection. If the
Create Inferred Constraints option is on, NX creates a coincident constraint at the intersection.
Make corner by extending (left) and by trimming (right)
Make Corner works with:
Lines
Arcs
Open conics
Open splines (trimming only)
Fillet options
Method
Trim Trims the input curves. Sketcher infers Coincident and Tangent constraints when these
constraints are on in the Inferred Constraints Settings. If Trim Inputs is off, Sketcher
creates a Point on Curve constraint. The Dimension and Equal Radius constraints
also affect fillets. See Constraints for Multiple Copies of Circles and Fillet Radii for more
information.
Unrim Leaves the input curves untrimmed.
Options
Delete Deletes the third curve you select. For example, use this option to fillet the three curves on
Third the left, and delete the red curve:
Curve
Create Previews the complementary fillet. You can also preview the complement by pressing the
Alternate Page Up or Page Down key.
Fillet
Fillet two curves
To fillet two curves:
1. On the Sketch Curve toolbar, click Fillet , or choose InsertFillet.

2. Select the Trim or Untrim method as appropriate for your part. This example trims the input
curves.
3. If you know the radius you want, type the value in the Radius input box.
4. Select the target curves. NX previews the fillet when you select the second curve.
5. You can move the cursor to adjust the fillet size and location, type a value in the Radius input
box, or press Page Up or Page Down to preview the complementary fillet.
Original Solution (Left) and Alternate Solution (Right)
6. Leftclick to complete the fillet.

Additional Notes
A complementary fillet solution also switches the trim direction.
If you enter a value in the radius input box, NX creates a fillet after you select the second input curve.
If there is a possible complement to the fillet, NX previews the fillet. Use the Page Up key to cycle
the preview between the complementary fillets, and click the mouse to create the one you want.
You can fillet using the crayon tool by pressing the left mouse and dragging the cursor over two curves.
NX fillets the curves when you release the mouse button. If you select more than two curves, only the first
two are inputs for the fillet option. If you enter a valid radius, the fillet is created with that radius. If you
leave the radius field blank, NX approximates the radius by using the points at which the crayon passed
over the first curve.
Filleting with the crayon tool

Fillet three curves
To fillet three curves:
1. On the Sketch Curve toolbar, click Fillet , or choose InsertFillet.

2. Select the Trim or Untrim method as appropriate for your part. This example trims the input
curves.
3. Select or clear Delete Third Curve as appropriate for your part.
4. Select curves one and two.

5. To preview the fillet, move the cursor over the third fillet.
6. Left-click to create the fillet.
If you trim the third curve, NX creates tangent constraints

between the curves.
If you do not trim the third curve, NX also constrains the

curve to be tangent to the fillet.
Rectangle Overview
This option provides methods you can use to create a rectangle on the sketch plane. You can specify an
angle at which to create a rectangle, and you can create rectangles that are not parallel to XC/YC.
The Rectangle icon options include creation methods based on points, and options for XY coordinates
and parameters. Methods and options that are active are highlighted.
Rectangle methods use dynamic input boxes that follow the cursor and update as you specify
coordinates, points and angles. To specify points, use MB1, the Snap Point options, and the dynamic
input boxes.
This method lets you create a rectangle by specifying 2 points in diagonal corners for
width and height. The rectangle is created with lines parallel to the XC and YC axes,
By 2 Points intersecting at the 2 points.

By 2 Points Procedure
This method lets you create a rectangle at an angle to the XC and YC axes. The first two
points you select indicate the width and angle of the rectangle. The third point
By 3 Points indicates the height.

By 3 Points Procedure
Note that you can toggle between the By 2 Points and By 3 Points methods by
MB1-dragging after you select the first point, and before you select a second
point.
From This method lets you create a rectangle by first specifying a center point, a second point
Center to indicate the angle and width, and a third point to indicate the height.
From Center Procedure
This option button lets you specify points for the rectangle as XC, YC coordinates. You
XY can specify coordinates using the dynamic input boxes or by clicking MB1 in the
graphics window.
Clearing this option selects the Parameters option.
Parameters This option lets you specify points for the rectangle as relative parameter values. There
are width, height and angle parameters that you specify using dynamic input boxes or
by clicking MB1 in the graphics window.
Clearing this option selects the XY option.

Studio Spline dialog options
Spline Settings
Through Points creates an associative or non-associative spline by extending a curve through

defining points.
Click MB1 to create defining points, or select existing points. Each time you click MB1, a new
defining point is specified for the spline. You can drag defining points to new positions and you
can add constraints to them.
Defining Points Used to Define a Spline
You can use the Matched Knot Position option with this method, but not the Single Segment
option. You can still create a single segment curve with this method, but only if the degree is
one less than the total number of constraints (that is, the number of points plus any other
constraints).
Method
By Poles creates an associative or non-associative spline by constructing and manipulating
spline poles.
Click MB1 to create poles, or select existing points as poles. Each time you click MB1 a new
pole is specified for the spline. You can drag poles to new positions, if allowed by specified
constraints. You can add constraints to the end poles of a spline.
Poles Used to Define a Spline
You can use the Single Segment option with this method, but not the Matched Knot Position
option.
If Single Segment is not selected, the spline preview does not display until the number of
degrees, plus one more than the number of poles, is reached.
Click on the spline to insert a pole.
Point dialog box
The Point dialog box provides a standard way to specify points and create point objects, as well as
determine locations in 3D space.
Type
Specifies the point creation method. Select from the list or click the buttons representing the most
common methods.
Inferred Point Specifies the point option to use based on your selection. The system
specifies the point with a single selection, so the inferred options are limited to cursor location
(valid only if cursor location is also a valid point method), existing point, end point, control point,
and arc/ellipse center.
Cursor Location Specifies a position at the location of the curs or. The location lies in the
plane of the WCS. You can use a grid to quickly and precisely locate points (see
PreferencesWork Plane).
Existing Point Specifies a position by selecting an existing po int object. Use this option
to create a point on top of an existing point or specify a location by selecting an existing point.
Creating a point on top of an existing point may cause some confusion since you will not see the
new point, but this can be a quick method of placing a copy of a point onto the work layer from
another layer.
End Point Specifies a position at the end points of existi ng lines, arcs, conics, and other
curves.
Control Point Specifies a position at the control points of ge ometric objects.
Intersection Point Specifies a position at the intersection of two curves or at the

intersection of a curve and a surface or plane.
Arc/Ellipse/Sphere Center Specifies a position at the center of an arc, el lipse, circular or

elliptical edge, or sphere.
Angle on Arc/Ellipse Specifies a position at an angular position alon g an arc or an

ellipse. The software references the angle from the positive XC-axis and measures it
counterclockwise in the WCS. You can also define a point on the unconstructed portion, or
extension, of an arc.
Quadrant Point Specifies a position at the quarter points of an arc or an ellipse. You can
also define a point on the unconstructed portion, or extension, of an arc.
Point on Curve/Edge Specifies a position on a curve or edge.
Between Two Points Specifies a position between two points.
Point Location
Lets you select a point.
Select Object
Coordinates
Relative to Specifies the point relative to a Work Coordinate System (WCS). You can edit the XC,
WCS YC, and ZC values below. For this option to be available, the Associative check box
under Settings must be unselected.
Absolute Specifies the point relative to an Absolute Coordinate System. You can edit the X, Y,
and Z values below. For this option to be available, the Associative check box under
Settings must be unselected.
X, Y, and Z Specifies point coordinates. To add references, functions, or a formula for the point, use the
parameter entry options.
Settings
Associative Makes the point associative instead of fixed so that it parametrically relates to its parent
features. If you edit a non-associative point, it appears in the Type list as Fixed. The Part
Navigator displays an associative point as Point and a non-associative point as
Fixed Point.
Associative Point Overview
Use Associative Point to create a smart point in a sketch based on geometry outside the sketch.
An Associative Point is linked to the geometry you use to create it, and updates automatically if the
parent geometry changes. You can use associative points from within a sketch when creating constraints.
For example, consider this pair of sketches named SK_TOP and SK_BOTTOM:
1. Curves in sketch SK_TOP
2. Curves in sketch SK_BOTTOM
3. Associative point in SK_TOP
We created the associative point (3) in SK_TOP using the reference lines in SK_BOTTOM. The
associative point lets us constrain the arc center in SK_TOP to the reference curve intersection in
SK_BOTTOM. Heres what the sketches look like from the top view:
Arc Center Aligned to Reference Curve Intersection

If we modify the associative points parent geometry, the associative point keeps SK_TOP properly
constrained to the reference curve intersection.
SK_TOP Moves With the Smart Point
ellipse
Pick the center point for ellipse, later define the following parameters
Conic
Choosing General Conic while working in an active sketch opens the Point Constructor dialog. This is
because the method used to create a conic from within an active sketch is the general conic option, 2 Points,
Anchor, Rho. Therefore, the system opens the Point Constructor, the same as if you were working outside a
sketch and had chosen Insert Curve General Conic 2 Points, Anchor, Rho.
You can change the rho of an existing conic from within an active sketch by clicking the Edit Curve icon
and then selecting the conic. A dialog then displays to let you change the value for rho.
Remember that any curves you create within an active sketch become part of the sketch.
Transform Operation
The Transform operation allows you to translate, rotate, and scale objects or their copies. You cannot,
however, transform views, layouts, drawings, or the current WCS. For more information, see the
transforming objects procedure.
Option Description
Translate Moves objects to a point, or via delta.
Scale Affects the size of an object and the distance between the object and its reference point.
Rotate About a Moves objects around a line parallel to the ZC axis, and passing through a specified
Point reference point
Mirror Through Creates a mirror image of an object on the opposite side of a reference line.
a Line
Rectangular Arranges object copies in rows and columns parallel to the XC and YC axes.
Array
Arrange object copies in a circular pattern.

Circular Array
Moves objects around a reference line that's not necessarily parallel to the ZC axis.
Rotate About a
Line
Creates a mirror image of an object, using a specified reference plane. If you select a
Mirror Through
parametric body, the system displays a message that allows you to choose between
a Plane
removing the body's parameters or ignoring the body. Note: You cannot make multiple
copies using this option.
Reposition Moves objects or their copies from their initial position in a reference coordinate system
to a destination coordinate system.
Rotate Between Moves objects from a reference axis to a destination axis through a specified angle.
Two Axes
Point Fit Scales, repositions, and shears objects. Transforming them from the reference set to
the set of destination points.
Incremental Transforms objects through any combination of translations, scales, and rotations.
Dynamics
Translate
You can move objects to a point, or via delta. Translated objects maintain the original orientation.
Option Description
To a Translates the selected objects by indicating a reference and a destination point.

Point
The orientation of the translated object with respect to the destination point is identical to that of
the original object with respect to the reference point.
Delta Translates the selected objects by specifying a new location in terms of rectangular (delta XC,
delta YC, and delta ZC) coordinates.
Scale
Proportionately resize the selected objects. Since the distance from the object to the reference point is
affected, exercise care in choosing the reference point if you do not want the object to move.
If you selected a parametric body, a message will appear to let you choose between removing the body's
parameters or ignoring the body.
This transformation type affects the size of an object and the distance between the object and its
reference point. You can use a scale or a non-uniform scale method.
About Scale
Non-Uniform Scale allows you to resize objects independently with respect to the XC, YC, and ZC axes.
This option can be used, for example, to incorporate variable shrinkage factors in mold design.
You cannot use Non-Uniform Scale via Move on a solid body. Use Copy instead. However, analytic
face geometry (for example, a block feature) cannot be non-uniform scaled via Copy.
To non-uniform scale a solid body containing analytic surfaces, first convert those sheet bodies into b-
surfaces using the Convert function (see the Modeling Help), then sew them together into a new solid
body valid for non-uniform scaling.
Uniform Scale
Non-Uniform Scale
The Non-Uniform Scale method makes Undo Last available even if the scaled object had been converted
to a different kind of object.
Once an arc is converted into a spline, it can no longer be restored to its original object type.
Non-Uniform Scale, an Arc is converted into a Spline

Usage Notes
When an object is transformed into a different type, some or all of the original object data may be lost (for
example, attributes, view modifications, drafting objects, dimensions, tool paths, and offset sheet bodies).
Subdivisions can not be used in Non-Uniform Scale.
In order to transform the sheet bodies via Non-Uniform Scale, the defining curves must be transformed.
Rotate About a Point
Move objects around a line parallel to the ZC axis, and passing through a specified reference point.
A positive rotation direction is counterclockwise.

Rotation About a Point, Multiple Copies
Mirror Through a Line
Mirror Through a line creates a mirror image of an object on the opposite side of a reference line.
If you select a parametric body, the system displays a message, allowing you to choose between
removing the body's parameters or ignoring the body.
Mirror Through a Line
Rectangular Array
Arrange object copy arrays in rows and columns parallel to the XC and YC axes. Any number of
duplications can be created.
Option Description
DXC Distance between the reference points in columns.
DYC Distance between the reference points in rows.
Array Counterclockwise measurement from the positive XC axis at the array origin.
Angle
Columns Number of duplications in the positive XC direction.

(X)
Rows (Y) Number of duplications in the positive YC direction.
Trace Status and Multiple Copies are not available with this option.
Rectangular Array
Circular Array
Circular Array allows you to arrange object copies in a circular pattern. You can create any number of
duplications.
Option Description
Radius Radius of the array circle.
Start Positions on the array circle (with the XC axis as 0_) to which a reference point is translated.
Angle
Incre Angle between successive array elements.

Angle
Number Number of array elements to be created. If the number of elements multiplied by the Incre
Angle is greater than 360_, overlapping of array elements occurs.
Copy Keeps the object selected for transformation intact.
Move Make the selected object a part of the array. Trace Status and Multiple Copies are not
available with this option.
Circular Array and Copy Transformations
Rotate About a Line
Allows you to move objects around a reference line that's not necessarily parallel to the ZC axis.
A positive rotation direction is counterclockwise.
Rotate About a Line, Multiple Copies
Mirror Through a Plane
Create a mirror image of an object, using a specified reference plane.
You cannot make multiple copies using this option.
If a parametric body has been selected, a message will appear to let you choose between removing the
body's parameters or ignoring the body.
Reposition
Move objects or their copies from their initial position in a reference coordinate system to a destination
coordinate system. The orientation of transformed objects remains the same.
Reposition
Rotate Between Two Axes
Allows you to move objects from a reference axis to a destination axis through a specified angle.
Rotate Between Two Axes, 90 Degrees
Point Fit
You can scale, reposition, and shear objects. Transforming them from the set of the reference to the set
of destination points. Two options are available: 3-Point Fit and 4-Point Fit.
Point Fit involving Non-Uniform Scale cannot be performed on solid bodies, or sheet bodies other than
the b-sheets.
When an object is transformed, some or all of the associated data, (for example, the attributes, view
modifications, drafting objects, dimensions, tool paths, or offset surfaces) may be lost.
3-Point Fit
Allows you to scale and reposition objects by specifying three reference points and three destination
points.
Reference and destination points must not be collinear.
The reference and destination points are aligned along straight lines, therefore only the scale increases.
3-Point Fit, Scale Transformation
3-Point Fit, Scale and Rotate Transformation
Scale and Shear
You can also use this option to scale and shear objects in the same transformation. Do this by defining
the destination points with a different angular relationship, than that of the reference points.
3-Point Fit, Scaling and Shearing the Part
Selection Order is Important
The order in which you define reference and destination points is important because object's orientation
to the destination points is identical to its orientation to the reference points. If the second and third
destination points are selected in reverse order, the object rotates as shown below.
3-Point Fit, Destination Points are Selected in Reverse Order
4-Point Fit
Transform objects between four reference points and four destination points. The distance from the
reference points to the destination points and, the differences in angle are used to scale and orient the
objects.
Reference points must not be coplanar.
In the figure below, the reference and destination points maintain the same orientation. Therefore, the
transformation results only in a scale increase. If reference and destination points do not have the same
orientation, transformed objects may be repositioned, rescaled, and sheared.
4-Point Fit
Incremental Dynamics
Transform objects through any combination of translations, scales, and rotations. No new objects are
created during these transformations until the model is updated.
The display of the objects at the intermediate steps of a dynamic transformation process is temporary and
does not allow object selection.
View operations done when in incremental dynamics may yield strange results.
You can undo all dynamic transformations performed since the beginning of this option.
Translate
The destination point, defined in the To A Point option becomes a new reference point for the next
translation. Indicate a new destination point to continue the transformation.
After translating via Delta, you can enter a new set of coordinate delta values, or click OK to use the
existing set for the next translation.
Select Back when the transformation is complete. Choose Back again, and then select another
Incremental Dynamics option.
Scale
This option resizes an object and alters the distance between the object and the reference point in
accordance with the scale factor.
Non-Uniform Scale is not available in Incremental Dynamics.
After a transformation, you can enter a new scale factor or click OK to use the existing one.
Select Back when the transformation is complete. select Back again, then select another Incremental
Dynamics option.
Selecting and updating a parametric body will prompt a message to remove the body's parameters
or ignore the body.
Rotate About a Point

Move objects around a line parallel to the ZC axis, passing through the selected reference point.
A positive angle rotates the object counterclockwise with respect to the WCS.
After the initial transformation, you can enter another rotation angle, or click OK to use the existing value.
Select Back when the transformation is complete. Select another Incremental Dynamics option.
Rotate About a Line
Moves objects around a line parallel to a specified rotation axis, passing through a selected reference
point.
The positive direction of rotation is determined by the right hand rule.
The initial transformation completed, enter another rotation angle or click OK to use the existing value.
Select Back when the transformation is complete. Select another Incremental Dynamics option.
Undo Last
Reverses the current transformation type entirely, not just the last move. For example, if you had
translated an object, and then rotated it several times, this option would reverse only the rotation
transformations.
Undo All
Reverses all current dynamic transformations and scale operations.
Both Last and All undo options take more time than EditUndo, because they reverse the current
transformation step by step. If the part undergoing transformations is large, you may consider updating
the model and using EditUndo.
After Update Model has been executed, Undo Last and Undo All have no effect Use EditUndo.
Update Model
Use this option to complete all transformations. The new objects are actually created, and all views are
regenerated.
Limitations
If you cannot perform Incremental Dynamics, one of the following error messages is displayed:
Dynamics Not Allowed
Too Many Active Views
The maximum allowed number of views is 50. Remove a sufficient number of views in order to use
Incremental Dynamics.
Work View Has Perspective
Incremental Dynamics cannot be performed in a perspective view.
Expand Work View In Effect
Incremental Dynamics is incompatible with certain functions.
If Incremental Dynamics is not allowed, you are prompted to select another transformation type.
If you select Multiple Copies, only the first copy is displayed during dynamic transformation
process. Similarly, when you specify Subdivisions, the objects displayed in the dynamic process do
not reflect the subdivision factor. All requested copies and subdivisions are generated when the
model is updated.
Edit Object Display
Use the Edit Object Display command to modify the layer, color, font, width, grid count, translucency,
and shading status of existing objects.
You can edit both general and analysis type objects.

Where do I find it?
EditEdit Object Display
Select the object >press ctrl+J or click on the icon edit object display > select the properties like colour,
Line font, width of the line as follows > click on ok button.

Switch on the button display object color
Show and Hide menu
The EditShow and Hide menu has commands to show or hide objects individually or in groups.
You can use these commands in many functions, such as while working in a layout, drawing, drawing
member view, or sketch.
Click on show and hide button , hide coordinate system as follows
See the out put the datum plane is switched off.

To hide any selected item click on the button hide or type ctrl+B and select the object
and click on ok button
To show the object click on show button or press ctrl+shift+K select the object >ok.
The hided objets will be retrived to the graphic window as follows
Types of constraints
Use constraints to precisely control the objects in a sketch and to convey the design intent for a feature. There are two types of
constraints, geometric constraints and dimensional constraints.
Geometric Constraints
Specify and maintain geometric conditions for or between sketch geometry.
For example, geometric constraints can establish:
A line as vertical or horizontal.
Two lines as perpendicular or parallel to each other.

1. Tangent
2. Vertical
3. Horizontal
4. Offset
5. Perpendicular
6. Coincident
Dimensions
Specify and maintain dimensions for or between sketch geometry. Dimensional constraints are also called driving dimensions.
For example, dimensions can establish:
The size of a sketch object, such as the radius of an arc or length of a curve.
A relationship between two objects, such as the distance between two points.
Dimensional constraints look the same as Drafting dimensions. However, while Drafting dimensions are notations, dimensional
constraints control the size of sketch objects.
Geometric Constraints quick reference
Constraint Command Icon in Description

Type icon graphics
window
Fixed Defines fixed characteristics for geometry, depending on the type of geometry
as follows:
Point
Fixes the location.
Line
Fixes the angle.
Line, Arc or elliptical arc end point

Fixes the location of the end point.
Arc center, elliptical arc center, circle center, or ellipse center

Fixes the location of the center.
Arc or circle
Fixes the radius and the location of the center.
Elliptical arc or Ellipse

Fixes the radii and the location of the center.
Spline control point

Fixes the location of the control point.
Fully Fixed Creates sufficient fixed constraints to completely define the position and
orientation of sketch geometry in one step.
Coincident Defines two or more points as having the same location.
Concentric Defines two or more circular and elliptical arcs as having the same center
Collinear Defines two or more lines as lying on or passing through the same straight line.
Point On Defines the location of a point as lying on a curve.

Curve
Point on Defines the location of a point as lying on a projected curve. You must select
String the point first, then select the curve.
Note This is the only valid constraint that should be applied to a projected
curve.
Midpoint Defines the location of a point as equidistant from the two end points of a line
or a circular arc.
Note For the Midpoint constraint, select the curve anywhere other than at its
end points.
Horizontal Defines a line as horizontal.
Vertical Defines a line as vertical.
Parallel Defines two or more lines or ellipses as being parallel to each other.
Perpendicular Defines two lines or ellipses as being perpendicular to each other.
Tangent Defines two objects as being tangent to each other.
Equal Length Defines two or more lines as having the same length.
Equal Radius Defines two or more arcs as having the same radius.
Constant Defines a line as having a fixed, unchanging length.

Length
Constant Angle Defines a line as having a fixed, unchanging angle with respect to the sketch
CSYS.
Mirror Curve Defines two objects as being mirror images of each other.
Make Defines two objects as being symmetric with each other.

Symmetric
Pattern Curve Defines a circular pattern of curves.
Pattern Curve Defines a linear pattern in one direction.
Pattern Curve Defines a linear pattern in two directions.
Pattern Curve Defines a general pattern of curves.
Offset Curve The Offset Curve command offsets a chain of curves, projected curves, or
curves/edges in the current assembly, and constrains the geometry using an
Offset constraint.
Slope of Curve Defines a spline, selected at a defining point, and another object as being
tangent to each other at the selected point.
Scale, Uniform A spline will scale proportionally to keep its original shape when both of its end
points are moved (that is, when you change the value of a horizontal constraint
created between the end points).
Scale, Non- When both of its end points are moved (that is, when you change the value of a
Uniform horizontal constraint created between the end points), a spline will scale in the
horizontal direction, but keeps its original dimensions in the vertical direction.
The spline appears to stretch.
Note You cannot apply a Scale constraint to a spline if any of its interior
defining points are constrained.
Trim The Trim Recipe Curve command associatively trims curves that you
associatively project or intersect into a sketch, and creates a Trim constraint
Dimension commands
There are five dimension commands. Each command supports a related family of measurement methods. When you edit a
dimension, you can change the measurement method between the family of measurement methods.
Dimension
Description Measurement Methods
Command
Horizontal
Creates a dimensional constraint between one or two objects you select. Vertical
This command will infer one of these measurement types based on the Point to Point
objects you select, or you can explicitly select one these dimension Perpendicular
Rapid measurement methods. Cylindrical
Dimension
Angular
A linear, radial, or angular dimension is created. Radial
Diametral
Creates a dimensional constraint between the objects you select using Horizontal
one of these dimension measurement methods. Vertical
Linear Point to Point
Dimension When you edit a dimension using one of these measurement methods, you Perpendicular
can change the measurement method between the methods listed. Cylindrical
Creates a radial or diametral dimensional constraint on an arc or circle

you select. Radial
Radial Diametral
Dimension When you edit a radial or diametral dimension, you can change the
measurement method between the methods listed.
This measurement method cannot

Angular Creates an angular dimensional constraint between two lines you select.
be changed to another type.
Dimension
Creates an expression to control the collective length of a set of lines and

arcs you select.
This measurement method cannot
Perimete be changed to another type.
r Dimension To view or edit the expression, use the Expressions or the Edit Sketch
Parameters command.
Sketch Colors
Use the Colors sketch preference to customize the colors that are available in a sketch.
The color sets can help you:
Differentiate objects in a sketch.
Differentiate constraint conditions in a sketch.

Sketch Colors
A default set of Colors identifies:
Curves
Constraints and Dimensions
Automatic Dimensions
Overconstrained Objects
Conflicting Objects
Unsolved Curves
Reference Dimensions
Reference Curves
Partially Constrained Curves
Fully Constrained Curves
Out-of-date Objects
Degree-of-Freedom Arrows
Recipe Curves
Inactive Sketches
Customizing Sketch Colors
You can customize Colors using both the Customer Defaults utility and Sketch Preferences:
Customer
1. Choose File tabUtilitiesCustomer Defaults.
Defaults
2. Expand the Sketch group, select GeneralPart Settings, and click on any swatch to change the color.
Note Changes you make to Customer Defaults take effect the next time you start NX, and apply to new part
files only. NX retains the color settings in existing files unless you explicitly change them.
Sketch
1. Choose File tabPreferencesSketch.
Preferences
2. Click the Part Settings tab.
3. Click on any swatch to change the color.
4. Click OK.
Note NX immediately applies your Sketch Preferences color changes to all sketches in the current part file.
Display Sketch Constraints

Use the Display Sketch Constraints command to show all geometric constraints applied to the sketch.
Constraints Symbols
When you place the cursor over a curve in the sketch, the curve and all others associated with it are
highlighted, and markers are displayed to indicate which geometric constraints have been applied to the
highlighted geometry.
The following figure shows some examples of browsing constraints.

Animate a dimension
1. On the Sketcher Constraints toolbar, choose Animate , or choose

ToolsConstraintsAnimate Dimension.
2. To select the dimension you want to animate, either choose its name from the dialog or click the
dimensional constraint in the graphics window.
3. Enter the Lower and Upper Limits. NX varies the dimension between these two values during
the animation.
4. Enter the number of steps in the cycle.

5. To display the original sketch dimensions during the animation, select the Display Dimensions
check box.
6. Click OK or Apply to start the animation.
7. Click Stop to end the animation.
Auto Constrain
This command lets you select the types of geometric constraints that NX applies automatically to
your sketch. NX analyzes the geometry in the active sketch and applies the selected constraints where
possible. This function can be especially useful when you add geometry to the active sketch, particularly if
that geometry was imported from a different CAD system.
Where do I find it?
On the Sketch Constraints toolbar, click Auto Consrain .
Choose ToolsConstraintsAuto Constraint.
Convert To/From Reference overview
Converts sketch curves (but not points) or sketch dimensions from active to reference, or from
reference back to active. Reference dimensions do not control sketch geometry. By default NX displays
reference curves in phantom line font:
1. Active curves (solid green)
2. Reference curve
3. Reference dimension
4. Active dimensions
NX ignores reference curves in down-stream operations like Extrude or Revolve.
Alternate Solution overview
Lets you display alternate solutions for both dimensional and geometric constraints, and select a
result. The example below shows how the geometry changes when you choose Alternate Solution and
select a dimension.
Alternate solution
Inferred Constraints
You can control which constraint settings NX automatically infers during curve construction by
setting one or more of the following dialog options.
Constraints to Infer and Apply
Horizontal Collinear
Vertical Concentric
Tangent Equal Length (inferred only for Derived Line)
Parallel Equal Radius

Perpendicular
Dimensional Constraints - select this option to create a dimension if you enter values in the
dynamic input boxes for the Profile, Line, Arc, Circle or Rectangle commands.
Constraints Recognized by Snap Point
The following constraints work in conjunction with the snap point options. That is, NX recognizes
these constraints only if an applicable snap point option is on.
Coincident Point on Curve
Midpoint Point on String
Reference Outside Work Part
Reference Outside Turn this option on when you want to snap new curves to geometry anywhere in an
Work Part assembly. Note that you must also turn off the Create Inferred Constraints option
in order to reference points, curves, and edges outside the current work part.
Create/Disable Inferred Constraints
This option lets you enable/disable inferred constraints as you create and/or edit sketch geometry. If
you turn the option off, Sketcher lets you take advantage of inferred constraints as you work, but does not
store the actual constraints in your file. In the example below, we've disabled Create Inferred
Constraints. Note that tangent and horizontal constraints are available during curve creation (1 and 2 on
the left). But Sketcher deletes the constraints when the profile is complete (right):
Before and After Edit with Inferred Constraints Off

To temporarily disable Create Inferred Constraints when the option is active, press and hold the Alt key.
Note that NX saves your Create Inferred Constraints setting for each sketch in a part file.

Mirror sketch geometry
1. Click Mirror on the Sketch Operations toolbar .
2. Select the line to mirror around. For example, let's suppose you want to mirror the geometry
below around the lower line (1).
Center Line Selected (1)
3. Press MB2 to advance to the next step and select the target geometry. In this example, we've
selected all the remaining curves in the sketch.
4. Click OK to complete the operation.
Mirrored Geometry with Reference Center Line
Note that Sketcher applies mirror geometric constraints to all the geometry associated with
the Mirror operation.
Offset Curve: special cases
Selection Intent at creation time only

In general, Selection Intent rules apply only when you create an offset. For example, if you offset three
connected curves using the Connected Curves Selection Intent option, NX does not update the offset if
you later add a fourth line coincident to the start or the end of the base chain. Note these common
scenarios in which Offset Curve does preserve your design intent when you edit a base chain:
If you fillet a corner in the base chain, NX creates a corresponding fillet in the offset chain (1).
If you delete a curve in the base chain, NX deletes the corresponding curve in the offset chain (2).
If you extend or trim a curve a curve in the base chain, NX extends or trims the corresponding curve in
the offset chain (3).
For the three examples above, note that changes you make to the offset chain do not affect the base
chain. Therefore trimming or extending an end of an offset chain removes the end constraint.
Middle portion of an offset chain

You cannot trim the middle portion of an offset chain. For example, you cannot trim the portion of the
offset chain between the vertical curves below (4). However, you can trim the base chain between the
vertical curves (5).
Base curves and zero length
NX will not reduce the base curve of an offset to a length of zero.
For example, this sketch includes a chain offset by 10 mm.
Next, use the Fully Fixed constraint to fix the position of the offset chain.
Edit the offset and reverse the direction so that the base chain is to the inside
of the offset chain.
If you edit the offset distance, NX can move only the base chain since the
position of the offset chain is fixed. If you increase the distance so that the
middle curve in the base chain would go to a zero length, NX returns an over-
constrained condition.
Intersection Curve overview
The Intersection Curve command creates a smooth chain of curves where a set of tangent
continuous faces intersects the sketch plane. With Intersection Curve you can:
Cycle through multiple intersection solutions.

Suppress interior trimming holes in the input faces.
Join multiple output curves into a single curve.
Refit the output curve.
Specify maximum deviation between the input faces and the swept faces.
Sketch plane through multiple faces (1) and resulting intersection curve (2)
Create Intersection Points
Input Sheet Bodies (Left), Sketch on Path (1), and Intersection Points (2)
1. You will most often use Intersection Points with the Sketch on Path command to create points
where target geometry intersects the Sketch on Path plane. In this example, we've chosen the
Variational Sweep command and created a Sketch on Path (3 below). Next we want to identify
where the remaining sheet bodies intersect the sketch plane.
Sketch on Path and Intersection Point (3)
2. Click Intersection Point on the Sketch Operations toolbar.
3. Set Selection Intent appropriately for your part. In this example, we've chosen Tangent Curves.
4. Select the target rail (4 below). If appropriate, the button becomes active so that you can
cycle through multiple solutions. Note that Intersection Point creates a point (5) and datum axes
(6) where the rail and sketch plane intersect.
Sketch on Path and Intersect Points (5 and 6)
5. Choose Intersection Point again as necessary to identify the intersection on additional rails.
6. Click Existing Point on the Snap Point option toolbar so that you can snap to
the intersection points.
7. Select the appropriate curve commands to create your profile, and ensure that you fully constrain
the sketch. Here's our constrained profile:
Constrained Profile
When you exit Sketcher, Variational Sweep builds the surface(s). Here's our result:
Output Variational Sweep

Project curves to a sketch
1. On the Sketch Operations toolbar, click Project .
2. Use the Selection Intent to set your selection criterion. Note that Selection Intent is not available
for editing projected curves created before NX 4.
3. Select the curve string, face, edges or points you want to project onto the sketch plane. For
instance, suppose you want to project the edges on the left below, and use them to create the
feature on the right:
Feature edges highlighted
In this example, we set Selection Intent to Tangent Edges and chose one of the target edges.
Shiftclick to deselect if necessary.
4. Select the Associative check box.
5. From the Output Curve Type list, select Original.
6. Click OK. NX projects a curve string onto the sketch plane from the selected curves, face, or
edges.
Curves created on the sketch plane from projected edges
Here is the completed sketch and the extruded feature.

Final sketch and extruded feature
Because we projected the curves associatively, changes to the parent feature automatically
update the sketch. For example, if we change the block dimension, the sketch changes
automatically:
Updating the feature automatically updates associated curves
Add Existing Curves
Lets you add most existing curves and points, as well as conic curves such as ellipses, parabolas
and hyperbolas, to your active sketch. Note the following considerations:
The curves and points must be coplanar with the sketch.
NX does not apply constraints to the added curves or close gaps between geometry. To apply
geometric constraints, use the Automatic Constraints command.
You cannot add "developed," or "associative," curves to a sketch with this option. These include
curves created using the Law Subfunction (splines and helixes) and those created using
Project Points/Curves. Use the Project command instead.
You cannot add extruded curves to a sketch that was created after the extrusion.
Adding Ellipses, Parabolas and Hyperbolas
Note the following considerations:
If you choose a parabola or hyperbola to add to a sketch, NX adds it as a general conic curve.
If you choose a full ellipse, or one that is equal to or greater than 180 degrees, NX adds it as an
ellipse.
If you choose a partial ellipse of less than 180 degrees, you must specify whether you want the
curve to be an ellipse or a general conic curve
Edit Defining String
You can use this option to add objects (curves, edges, and faces) to or remove them from a string
that has been used to define a feature.
When you choose this option, the Edit String dialog displays. Choose the String Type (Section or Guide) to
edit. Select objects to remove using Shift+MB1; select objects to add using MB1. The Filter option is
available if you need to restrict selection to a particular type of object - the available options are
All (the default), Curve, Edge, Face, and Sketch.
The Edit String dialog also contains a list box showing the names of any features that reference the
active sketch. If more than one feature references the sketch, you can choose the one you want to
change from the list box.
If you are designing in context (i.e., the displayed part is an assembly and the work part is a component),
you cannot remove a sketch curve if it has been used to create a feature. Instead, use the Window pull-
down menu to make the component the displayed part - then you can remove the curve.
Edit Curve Parameters
Divide a curve into equal segments
1. Click EditCurveDivide to open the Divide Curve dialog box.
2. In the Type group, select Equal Segments. Select Curve is active.
3. In the graphics window, select the curve to divide.

4. From the Segment Length list, select Equal Parameter or Equal Arc Length from the Option
list.
5. In the Number of Segments box, type the number of segments you want to divide the curve into.
6. Click OK or Apply to divide the curve.
The figure below shows an example of segmenting a curve (ellipse) using the Equal Parameter method.
Before After
Selected curve Resulting number of segments after the divide curve operation.
Ellipse center The plus signs indicate the start and endpoints of the divided segments
and are not actually displayed on the graphics screen.
The figure below shows an example of segmenting a curve (ellipse) using the Equal Arc Length method.
Before After
The plus signs indicate the start and endpoints of the divided segments
and are not actually displayed on the graphics screen
Selected curve
Resulting number of segments of equal length after the divide
curve operation.
Stretch Curve
Use this option to move geometric objects, while simultaneously stretching or shrinking
selected lines. You can move most object types, but you can only stretch and shrink lines.
Stretch Curve works for all object types except sketches, groups, components, bodies, faces and
edges.
Stretch Curve is not applicable for Sketcher curves. The option is available when a sketch is active
so that you can still edit non-sketch curves without having to disable the active sketch.
Stretch Dialog Options
Delta XC, Delta To use the Delta method, enter delta XC, YC and ZC values. The geometry is moved
YC, Delta ZC or stretched by these delta values.
Reset Values Resets the three delta buffers to zero.
Point to Point Displays the Point Constructor dialog to let you define the reference and destination
points. (The Stretch dialog updates the delta XC, YC, and ZC values.)
Undo Lets you change the geometry back to a previous state.
Basic Stretch Curve Procedure
To perform a stretch:
1. Choose Stretch from the Edit Curve dialog. The Stretch dialog is displayed.
2. Select the geometry you wish to stretch, either individually or using a rectangle.
3. Specify the method, Delta or Point to Point, you wish to use to stretch the selected objects
Choosing Apply or OK extends or moves the selected geometry from the reference point to the
destination point. Geometry that is moved is translated by the delta values, and zero length lines are
deleted.
If you choose Apply to perform the stretch, the Stretch dialog remains open and all objects remain
selected. You can then add new objects and deselect any previously selected, and use Apply again.
If, after you have used Apply, you are not satisfied with the results, choose the Undo button in the Stretch
dialog. The objects are repositioned back to their previous locations, or to their locations after the
previous Apply. You can use the Undo button repeatedly until all previous Apply operations are rolled
back. The objects remain selected as each Undo is entered. Selecting different objects, or choosing
Cancel, clears the Undo buffer.
If you choose Undo after an OK or Cancel (from the Edit pull-down menu, or the MB3 popup), the
geometry rolls back to the condition prior to entering the Stretch function.
When you stretch a line endpoint, the following conventions apply:
Lines that are single-selected are moved if the selection point is near the midpoint of the line.
Otherwise, the line endpoint nearest the selection point is extended. Line endpoints that are
going to be stretched are highlighted with an asterisk after they are selected.
Lines selected with the rectangle method are extended if the rectangle contains only one of the
line's endpoints. Otherwise, the line is moved.
If a line to be stretched is contiguous to a fillet, the tangency of the fillet to the line may be lost.
Lines stretched to a zero length are deleted if the stretch operation is accepted.
Associated geometry is adjusted when Update is performed.
Selecting objects using a rectangle operates as described under Robust Selection methods for the Class
Selection Tool. You define the rectangle by indicating two diagonal corners. The rectangle must
encompass the objects you want to translate, as well as the endpoints of lines you want to stretch. If only
a part of an object (except a line) is within the rectangle, the object is not selected.
Create a curve length feature with incremental extension
Use this option to extend or trim a curve by a given curve length increment. The curve length increment is
the length used to extend or trim from the original curve. The default value is 0.0.
1. Click EditCurveCurve Length to open the Curve Length dialog box. Select Curve
is active.
2. Select the curve to extend or trim.

3. Set the Length Option to Incremental.
4. Set the End Option to either Start and End or Symmetric.
5. Choose from the Method option to specify the shape of the direction of the curve to be trimmed
or extended.
6. In the Limits group, enter the required values for the curve length increment in the Start and End
fields. You can also change the length by dragging the onscreen handles. The values in the Start
and End fields are dynamically updated in the Curve Length dialog box when you drag the
handles.
You can enter either a positive or negative value for the curve length. A positive value
generates an extension of the curve. A negative value truncates the curve. The following
figure is an example of an incremental curve length feature.
7. Optional. If you do not want associative output, clear the Associative Output check box.
8. Optional. Choose from the available Input Curves options to specify whether you want to Keep,
Hide, Delete or Replace the input curves.
Delete and Replace are available only if you clear the Associative Output check box.
9. Click OK or Apply.
An example of extending a curve by its incremental curve length is shown in the figure below.
Incremental curve length using circular direction
Original curve selected
Start point
End point
Extended incremental curve length of circular direction from the start point
Extended incremental curve length of circular direction from the end point
Resulting extended curve
Smooth Spline - Basic Procedure
To smooth a B-spline, follow these steps:
1. Select a B-spline to smooth. If the B-spline is associative, a warning message displays that
feature parameters will be removed.
The B-spline is highlighted and a conehead displays its start position.
Selected B-spline (1), Conehead Showing Start (2), an Arc (3)

2. Choose the Smoothing Type, Curvature or Curvature Variation.
o You can optionally choose the Partial function if you only want to smooth part of the B-
spline. Drag the pole handles to define the section you want smoothed.
3. Choose the level of constraint you want for the start and end of the B-spline, G0, G1, G2, or G3.
The shape of the spline updates, and the maximum deviation from the original curve with a
conehead pointing to its location displays. As you make additional changes to the smoothing
parameters, the maximum deviation updates dynamically.
Maximum Deviation Displays Dynamically
4. Use the Smoothing Factor slider to specify how many times you want the smoothing operation
performed each time you click Apply.
5. Use the Modification Percentage slider to specify the level of overall smoothing you want for the B-
spline.
6. Click Apply to smooth the B-spline. You may want to click Apply a number of times until you get the
desired shape, or you may want to change the boundary constraints.
7. When the shape is as desired, click OK. The B-spline is smoothed accordingly.
Create a sketch directly in Modeling

This example shows how to create a sketch using the Direct Sketch group commands with a part containing a Datum CSYS. You
create two rectangles, trim them to each other, and finally extrude the sketch.
1. Choose Home tabDirect Sketch groupRectangle
2. Click above the X-Axis and to the right of the Y-Axis.
3. For the second rectangle point, select the Datum CSYS

point.
The sketch is dimensioned and fully constrained.
4. Optional step:
If the sketch was not automatically dimensioned,

Continuous Auto Dimensioning is turned off by the
customer default setting. Turn on Continuous Auto
Dimension .
5.
While Rectangle is still selected, click the first
point for the next rectangle inside the first rectangle.
6. Click the second rectangle point.
The sketch is fully constrained with auto dimensions.
7. Choose Home tabDirect Sketch groupQuick Trim.
8. Drag your mouse over the curves to trim them.
The first curve is trimmed.

The second curve is trimmed.
The third curve is trimmed.
The fourth curve is deleted.
9. With the sketch active, choose Home tabFeature
group Extrude.
Note
If Finish Sketch is available, the sketch is
active.
The active sketch is selected.

10. Enter the limit values. For this example, 140 is entered
for the End Distance.
11. Click the middle mouse button to create the

extrusion.
The sketch is not active.
Sketch On Plane and Sketch On Path
Sketch On Plane
Create a Sketch On Plane when you want to associate the sketch feature to a planar object such as a datum plane or a face.
1. Sketch on the plane of a Datum CSYS
2. Sketch on a face of the extruded sketch.
Sketch On Path
Create a Sketch On Path when you are building an input profile for features like Variational Sweep. This example shows a fully
constrained Sketch On Path and the resulting variational sweep.
1. Path
2. Sketch
3. Variational Sweep
Sketch on a planar face
Sketch on a CSYS plane Create a base support Sketch on a Path
This example creates a sketch on a planar face and demonstrates how to dynamically:
Select an edge for the reference direction.
Enter values in the input boxes for a line's parameters.
Switch between Profile line mode and arc mode.

Steps
1. Create a part that looks like the following picture. Hint: extrude the chamfer sketch from the
Sketch on a CSYS plane example.
2. From the Type Filter list on the Selection Bar, choose Face. Select the smallest angled face.
3. On the Feature toolbar, click Sketch .
4. Under Sketch Orientation, click Select Reference and select the upper right edge to specify the
horizontal reference.
5. Click the middle mouse button to accept the sketch plane. Note that Sketcher orients the view to
the sketch and starts the Profile command.
6. On the Sketch Constraints toolbar, click Create Inferred Constraints .
7. Click on the upper left side of the face to start the first line.
8. Type 16 in the Length box, press Tab, and type 0 in the Angle box. Press Enter.
9. Press, drag, and release the left mouse button. The input mode changes to arc mode.
10. Drag the cursor down and to the left to create an arc.
11. When you see the dotted line indicating that the arc and curve end points are aligned, click the
left mouse button.
12. Sketcher automatically changes to line mode. Move the cursor in a horizontal direction to the left
until you see a dotted line under the top upper line's left endpoint.
13. Click to end the line.
14. Press, drag and release the left mpuse button to change to arc mode.
15. Drag the arc to meet the upper line's left end point and click the mouse to complete the arc.
16. Click the middle mouse button to exit string mode, and press Ctrl+Q to exit the Sketcher.
Save the part file.
Create a base support
This tutorial shows you how to create a base support using fully-constrained loops:
1. Create a new part based on the Model template and enter base_support as the part
name. When you click OK, NX automatically starts the Modeling application.
3. From the Sketcher toolbar, select the sketch name text, type an appropriate sketch name,
and press Enter.
4. Click the middle mouse button to accept the default plane and horizontal reference. NX
orients the view to the sketch and starts the Profile command.
5. On the Sketch Constraints toolbar, click Show All Constraints and Create
Inferred Constraints .
6. Click Inferred Constraints Settings and turn on all of the constraint options.
7. Draw a 100 mm horizontal line from left to right below the XC axis. The exact length of the line is
not important since you will dimension the part later.
8. To switch to arc mode, click the left mouse button, drag, and release. Draw a tangent arc upward.
When you see the vertical alignment indicator, click to complete the arc.
9. Continue drawing the sketch until it looks like a closed loop with two arcs at either end.
Press Esc to break the string of lines.

10. On the Sketch Constraints toolbar, click Constraints .
11. Select the two arcs and click Equal Radius .
12. Select the two lines, right-click, and choose Equal Length.
13. Select the bottom line near its middle, and then select the point at the origin of the datum CSYS.
Click Midpoint .
14. Select either arc near its middle, and then select the point at the origin of the datum CSYS. Click
Midpoint .
15. On the Sketch Constraints toolbar, click Inferred Dimensions .
16. In the Dimensions dialog bar, click Sketch Dimensions Dialog .
17. In the Dimensions dialog box, choose Auto Placement.

18. Select the top and bottom lines, place the dimension to the left of the part, and enter 125.0.
19. Select both arcs, place the dimension above the part, and enter 225.0.
Note that the sketch is fully constrained.

20. Press Esc twice to close the dialog box and exit the Dimension option.
21. The part requires three additional loops: one loop to position the counter bore holes, and two
loops to define the post. On the Sketch Operations toolbar, click Offset Curve .
22. On the Selection Bar, set Selection Intent to Connected Curves.
23. In the Offset Curve dialog box, select Create Dimension.
24. Click any curve in the profile, type 14 in the Distance box, and if necessary, doubleclick the
conehead to reverse the offset direction toward the inside of the loop.
25. Click Apply to create the first loop. Then use the same steps to create two additional inner loops
at offsets 30 mm and 40 mm.
26. The first offset loop provides reference geometry to position the holes. Select all the curves in the
loop, rightclick the loop, and choose Convert To/From Reference.
27. To position the holes on the arcs, you must create and constrain points at each arc midpoint. On
the Sketch Curve toolbar, click Point and place a point near the arc midpoint.
28. On the Sketch Constraints toolbar, click Constraints .
29. To specify multiple constraints in a single operation, hold down the Ctrl key when you select the
target geometry. In this case, hold down Ctrl and select the arc and the point.
30. Click Point on Curve and Midpoint .

31. Use the same steps to create and constrain a point at the midpoint of the second arc.
32. Press Ctrl+Q to exit Sketcher.
33. On the Feature toolbar, click Extrude .
34. On the Selection Bar, set Selection Intent to Connected Curves. Select the large arc on the right
and specify 0 and 20 in the Start and End input boxes in the graphics window. Double-click the
vector cone head to orient the extrude in the -ZC direction, and press Enter.
35. Click Apply to create the extrude.
36. Select the first loop on the inside of the reference loop.
37. Type 0 for the Start distance and 36 for the End distance, and orient the extrude in the +ZC
direction.
38. Rightclick the extrude and choose BooleanUnite. Type 36 in the End input box and click
Apply.
39. If necessary, switch to wireframe display. Select both loops inside the reference loop.
40. Type 36 for the Start distance and 60 for the End distance, and press Enter.
41. Rightclick the extrude and choose BooleanUnite and click OK to exit the Extrude dialog box.
42. On the Form Feature toolbar, click Hole .
43. Under Type, choose Counterbore .
44. Type 15 for the C-Bore Diameter, 3 for the C-Bore Depth, 10 for the Hole Diameter, 30 for the
Hole Depth, and 0 for the Tip Angle. Select the upper face of the base.
45. Note that it is not necessary to select a Thru Face: just click Apply.
46. Choose the Point onto Point option.
47. Select any arc end point or midpoint along the reference arcs.
48. Click OK to finish placing the hole.
49. To complete the part, place counterbore holes on the remaining points along the reference
curves. Your part should look like the one below.
50. Save the part.
Sketch on a path
This tutorial shows you how to create a dome-shaped part like this one:
You can use a Sketch on Path, passing through a datum axis, and the Variational Sweep command to
construct the part.
1. Create a new part based on the Model template and enter an appropriate part name. When you
click OK, NX automatically creates a part containing a datum CSYS and starts the Modeling
application.
2. On the View toolbar, choose the Top option to orient the view down the Z axis.
3. On the Curve toolbar, click Studio Spline . Select the By Poles method and the Closed
option, and set Degree to 3. Select four points to create an oval-shaped spline similar to this one:
5. From the Type list, select On Path and click anywhere on the spline (1).
6. From the Orientation list, select Through Axis.
7. Select the Z axis of the Datum CSYS and click OK.

8. Orient the sketch to match your work preference, and ensure that the following options are active:
o Existing Point and End Point Snap Point options on the Selection Bar
Create Inferred Constraints
9. Beginning at the point on path (1), create a vertically constrained line and an arc similar to the
geometry below.
10. To constrain the arc center to the Z axis, click Constraints . Select the arc center (1)
and the datum axis (2) as shown below. (You may need to zoom out to see the arc center.)
Right-click the datum axis and choose Point on Curve.
11. To trim the arc to the datum, click Quick Trim on the Sketch Curve toolbar. Under
Boundary Curve, click Select Curve, click the datum axis, and click the middle mouse button.
Then click the arc at its right end. NX trims the curve to the datum.
12. To create the notch, select the Point on Curve Snap Point option. Click Profile and
construct a vertical line and horizontal line similar to the lines below.
13. To complete the sketch, you need to create the dimensions that will control the sweep.
To create a perpendicular dimension between the sketch plane

horizontal axis and the top of the arc, click Inferred
Dimensions . Select the datum (1) and the arc end

point (2) as shown here and place the dimension to the right
of the part.
14.
Create a Perpendicular dimension using the datum

axis at 1 and the line end at 2, and place the dimension
above the part.
15.
Create a Perpendicular dimension using the vertical line

end at 1 and the horizontal line end at 2, and place the
dimension.
16.
17.
Create a Vertical dimension using the arc end and the horizontal line, and place the
dimension. Note that the addition of this dimension fully constrains your sketch (as the dark red
line color and the Status line message indicate).
18. You are now ready to create the Variational Sweep. Exit Sketcher by pressing Ctrl+Q.
19. Choose InsertSweepVariational Sweep.
20. On the Selection Bar, set the curve rule to Single Curve and click Stop at Intersection .
Next, select the sketch geometry that you want to include in the sweep, being sure to define the
notch correctly.
21. In the Variational Sweep dialog box, choose Sheet from the Body Type list and click Preview
Note that you can use the Expression Tool to modify any of the dimensions, and NX updates
your Variational Sweep automatically. This example uses a larger perpendicular dimension
between the arc and the sketch plane horizontal axis.
Sketch in Place and Sketch on Path

You can create two types of sketches: a Sketch in Place or a Sketch on Path.
Sketch in Place
Create a Sketch in Place when you want to associate the sketch feature to a planar object such as a face
or a datum plane. For example, here are sketches in place on the ZX plane of a Datum CSYS (1) and on
a face of the extruded sketch (2).
Sketch in place (1) on a Datum CSYS plane and (2) on a face

Sketch on Path
Create a Sketch on Path when you are building an input profile for features like Variational Sweep. For
example, in the figure below, we have selected a path, located the sketch plane 15 mm from the start of
the curve, and kept the default Normal to Path direction.
Target path (left) and sketch plane on the path (right)
Next, you sketch and fully constrain the feature profile, and use it to create a Variational Sweep.
Constrained sketch profile (top) and resulting Variational Sweep (bottom)
Colors in Sketcher
Sketcher offers robust color support that you can use to identify and differentiate sketch geometry, and
easily understand constraint conditions. You will find the color options useful for organizing geometry
within any sketch, and especially in large or complex sketches. Two sets of colors are available: Sketch
Colors and Object Colors.
Sketch Colors
A default set of Sketch Colors identifies active and reference curves, active and reference dimensions,
overconstrained or partially-constrained curves, and other Sketcher entities. For example, the sketch
below includes Active (1) and Reference (2) dimensions.
Default Active (1 ) and Reference (2) Sketch Colors

To illustrate the current constraint conditions, NX assigns colors as you construct geometry and define
constraints. In the examples below, we've created a set of curves, which appear in the default sketch
curve color (top), and then we add constraints (bottom).
Colors Before (Top) and During Dimension Construction (Bottom)
NX displays the bottom curve in dark red since the dimension we are adding will fully constrain that curve.
The remaining curves display in the partially-constrained color. Any completely unconstrained curves will
display in the default Sketcher color during a constraint or dimension operation. A complete list of entities
and their default Sketch Colors appears at the bottom of this article.
Top
Customizing Sketch Colors
You can customize Sketch Colors using both the Customer Defaults utility and Sketcher Preferences:
Customer
1. Choose File Utilities Customer Defaults.
Defaults
2. Expand the Sketcher group, select Colors and click on any swatch to change
the color.
Changes you make to Customer Defaults take affect the next time you start NX,
and apply to new part files only. NX retains the color settings in existing files unless
you explicitly change them.
Sketcher
Preferences 1. Choose Preferences Sketch.
2. Click the Colors tab.
3. Click on any swatch to change the color.

4. Click OK.
NX immediately applies your Sketcher Preferences color changes to all sketches

in the current part file.
Top
Object Colors
NX Object Display colors are also available from within Sketcher. For example, here's the same sketch
switched to display geometry using Object Colors:
Sketch Displayed with Object Display Colors

We assigned blue to sketch lines, and red to sketch arcs. You can assign object colors in a number of
ways:
To assign a color to a group of curves/points, rightclick the group in the Part Navigator, choose
Edit Display, and use the color swatch to assign a color.
To assign a color to an entity type, select Preferences Object. On the Object dialog, you can
select the Line, Arc, Conic, and/or Spline type and assign a color. Note that you can assign
Object Colors to sketch entities whether or not Sketcher is active.
To assign a color to arbitrary curves/points, select the entities, rightclick on any one entity,
choose Edit Display, and use the color swatch to assign a color.
Note that you can switch between Sketch Colors and Object Colors by activating or deactivating
(Display Object Colors) on the Sketcher toolbar.
Top
Default Sketch Colors/Entities
Here's a list of entity types and their colors as they are set in Customer Defaults:
Colors You Can Set in Customer Defaults and Sketch Preferences
Entity Type Default Entity Type Default

Color Color
Curves Partially Constrained Curves
Dimensions Fully Constrained Curves
Overconstrained Curves and Out-of-Date Curves and

Dimensions Dimensions
Conflicting Curves and Dimensions Degree of Freedom Arrows
Reference Dimensions Participating Datum Curves
Reference Curves Inactive Sketches

Constraint Behavior
Options on the Sketch Constraints toolbar give you ways to apply, remove, and edit constraints.
When a sketch is underconstrained, degree-of-freedom arrows display for curves or points that are free to
move. When you fully constrain a sketch, no degree-of-freedom arrows display and a Status message
tells you that the sketch is fully constrained.
It is also possible that constraints can conflict with each other. When this happens, the color of the
dimensions and the geometry in conflict changes. This visual feedback indicates that the sketch cannot be
solved given the current constraints. The sketch is therefore displayed in the last solved condition.
It is also possible for a curve or vertex to be overconstrained. This occurs when you apply more
constraints to a curve or vertex than are needed to control it. When this occurs, the color of the geometry
and any dimensional constraints associated with it changes.
For a full explanation of how color is used in the sketcher see Colors in Sketcher.
If you activate the Create Inferred Constraints option, NX evaluates the active sketch every time you
apply a constraint. You can use the Delay Evaluation option on the Sketcher toolbar to delay sketch
evaluation until you do one of the following:
Turn off the Delay Evaluation option.
Choose Evaluate Sketch on the Sketcher toolbar.
Exit Sketcher Task Environment.
Creating Geometric Constraints
To create geometric constraints, click the Constraints icon or choose Insert Constraints.
You cannot create geometric constraints to external objects in a sketch that contains any positioning
dimensions.
Geometric constraints let you specify conditions that a sketch object must adhere to, or a relationship
between sketch objects that must be maintained. The sketcher uses these constraints, along with any
dimensional constraints, when evaluating the sketch.
You create geometric constraints by choosing sketch curves. As you choose sketch curves, the available
constraint types display as icon options on the graphics window. See Geometric Constraint Types for
details of each geometric constraint type.
The following figure shows the constraint types that display when you select two lines.
To apply a constraint, click one of the constraint options or right-click the geometry and choose the
constraint from the MB3 menu. Use Ctrl+MB1 to persistently select geometry to constrain in multiple
ways.
Unless Show No Constraints is on, NX always shows these constraints: coincident, point on curve,
midpoint, tangent, and concentric. You can control the display of other constraints with the Show All
Constraints option. Constraints do not display if the associated geometry is very small. To see all
constraints, turn off Preferences Sketch Dynamic Constraint Display.
Constraints that have already been applied are unavailable (for example, the parallel constraint is
unavailable). In the above example, we chose the Show All Constraints option to see visible constraint
markers.
You can control the constraint types that are inferred, at creation time only, for the Profile, Line, Arc,
Circle, Derived Lines and Fillet options with Infer Constraint Settings.
You can control when lines snap to horizontal, vertical, parallel, and perpendicular positions with
Preferences Sketch Snap Angle.
Pressing the ESC key while an object is selected, but before you have chosen a constraint type
to create, deselects the object and cancels the constraint icon options. You are then prompted to
select a new object to constrain. Pressing ESC again, or when no object is selected, exits the
Constraints option.
a. Turn off the Create Inferred Constraints option.
b. Turn on the Reference Outside Work Part option in Inferred Constraint Settings. Note that
Affected curve and constraint types are:
Curve Creation Commands Available Constraints
Profile Perpendicular
Line Parallel
Arc Collinear
Circle Tangent
Rectangle
Derived Lines
Offset Curve
Degree-of-Freedom Arrows
Degree-of-Freedom (DOF) arrows mark points on a sketch that are free to move. These arrows assist you
in constraining a sketch by showing you the directions you need to constrain for each point. When you
constrain a point, NX removes the DOF arrow. When all of the arrows are gone, the sketch is fully
constrained. There are three types of degree-of-freedoms: positional, rotational, and radius. This example
shows positional constraints:
Three Positional DOF Arrows
This point is free to move in the X direction.
This point is free to move in the Y direction.

This point is free to move in both the X and Y directions. In some cases, the point is free to move in
either X or Y directions but is limited by a constraint. For example, a point with a Point on Curve
constraint on a line is only allowed to move along the line.
Note that constraining a sketch is optional. You can still use an underconstrained sketch to define a
feature. You constrain a sketch when you need greater control of the design. Also, applying one
constraint can remove several DOF arrows.
Geometry Degree-Of-Freedom Arrows
In the Sketcher, a curve's location and shape are mathematically determined by analyzing the constraints
(rules) placed on the sketch curves. The degree-of-freedom arrow provides visual feedback about the
constraint status of a sketch curve. Each sketch curve type has different degree-of-freedom arrows when
initially created.
Curve Degree of Freedoms Description
Points have two degree of freedoms.
Lines have four degree of freedoms: two at each

endpoint.
Circles have three degree of freedoms: two at the

center and one for the radius.
Arcs have five degree of freedoms: two at the

center, one for the radius, and two for the start and
end angle.
Ellipses have five degree of freedoms: two at the

center, one for its orientation, and two for the major
and minor radii.
Partial Ellipses have seven degree of freedoms: two

at the center, one for its orientation, two for the
major and minor radii, and two for the starting and
ending angle.
Conics have six degree of freedoms: two at each of
its endpoints and two at its anchor point.
Spline by poles has four degree of freedoms: two at

each of its endpoints.
Splines through points have two degree of freedoms

at each of its defining points.
Locking Inferred Constraints
You can lock constraints and see a preview of a curves direction. Constraint symbols display on the
graphics window as you move the cursor. When you see a dashed help line, you can lock that constraint
by clicking MB2. For example, if you lock in a perpendicular constraint, the curve previews only in a
perpendicular direction as you move the cursor.
Line with Locked Perpendicular Constraint

To unlock the constraint, click MB2 again.
Use Inferred Constraint Settings to control the types of constraints that NX infers. Select or clear the
settings in this dialog to enable or disable constraint inferencing in curve creation functions.
Creating Sketch Dimensions
To create a sketch dimension, first choose the type of dimension from the Sketch Constraints toolbar (or
choose Insert Dimensions). Next, select the target geometry. For horizontal, vertical, parallel,
perpendicular, and angular dimensions you can select sketch curves, points on sketch curves, edges,
datum planes, or datum axes. If you use the Inferred Dimension option, NX makes an intelligent guess
about the dimension to create, based on your selection.
When you select the geometry, NX displays a preview of the dimension. Here are two examples:
Length Dimension (Left) and Angle Dimension (Right)

Note that NX 1) creates an expression and displays it in a dynamic input box and 2) adds dimension
extension lines and arrows.
To complete the dimension, drag it into place and click MB1. You can continue to add dimensions by
selecting geometry and clicking MB1. Pressing Esc while an object is selected for dimensioning
deselects the object and cancels the preview. NX prompts you to select a new object or an existing
dimension. Pressing Esc when there is no object or dimension selected exits the dimension option.
You cannot create dimension constraints to any external geometry if the sketch already contains
positioning dimensions.
Sketch Dimensions in Assemblies

Sketch dimensions are visible in an assembly when a component sketch is active. If there are multiple
occurrences of the work part in the displayed part of an assembly, the sketch dimensions are visible in all
of the work part occurrences. One exception is a sketch on a drawing: dimensions belonging to sketches
on drawings are visible only on the drawing, and remain visible on that drawing whether the sketch is
active or not.
Editing Sketch Dimensions

Sketch dimensions display like drafting dimensions. However, unlike drafting dimensions, if you change
their value the sketch geometry and the model change as well.
Editing Dimensions During Creation
You can edit a sketch dimension at any time, including at the time of creation. If you have just created the
dimension, you can immediately change its position by dragging its anchor. You can edit its expression
name or value using either the dynamic input boxes or the fields in the dialog.
Editing a Vertical Sketch Dimension Value with the Dynamic Input Box
If you use the dialog to edit a sketch dimension, you can drag the Value slider to dynamically update the
selected dimension.
Editing Existing Dimensions
To edit an existing dimension:
Double- Double-click a dimension to open the dynamic input box and display the options bar in the upper
click left corner of the graphics window. The options bar lets you:
Open the Dimensions dialog box.
Switch any new dimensions you create from Active to Reference and vice versa.
Activate/deactivate the Create Alternate Angle option for any new dimensions
you create.
MB3 Right-click a dimension and choose any of these options:

Attach Dimension - detaches a dimension from the geometry it references and
attaches it to other geometry that you specify.
Edit Value - opens the dynamic input box and displays the options bar in the upper left
corner of the graphics window.
Convert To/From Reference - lets you switch the current dimension from Active to
Reference and vice versa.
Edit - opens Drafting's dimension editing function, letting you add tolerance information
and text to a sketch dimension. See Edit Dimensions Overview in Drafting Help for more
information.
Style opens Drafting's Annotation Style function, letting you add tolerance information
and text to a sketch dimension. Note that you can use the Style option to edit multiple
dimensions at one time. See Annotation Preferences in Drafting Help for more
information.
You can use Drafting's Feature Parameters command to inherit tolerances and text
notes, and any styling with the exception of text height, from Sketcher onto a drawing.
See Feature Parameters in Drafting Help for more information.
Not all Drafting Annotation Style settings are available in Modeling. For example,
Character Size is unavailable because the Modeling and Drafting scales can
be different. NX grays out unavailable options.
You can also use the Animate Dimension command to display the effect of varying the value of an
expression dynamically over a specified range.
Reattach a Sketch in Place
In the part below, the blue pad features are extruded from a sketch that resides on a face. This example
shows you how to reattach the sketch to the face on the other side of the part.
1. Double-click any curve in the sketch to open it for edit.

2. On the Sketcher toolbar, click Reattach .
3. Keep the On Plane Type and select the target datum plane or face. The illustration below shows
the rotated part and the new planar face. Note that the green sketch CSYS moves from the
original face (left) to the new face (right).
4. In the Reattach Sketch dialog box, under Sketch Orientation, click Select Reference .
5. In the graphics window, select an appropriate horizontal reference.

6. Click OK to complete the reattach operation.
Polygon
Creates a polygon in a plane parallel to the XC-YC plane of the WCS.
To create a polygon:
1. Specify the number of sides.
2. Choose the size method.
3. Enter either a radius and orientation angle or length of side and orientation angle.
4. Specify the origin for the polygon.
There are three methods available for defining the size of a polygon.
Polygon Dialog Options
Inscribed Radius Enter the radius of an inscribed circle.
Side of Polygon Enter a value for the length of one side of the polygon. This length is applied to all
sides.
Circumscribed Enter the radius of an circumscribed circle.

Radius
The number of sides specified defines the shape of the polygon.
The orientation angle is the angle the polygon is rotated away from the XC axis in the counterclockwise
direction. This angle indicates where the first corner of the polygon is located.
The origin is the point defining the center point of the polygon and is specified using the Point
Constructor.
Inscribed Radius
You can define the size of a polygon by entering the radius of an inscribed circle. An inscribed radius is
also the distance from the origin to the middle of a side of the polygon.
Circumscribed Radius
This option defines the size of a polygon given the radius of a circumscribed circle. A circumscribed
radius is the distance from the origin to a corner of the polygon.
Helix
You can create a helix by defining the number of turns, a pitch, a radius method (law or constant),
turn direction, and the proper orientation. The result is a spline.
Create Helix Dialog Options
Number of Must be greater than zero. A value less than one is acceptable (e.g., 0.5 results in half of a
Turns helical turn).
Pitch The distance between successive turns along the helical axis. The Pitch must be greater
than or equal to zero.
Radius Lets you specify how the radius is defined. You can either define a radius by Use Law or
Method Enter Radius.
Use Law lets you control the radius changes of the helix using a law function.When you
choose this option, the radius field box is unavailable and the Law Subfunction dialog is
displayed.
Enter Radius (the default) lets you enter the radius value, which is constant throughout the
helix.
Radius Enter the value of the radius here if you chose the Enter Radius method.
Turn Direction A Right Hand helix starts at the base point and curls to the right (counterclockwise).
A Left Hand helix starts at the base point and curls to the left (clockwise).
Define Lets you use the Z-Axis, X-Point option of the Coordinate System Tool to define the helix
Orientation orientation.
Point Lets you use the Point Constructor to define the base point for the orientation definition.
Constructor
Number of Turns, Pitch, and Radius Method values are all expressions and can be changed
through Tools Expression.
You can use Information Object or AnalysisCurve to display spline information about a helix.
Turn Direction
Turn Direction controls the direction of the turns. A Right Hand helix starts at the base point and curls
to the right (counterclockwise). Conversely, a Left Hand helix starts at the base point and curls to the
left (clockwise).
Using a pitch of 0 (zero) and a linear law to define the radii, you can create a 2D spiral helix. (See
the figure below).
Define Orientation
Define Orientation lets you use the Z-Axis, X-Point option of the Coordinate System Tool to define the
helix orientation. You can define a base point using the Point Constructor dialog or by indicating a
cursor location.
If you do not define an orientation, the current WCS is used.
If you do not define a base point, the current XC=0, YC=0, and ZC=0 is used as a default base point.
Tolerance
The Distance Tolerance modeling preference controls the deviation between the spline and a true
theoretical helix. As the tolerance decreases, the number of control vertices needed to describe the
spline increases.
Error Messages
The Number of Turns, Pitch, or Radius values are checked to make sure they are valid expressions (i.e.,
all variables used in expressions have been previously defined, no invalid symbols are used in
expression, etc.). If any expressions are invalid, one of the following messages is displayed:
Invalid Expression for Number of Turns Invalid Expression for Pitch
Invalid Expression for Radius
All expressions entered for Number of Turns, Pitch, or Radius must evaluate to a positive value. If any
expressions do not meet this requirement, one of the following messages is displayed:
Number of Turns must be a positive value Pitch must be a positive value
Radius must be a positive value
Curve on Surface
Use this command to create a spline directly on the face or faces of one or more surfaces. You can
use Curve on Surface splines to define tangent hold lines for a transition surface or blend, or to define
trim edges. With Curve on Surface you can:
Constrain surface curves to other objects using G0, G1, and G2 continuity as appropriate.
Constrain curves in isoparametric or sectional directions.
Shape curves during creation with a full set of editing tools. Easily add, edit, and delete curve
control points.
Micro-position point handles during curve edit.
This example shows a curve on surface during edit.

Curve on Surface feature with G2 continuity symbol (1) and isoparametric editing handles (2)
Text
Use the Text command to generate NX curves from the True Type fonts in your native Windows font library.
Use this function whenever text is required as a design element in your part models. Text lets you select any
font in your Windows font library, specify character attributes (bold, italic, type, alphabet), type a text string in
the Text dialog box, and immediately convert the string to a geometry component within
your NX part model. Text traces the shape of selected True Type fonts and uses lines and splines to
produce character outlines of a text string, placing the resulting geometry on a plane, curves, or surfaces.
The following graphic shows how text created on a plane can be extruded.
Modifying text/ curve geomtery
Before you apply the geometry to complete the conversion, you can use the handles on the temporary
text geometry to modify its shape and location.
Modifying the shape
Before you apply the outline, you can modify its shape; for example, you can:
Change the character size by stretching the geometry in any direction.
Stretch the geometry to change the apparent aspect ratio of the "fonts".
Perform shear operations on the geometry.
Defining the placement face
Before you apply the outline, you can define the plane to place it on; for example, you can:
Use interactive handles to define the placement plane.
Use Snap Point to snap the geometry's baseline point-to-point.

Use left, right, and center alignment to define the pivot point of the geometry.
Place the geometry on a Datum Plane or Planar Face.

Aligning geometry to conform to a curve
Before you apply the outline, you can align the geometry to follow a curve; for example you can:
Select a curve or a chain of tangential smooth curves for the geometry to follow.
Define the location of characters along a curve.
Flip the starting direction.
Control an offset distance of the baseline from a curve.

Constraining text geometry onto a surface
Before you apply the outline, you can select a surface and a curve on the surface to constrain the text to
that surface. Use the handles to further manipulate the geometry and position it as desired.
Once you place the text you can wrap or project it onto the surface using the Wrap/Unwrap Curve or
Project Curve functions.
You can:
Use non-planar faces to define a local plane for the geometry.
Project the geometry from a local plane onto a surface.
Project the geometry normal to a surface.
Define a location for the geometry on a surface.
Define a horizontal direction for the geometry on a surface.
Create planar text
1. Choose InsertCurveText, or on the Curve toolbar click Text to open the Text dialog box.
2. From the Type list, select Planar.
3. Specify the location on the plane where you want to place the text.
An outline of the text follows the cursor until you click to specify a point. After you select a
location, the preview appears with handles.
4. In the first box under Text Properties, type the text string you want to convert to a curve.
5. Select the required font from the Font list.
6. Select the required script from the Script list.
7. Select the required font style from the Font Style list.
8. (Optional) You can do the following to get the desired results:
o Place the cursor on a handle, click and drag the handles to change the text parameters.
o Double-click the cone head to switch the direction of the text.
o Select the Use Kerning Spaces check box to increase or decrease the distance
between characters.
o Select the Create Bounding Box Curves check box to add a bounding box around the
text.
o Select the Anchor Location for the text frame from the list.
o Type values for the Length, Height, W-Scale, and Shearing parameters.
o Clear the Associative check box to create non-associative text curves. This check box is
selected by default.
o Clear the Join Curves check box to create curves which are not joined to form a single
spline. This check box is selected by default.
9. Click OK or Apply to create planar text.
Create text along a curve
1. Choose InsertCurveText, or on the Curve toolbar click Text to open the Text dialog box.
2. From the Type list, select On Curve to create text along a curve or a connected string. Select
Curve is active.
3. Select the curve on which to place the text.
4. Specify the vertical orientation method for the text.

For the Vector type orientation method, use the Specify Vector options to specify the vector.
Click Reverse Direction to reverse the direction of the specified vector.
The following graphic shows the ZC-axis selected as the vector for the Vector type orientation
method.
o Place the cursor on a handle, click and drag the handles to change the text parameters.
o Double-click the conehead to switch the direction of the text.
o Select the Use Kerning Spaces check box to increase or decrease the distance
between characters.
o Select the Anchor Location for the text frame from the list.
o Type values for the Length, Height, W-Scale, and Shearing parameters.
o Clear the Join Curves check box to create curves which are not joined to form a single
spline. This check box is selected by default.
10. Click OK or Apply to create the text geometry.

Create text on face
1. Choose InsertCurveText, or on the Curve toolbar click Text to open the Text dialog
box.
2. From the Type list, select the type as On Face. Select Object is active.
3. Select the text placement face.
4. Select the placement method for the location of the text.
Depending on the type of placement method, do one of the following:
o For the Curves on Faces type Use Select Curve to select the curves on
the face for the location of the text.
o For the Section Plane type Use the Specify Plane options to specify the plane for the
location of the text.

o Select the Use Kerning Spaces check box to increase or decrease the kerning spaces
between the characters.
o Double-click the conehead, to change the direction of the text.
o Place the cursor on a handle or arrow, click and drag to change the text parameters.
o Clear the Join Curves check box to create text curves which are not joined to form a
single spline. This check box is selected by default.
o Select the Project Curves check box to project the text curves on the parent faces in the
normal direction.
10. Click OK or Apply to create text on the face.
Datum Plane options
Type
Plane types are the construction methods you use to create planes. You can either select a plane type
from the Type option list or click one of the frequently used plane type method buttons located below the
option list. If you use the default Inferred plane type, you can immediately select objects on which to base
the plane.
When you edit a datum plane, you can change its type, defining objects, and associative status.
Panel of frequently used plane types

Click the following links for details about each plane Type:
Inferred Determines the best plane type to use based on o bjects you select.
Point and Direction Creates a plane from a point in a specified dire ction.
On Curve Creates a plane tangent to, normal or binormal t o a point on a curve or edge.
At Distance Creates a plane parallel to a planar face or ano ther datum plane at
a distance you specify.
YC-ZC plane Creates a fixed datum plane along the XC-YC axis of the Work Coordinate
System (WCS) or Absolute Coordinate System (ABS).
XC-ZC plane Creates a fixed datum plane along the XC-ZC axis of the WCS or ABS.
XC-YC plane Creates a fixed datum plane along the YC-ZC axis of the WCS or ABS.
At Angle Creates a plane using a specified angle.
Bisector Creates a plane mid-way between two selected pla nar faces or planes
using the bisected angle.
Curves and Points Creates a plane using a point and a second point , a line, linear
edge, datum axis, or face.
Two Lines Creates a plane using two existing lines, or a c ombination of lines,
linear edges, face axis, or datum axis.
Tangent to Face at Point, Line or Face Creates a datum plane tangent to a non-
planar surface, and optionally a second selected object.
Through Object Creates a datum plane based on the plane of a se lected object.
Coefficients Creates a fixed datum plane by specifying an equ ation using coefficients of A,
B, C, and D.
Fixed Available only when editing a datum plane.
Any datum plane created using the YC-ZC plane, XC-ZC plane, XC-YC plane, or Coefficients
types, or any of the other relative types that were used with the Associative check box not
selected, will all appear as the Fixed type during edit.
During edit, you can change a fixed datum plane to relative by changing the Type, redefining its
parent geometry, and selecting the Associative check box.
You can also do the reverse and change a relative datum plane to fixed, by either selecting the
Fixed type or clearing the Associative check box.
Plane Orientation
Appears when an alternate solution to the previewed plane becomes available.
Lets you cycle through the possible different solutions for the plane. You can also
Alternate
cycle through alternate solutions using the Page Down and Page Up keys. See
Solution
Alternate Solution for details.
Reverses the direction of the plane normal. You can also:

Right-click the normal direction conehead and choose Reverse Direction.
Reverse Plane Double-click the normal direction conehead.

Normal
The plane preview always displays an arrow conehead in its center that points in the
direction of the plane normal.
Common to all Types.
Settings
For datum planes, makes the datum plane associative instead of fixed, so it is
parametrically related to its parent features.
If you clear this check box, the datum plane will be fixed and will not be associative. If
you later edit a non-associative datum plane, regardless of which type was used to
Associative create it, it will appear in the Type list as Fixed.
An associative datum plane displays the name Datum Plane in the Part Navigator.
A non-associative datum plane displays the name Fixed Datum Plane in the Part
Navigator.
Available to all datum planes of non-fixed Types.
Datum Axis options

Type
Axis types are the construction methods you use to create datum axes. You can select an axis type from
the Type option list or click one of the frequently used axis type method buttons located below the option
list. If you use the default Inferred axis type, you can immediately select objects on which to base the
datum axis.
When you edit a datum axis, you can change its type, defining objects, and associative status.
Panel of frequently used datum axis types

Click the following links for details about each datum axis Type:
Inferred Determines the best datum axis type to use based on objects you select.
XC-Axis Creates a fixed datum axis on the XC-axis of the Work Coordinate System
(WCS).
YC-Axis Creates a fixed datum axis on the YC-axis of the WCS.
ZC-Axis Creates a fixed datum axis on the ZC-axis of the WCS.
Point and Direction Creates a datum axis from a point in a specified direction.
Two Points Creates a datum axis by defining two points thro ugh which the axis passes.
On Curve Vector Creates a datum axis tangent, normal, or binorma l to a point on a

curve or edge, or perpendicular or parallel to another object.
Intersection Creates a datum axis at the intersection of two planar faces, datum planes, or
planes.
Curve/Face Axis Creates a datum axis on a linear curve or edge, or the axis of a cylindrical or
conical face or torus.
Fixed Available only when editing a datum axis.

Any datum axis created using the YC-Axis, XC-Axis, or ZC-Axis, or any of the other relative types
used with the Associative check box cleared, will all appear as the Fixed type during edit.
During edit, you can change a fixed datum axis to relative by changing the Type, redefining its
parent geometry, and selecting the Associative check box.
You can also do the reverse and change a relative datum axis to fixed, by either selecting the
Fixed type or clearing the Associative check box.
Axis Direction
Available with most types.

Lets you cycle through the possible directions for the axis normal.
Reverse Direction
Common to all Types.
Settings
Associative Available with non-fixed types.
Makes the new datum axis associative instead of fixed, so it is parametrically
related to its parent features.
If you clear this check box, the datum axis will be fixed and not associative.
An associative datum axis displays the name Datum Axis in the Part Navigator.
A non-associative datum axis displays the name Fixed Datum Axis in the Part
Navigator.
When you edit a non-associative datum axis, you can redefine it and make it
associative.
Datum CSYS Overview
Use this command to create an associative datum coordinate system. A Datum CSYS feature
displays in the Part Navigator and in the Edit Feature Edit Parameters selection dialog box.
Datum CSYS
A datum CSYS is composed of separate, selectable components:
The overall datum CSYS
Three datum planes
Three datum axes
An origin point
You can select the individual datum planes, datum axes, and origin point in a datum CSYS.
You can hide and show a datum CSYS, as well as edit its object display characteristics. You can move a
datum CSYS between layers.
Uses for a Datum CSYS
You can use a datum CSYS to ensure associativity of downstream features that are updated
automatically when the geometries used to define the CSYS are modified.
You can use a datum CSYS to more easily define a feature's coordinate system-related parameters. For
example, the origin for a cylindrical feature is usually coincident with the intersection between the
cylinder's axis and one of the planar faces, and the Z-axis is coincident with the cylinder's axis. If you use
a non-associative coordinate system, you may later have to manually translate the cylinder whenever you
move its defining geometry. However, if you use an associative datum CSYS, the cylinder updates
automatically.
When you position a downstream feature, you can select individual components of a datum CSYS feature
(i.e., datum planes or axes) as positioning references.
You can also select individual components of a datum CSYS, the datum planes and axes, for mating
conditions (see the Assemblies Help for more information).
Point Set Overview
Creates a set of points that corresponds to existing geometry. Creating a point set allows you to
generate points along a curve, along a face, or at the poles of a spline or face. You may also recreate the
defining poles of a spline.
In some options, you are provided with various methods of spacing the points and defining where the
point set starts and ends. Points may also be located by selecting positions in the view or by using the
Point Constructor.
To create a set of points:
1. Choose one of the options for creating a set of points.
2. Select the reference curve or face.
You can create a point set using the following options:
Point Set Dialog Options
Points on Curve Group Points
Add Points to Curves
Point at Curve
Percentage
Spline Defining
Points
Spline Knot Points
Spline Poles
Points on Face
Point at Face
Percentage
Face (B-Surface)
Poles
select a spline that was created through points and recreate the
Creates a set of construction points.
points along an
existing curve. Creates a set of points using the knot points of an existing spline.
Creates random Lets you create points at the poles of any spline.
points along one or
more curves. Lets you create a set of points on an existing face.
Adds a point along Adds a point on one or more faces at a location equal to U and V percentage
one or more curves values.
at a location equal to
Lets you to create points at the poles of any face.
a percentage value.
Lets you group the points in each point set. Enable this option by setting it in the
Lets you
ON position. The default is OFF.
Some of the Point Set options require that you accept or change some settings (for instance, the
number of points you want). Points are created on the object or at the poles, depending on which option
you are using.

Offset Curve overview
Use the Offset Curve command to offset lines, arcs, conics, splines, edges and sketches.
Offset curves are constructed through points calculated normal to the selected base curves. You can
choose whether to associate the offset curves to their input data.
Curves can be offset within the plane defined by the selected geometry, to a parallel plane using the draft
angle and height options, or along a vector you specify when using the 3D Axial method. Multiple curves
can only be offset if they are in a contiguous string. The object types of the resulting curves are the same
as their input curves, except for conics and curves created using the Rough Offset option or the 3D Axial
method, which are offset as splines.
Selection Intent options are available on the Selection Bar, to select the curves.
If the input string is linear, you must define a plane by defining a point which is not colinear with the input
string. This plane is used as the offset plane.
Choose InformationFeature to open the Feature Browser dialog box, where you can view information
on offset curves, such as lists of parents and lists of expressions used in the creation parameters.
The following graphic shows the different types of offset curves you can create.
Distance type offset curve.
Draft type offset curve.
Law Control type offset curve.
3D Axial type offset curve.
Circular Blend Curve overview
Use the Circular Blend Curve command to create a smooth blended curve feature between two
3D curves or edge chains. The resulting 3D curve is tangent to the two input curves and appears as a
circular arc if projected onto a plane normal to the selected vector direction.
This command is useful if you want to define the radius of a blend between two edges or curves in a
particular view.
The following graphic shows the circular blend curve feature.

Circular Blend Curve created between two tangent continuous curves
The following graphic shows the circular blend curve feature which appears as an arc when projected on
to a plane normal to the vector direction.
Use this command to create offset curves on one or more faces from connected edges or curves on the
surfaces. The offset curves can be associative or non-associative, and lie at a specified distance from an
existing curve or edge section. The curves are created on the face, and are measured along face
sections normal to the original curves.
Curve on surface used to create offset curves
Selected curve on surface to offset.
Resulting offset curves on the surface.
Different spanning methods let you fill the gaps between the curves. There are also options to let you trim
against the selected face boundaries.
The resulting offset curves are either cubic splines or analytic curves, depending on the input curves and
the faces on which they are offset from.
The offset curves can be created outside their faces if there is enough surface. You can always, for
example, offset outside a planar face.
Create a Bridge Curve between surface edges
This example shows how to create and customize a basic bridge curve.
1. Choose InsertCurve from CurvesBridge.
2. Click start and end surface edges (1 and 2 in the example below).
Note that Snap Point options do not
apply until after you select an end
object; that is, NX selects a point on the
target object nearest your mouse
location.
3.
4. On the Selection Bar, click End Point .
5. Drag the point handles to the end of each curve.
Curve start (3) and end (4) points
6. The green coneheads give you graphics window access to the Tangent Magnitude shape
controls. You can drag the conehead or type a value in the dynamic input box.
Start (5) and End (6) Tangent Magnitude shape controls
Note that you can right-click on the cone head to change the Shape Control type.
7. Right-click each point and choose Infer G1, G2, or G3 as appropriate for your part. For example,
this curve uses G3 continuity at each end.
Bridge Curve with G3 continuity at each end
8. Click OK to create the bridge curve.
9. Simplify Curve
Creates a string of best fit lines and arcs from a string of curves (you may select a
maximum of 512 curves).
Prior to simplifying the selected curves, you may specify a status for the original curve(s) after the
conversion. You may choose one of the following options for the original curve(s):
Maintain The original curves are maintained after the lines and arcs are created. The curves are created
over the selected curves.
Delete Removes the selected curves after simplification. Once deleted, you can no longer recover the
selected curves. (If you choose Undo, the original curve is recovered but is no longer
simplified.)
Hide The selected original curves are removed from the screen, but not deleted, after the simplified
curve is created.
Create a Join Curve feature
1. Click InsertCurve from CurvesJoin to open the Join Curves dialog box.
2. Select the curves you want to join. Selection Intent options are available on the Selection Bar to
aid object selection and to set selection rules.
Selected curves to join
3. (Optional) In the Settings group, you can do the following:
o Clear the Associative check box if you do not want the output spline to be associative
with the input curves.
o Specify the disposition of the Input Curves.
o Specify the Output Curve Type.
o Change the default value for the Distance Tolerance.

o Change the default value for the Angle Tolerance.
4. Click OK or Apply to create the join curve feature.

Resulting Join Curve feature (input curves hidden, corners produced while creating the join denoted
with asterisks)
You can edit a Join Curve to change the output curve type, redefine the chain of curves and
change the distance or angle tolerances.
Project Curve overview
You can project curves, edges, and points onto sheet bodies, faces, and datum planes by using the
Project curve command. You can direct your projection toward, or at an angle to, a specified vector, a
point, or along the face normals. The projected curves are trimmed at holes or edges of the faces. You
can automatically join the output curves after projection. This reduces a step in your workflow, if you need
to manually create another join curve feature using the former output.
If you create associative project curve features, you can Hide or Keep the original projected objects. For
non-associative project curves, in addition to the Hide and Keep options, you can Delete or Replace the
original projected objects.
If you create associative project curve features, you can modify the original objects, specified sheet
bodies, faces, or planes, and the projected objects update to reflect these changes.
When you select the Direction Method as Along Vector or Angle to Vector, the selected vector
remains associative. If you change the vector direction, the direction of projection updates automatically.
The associative process is explained below, using an example.
The blue curves are projected as green curves on the datum plane using the Along Vector option and
selecting one of the vertical edges of the Extrude feature as the Along Vector direction.
The Extrude draft angle is modified later, resulting in the projection vector pointing to a different direction.
The projected curve is updated automatically with the new vector direction, as shown above.
Combined Projection
This option combines the projections of two existing curves to create a new curve. The two
curve projections must intersect. You can specify whether the new curve is associated with the input
curves, and what will be done with the input curves.
In most cases this option produces an approximated B-curve. However, an exact curve can be produced
without approximation if the following conditions are satisfied:
There is only one curve in each of the two original strings, which can be "matched" together
internally by the system with the same number of poles, degrees and knots.
The deviation between each correspondent control pole of the two resulting matched curves is
less than the current modeling tolerance along the "non-projection" direction, which is normal to
the two projection vectors.
Mirroring Curves And Edges
In this basic example, you mirror curves and surface edges across a datum plane to create an
associative feature.
1. Open the Mirror Curve tool.
2. Use the Curves selection step to select the curves and edges you want to mirror.
In the figure shown below 4 curves and 4 surface edges are selected (highlighted in orange).
4 Curves And 4 Edges Selected
3. Use the Faces/Datum Planes selection step to select either a datum plane or a planar surface to
use as a mirror plane.
Datum Plane Highlighted For Selection
4. Choose a Copy Method, either Associate, Copy or Move.
5. Click OK or Apply to mirror the curves and edges.
In the following figure, the Associate Copy Method is used to create a MIRROR_CURVE feature.
A Mirror Curve Feature is Created Across the Datum Plane
Wrap/Unwrap Curve
This option lets you wrap curves from a plane onto a conical or cylindrical face, or unwrap curves
from a conical or cylindrical face onto a plane. The output curves are B-splines with a degree of 3, and
are associative to their input curves, the defining face, and the defining plane.
For basic instructions on using this option to see the Basic Wrap/Unwrap Procedure.
Wrap/Unwrap Curve Dialog Options
Selection Lets you select the geometry used in this function.

Steps
Wrap Face - when this selection step is active, select the conical or cylindrical face on
which curves will be wrapped, or from which curves will be unwrapped. If you are wrapping
curves, and if the face is split, you may select multiple faces.
Wrap Plane - when this selection step is active, select a datum plane or planar face that
is tangent to the wrap face. You can change the Filter to allow selection of only datum
planes or only faces.
If the conical or cylindrical face you wish to use does not already have an appropriate
tangent plane, you can create one with the following steps. A major advantage to creating a
tangent plane with this method is that the datum plane updates to remain tangent to the face
whenever the model is updated.
Create a datum plane that goes through both the axis of the cone/cylinder and the
tangent line.
Create another datum plane that is tangent to the face and normal to the datum
plane created in the previous step.
Curves - when this selection step is active, select the curves you wish to wrap or
unwrap. You can change the Filter to allow selection of only curves, edges, or faces.
(Selecting a face selects its edges.)
Filter Options that help you select the objects that you want by limiting the types of objects that are
selectable.
Wrap / Specify whether you want to wrap or unwrap curves.

Unwrap
Cut Line The rotation (between 0 and 360 degrees) of the Tangent Line about the axis of the cone or
Angle cylinder. You can enter either a number or an expression.
Confirm Lets you preview the results and accept, reject, or analyze them. This option is common to
Upon Apply Selection Steps dialogs.
Terminology
The above figure is meant only to illustrate the terminology used in this function, not to demonstrate
how the function works.
Wrap Face - For Wrap, this is the conical or cylindrical face to which selected curves on a tangent plane
are wrapped. For Unwrap, selected curves on this face are wrapped onto a tangent plane.
Wrap Plane - For Wrap, selected curves on this plane are wrapped onto a tangent conical or cylindrical
face. For Unwrap, selected curves on a tangent conical or cylindrical face are wrapped onto this plane.
Tangent Line - An imaginary line that lies on both the wrap face and the wrap plane where they meet. It is
a straight line that is coplanar with the axis of the cone or cylinder.
Cut Line - An imaginary line that is some rotation of the tangent line around the axis of the cone or
cylinder. This line affects where curves are placed after being wrapped or unwrapped. If a closed curve
on the face of a cone or cylinder that completely surrounds the axis is being unwrapped, it will be cut at
the cut line. this is the only time the cut line actually "cuts" anything. For all other curves, if the majority of
a curve is to one side of the cut line, it will be unwrapped to the same side of the tangent line. See the
following figures for examples.
Wrapping a Spline onto a Conical Face
Effects of Cut Line Angles When Unwrapping From a Cylinder

Intersection Curve overview
The Intersect curve command enables you to create intersection curves between two sets of
objects. Intersection curves are associative and update according to the changes in their defining objects.
You can select multiple objects in the input sets to perform an intersection operation.
The following graphic shows an example of intersection curves created where a sheet body intersects a
block that contains a pocket.
First set of faces/planes (top face of the block) .
Second set of faces/planes (sheet body).
Intersection curve feature.
Intersection curve feature edited to add pocket t o the first set.
Section Curve overview
Use the Section Curve command to create intersection geometry between specified planes and
bodies, faces, planes and/or curves. The intersection of a plane and a curve creates one or more points.
The geometry output can be associative.
Selected plane
Selected object to section
Resulting section curve feature
Analytic section curves (lines, arcs or conics) are created if the face is planar, analytic, or a bounded
plane. Section curves are trimmed at edges and holes. If no section curves (or points) can be created for
the objects and planes that you specify, an error message is displayed.
You can use the Output Sampled Points option to create output points instead of section curves, to
avoid the section curve geometry from being selected accidentally by other commands that operate on
curves.
Extract Curve
This option creates geometry (lines, arcs, conics, and splines) using the edges and faces of one or
more existing bodies. The bodies are not changed. Most extracted curves are not associative, but you
can choose to create associative isocline or shadow outline curves.
The following extract options are available:
Extract Curve Dialog Options
Edge Curves Extracts curves from specified edges.
Isoparametric Creates isoparametric curves on a selected face.

Curves
Silhouette Curves Creates curves from silhouette edges.
All in Work View Creates curves from all visible edges (including silhouette edges) of bodies in the
work view.
Isocline Curves Creates curves where the draft angle on a set of faces is constant.
Shadow Outline Creates curves that show only the outline of the bodies in the work view.
Curves created using All in Work View, Silhouette Curves, or Shadow Outline are view-dependent in the
view that was the work view when they were created.
Edge Curves
This option lets you create curves along the edges of one or more existing bodies.
Select the desired edges one at a time, or use the menu to select all edges in a face, all edges in a body,
by name, or by chaining. The total number of edges selected is displayed in the Status line, and you can
use Back to deselect edges. After all the edges are selected, choose OK and the curves are created.
If the body has no edges (as in the case of a complete sphere), consider using the Silhouette Curves
method.
Isoparametric Curves
You can use this option to generate curves along given U/V parameters on a face. Follow this procedure:
1. Choose Isoparametric Curves. The Isoparametric Curves dialog is displayed.
2. Select a face. Temporary direction vectors are displayed at the parametric center of the face,
marking the U/V direction.
3. Specify the desired parameter values.
4. Choose Apply or OK to create the curves.

The resulting curves are of the simplest form that correctly represents the geometry. For example, if you want
to create an isoparametric curve that runs along the parameter of revolution of a revolved body, the resulting
curve is an arc. For complex faces, the resulting curve is a spline. The modeling tolerance value is used to
calculate isoparametric curves on foreign faces and on offsets obtained from nonanalytic faces.
Isoparametric Curves Dialog Options
Constant U The direction along the face in which to create the curves.
Constant V
Curve Count The number of isoparametric curves created, spaced equally between the minimum and
maximum percentages. If the curve count equals one, the curve is created at the
minimum percentage.
Percentages Values along the face; a percentage of zero creates a curve along the U or V minimum
and a percentage of 100 creates a curve along the U or V maximum.
Select New Lets you select a new face on which to create isoparametric curves.
Face
Percentages
Before choosing OK or Apply (either before or after selecting a face), you can either enter a number or
specify an inference point on the face for the minimum and/or maximum percentage value.
If you specify a point to determine the percentage value, the corresponding percentage value is placed in
the Minimum Percentage field. For example, if the point is 20% of the way along the face, that amount is
entered into the Minimum field. If you specify a second point, that amount is entered into the Maximum
field. The parameter percentage values must be between 0 and 100, so that the parameter lies in the
face's parameter range.
Note that the system does not "remember" this point. For example, if you choose the Extract icon, the
Constant U direction button is active. Select a face on which you want to create Isoparametric Curves.
Select a point on the face to establish a percentage value in the U direction. The percentage value is
inserted in the Minimum field. If you repeat the previous step, a percentage value is inserted in the
Maximum field.
Now choose the Constant V direction button. The same Minimum and Maximum percentage values are
inserted that were inserted for the U direction. The V percentage value at the points that were indicated
for the U direction are not calculated. If you want the V percentage value to be related to either of the
points used for the U direction, you must specify the points again.
The inference point can take two forms. A cursor location is used to define a line passing through the
screen point in the direction of the Z-axis of the view. The intersection of the line and the face is the point
on which the parameter percentage is based. If a control point is selected, the minimum distance point on
the surface to the control point is used.
Usage Notes
Keep in mind the following when using this function:
Specifying a point outside the face bounds is not recommended as it may generate unexpected
results.
You cannot create isoparametric curves of constant V from a blend.
The resulting isoparametric curves are not "smart" curves. In other words, they are not
associative to the face from which they were created. If the face is modified, the curves do not
change.
Extrude options
See Common dialog box options for common options not discussed here.
You can right-click the extrude section and direction handles, and the extrude preview, to quickly
access many of the following options.
Section
Lets you specify curves or edges to extrude.
If the section you specify is a single open or closed collection of curves or edges, the
extrude will be a single sheet body or solid body. If you select multiple open or closed
sections, it will be multiple sheet bodies or solid bodies. In both cases, you get a single
extrude feature.
Curve
Lets you select curves, edges, a sketch, or a face for the section to extrude.
Selection Intent is available.
If you select a planar face when the Selection Intent rule is for something other than a
face, the Sketcher automatically opens to let you sketch new curve sections on the
selected planar face.
Select
To change this behavior, chose File Utilities Customer Defaults Modeling
Curve
General. On the Miscellaneous page, clear the Automatically Sketch on Planar
Faces check box.
Sketch Section
Opens the Sketcher, where you can create a sketch of a section that is internal to the
feature.
On exiting the Sketcher, your sketch is automatically selected as the section to extrude.
After the feature is created, the sketch remains internal to it and does not appear in the
graphics window or in the Part Navigator. To control the display in the Part Navigator,
right-click the feature and choose:
ternal to make the sketch invisible and internal only to the feature again.
Make See the Internal and External Sketches topic in the Sketcher help for further details.
Sk
et
ch
Ex
te
rn
al
to
m
ak
e
th
e
sk
et
ch
vis
ibl
e
an
d
av
ail
ab
le
for
ot
he
r
us
es
.
Mak
e
S
k
e
t
c
h
I
n
Direction
Lets you specify a direction towards which to extrude the section. The default direction is
the normal of the selected section.
You can specify your own direction using curves, edges, or any of the standard vector
types, including those on the Vector Constructor.
An associativity will exist between the extrude feature and the direction. If you change the
geometry you selected for the direction after creating the extrude feature, the extrude
Specify feature updates accordingly.
Vector
Inferred Vector A vector type. Click to see the vector type list. Select a vector
type from the list and then select objects supported by that type.
Vector Constructor Displays the Vector dialog box.

For more information on vector types, see Vector Constructor in the Common Tools help.
Reverse Switches the direction of the extrude to the opposite side of the section.
Direction
You can also change the direction by right-clicking Reverse Direction on the direction
vector conehead.
Limits
Use the limit options to define the overall construction method and the extents of the extrude feature.
Represents opposite ends of the extrusion, as measured from the section.

Both the Start and End option lists offer the following options with which you can control
the limits of the extrude.
Value
Lets you specify values for the start or end of the extrusion. Values are numeric.
Values above the section are positive, and those below are negative.
You can drag the start and end limit handles a linear distance on either side of the
Start / End section.
limit In addition to dragging the handles, you can also type values directly into the start
and end Distance boxes or in the dynamic input boxes.
Symmetric Value
Converts the Start limit distance to the same value as the End limit.
Until Next
Ex dy that you select.
ten
Until Extended
ds
the Trims the extrude feature (if it is a body) to a face you select when the section
ext
ru
de
fea
tur
e
to
the
ne
xt
bo
dy
alo
ng
the
dir
ect
ion
pat
h.
Until
Selected
Ex
ten
ds
the
ext
ru
de
fea
tur
e
to
a
fac
e,
dat
um
pla
ne,
or
bo
extends beyond its edges.
Through All
Extends the extrude feature completely through all selectable bodies along the path
of the specified direction.
You can also set the limit option by right-clicking the Start and End limit handles.
Appears for both the Start and End options when either is set to Value or Symmetric
Value.
Distance
Sets the start and end limits for the extrude feature to the values you enter in the boxes.
See the Value option above for additional ways to specify the distance.
Appears for both the Start and End options when either is set to Until Selected or
Until Extended.
Select Lets you select a face, sheet body, solid body, or datum plane to define the bounding start
Object or end extent of the extrude.
Boolean
Select
Body
Boolean
options
None, to let you specify the target body. Note that all options except None can leave empty
Lets you space where the target body existed.
specify
None
how the
extrude Creates an independent extrude solid body.
feature When you edit an Extrude feature (and if applicable), you can change the Boolean
interacts option from None to Unite, Subtract, or Intersect, or vice-versa.
with
other Unite
bodies it Combines the extrude volume with two or more bodies into a single body.
comes
in Subtract
contact Removes the extrude volume from a target body.
with on
Intersect
creation.
Displays Creates a body containing the volume shared by the extrude feature and the
the existing bodies it intersects.
Select
You can also choose a Boolean option by right-clicking the extrude preview.
Body
option For additional information about Booleans see Boolean Operations.
for all
Boolean
Appears when the Boolean Option is set to Unite, Subtract, or Intersect.
options
except Lets you select a target body.
Draft
Use Draft to add a slope to one or more sides of the extrude feature.
You can apply a draft only to an extrude feature that is based on a planar section.
Lets you specify one of the following draft options.

None
No draft is created.
From Start Limit
Creates a draft where the extrude shape is held stationary at the start limit, and
the draft angle is applied to the side faces from that stationary shape.
See Extrude Draft From Start Limit for an example.

From Section
Creates a draft where the extrude shape is held stationary at the section, and the
draft angle is applied to the side faces from the section.
See Extrude Draft From Section for an example.

From Section-Asymmetric Angle
Available only when the extrude extends from both sides of the section.
Creates a draft where the extrude shape is held stationary at the section, but
where the side faces are also split at the section into two sides. You can separately
control the draft angle on each side of the section.
If you set Angle Option to Single, Front Angle and Back Angle options appear, to let
you assign separate dimensions to the front and back sides of the asymmetric
Draft extrude.
If you set Angle Option to Multiple, an Angle option and a list box appear, to let
you assign separate dimensions to each of the tangent faces of the front and back
sides of the asymmetric extrude.
See Extrude Draft From Section-Asymmetric Angle for an example.
From Section-Symmetric Angle
Creates a draft where the extrude shape is held stationary at the section. Side
faces are split at the section and both sides of the section share the same draft
angle.
See Extrude Draft From Section-Symmetric for an example.
From Section-Matched Ends
Creates a draft where the section is held stationary and the side faces of the
extrude feature are split at the section. The shape at the end limit is matched to
that of the start limit, and the draft angle for the end limit changes to maintain the
matched shape.
See Extrude Draft From Section-Matched Ends for an example.
You can select draft options here in the dialog box or by right-clicking the extrude preview.
Lets you specify how draft angles are applied.
Single
Lets you specify a single draft angle for all faces of the extrude feature. Edit the
angle by typing a value in the Angle box, or by dragging the angle handle or typing
a value in the dynamic input box.
See Extrude Draft Angle Option set to Single for an example.
Angle
Option Multiple
Lets you specify unique draft angles to each tangent chain of faces of the
extrude feature. Edit the dimensions by selecting them from the dialog list box
and typing new values in the Angle box. You can also drag the angle handles or
type values in the dynamic input boxes.
See Extrude Draft Angle Option set to Multiple for two examples.
Not available when the Draft option is From Start Limit.
Lets you specify a value for a draft angle. If the draft List box is available, the value is
applied to the selected angle in the list box. Otherwise, the value applies to all angles in the
draft.
Angle A positive angle slopes the sides of the extrude feature inward toward the center of the
selected curves.
A negative angle slopes the sides of the extrude feature outward away from the center of
the selected curves.
A zero angle value results in no slope.

Front You can also specify the draft angle by typing a value in the dynamic input box or by
Angle dragging the angle handle.
Available only when the Draft option is set to From Section Asymmetric , with the
Angle Option set to Single.
/
Lets you assign separate angle values to the front and back sides of an asymmetric extrude
Back Angle feature. You can also type values in the dynamic input boxes or drag the angle handles.
Appears when the Angle Opton is set to Mulitple, when you can assign separate draft
angles to each tangent chain of faces in the extrude feature.
List The list displays the name and value for each draft angle.
You can edit an angle by selecting it in the list box and typing a new value in the Angle
box, by typing a value in its dynamic input box, or by dragging its angle handle.
Offset
Lets you specify up to two offsets to add to the extrude feature. You can assign unique
values for both offsets.
Offset Type values for the offsets in the Start and End boxes, or in their dynamic input boxes. You
Option can also drag the offset handles.
See Extrude Offset to see a sample of offset handles.
Whenever the start and end offsets are of equal value, the offset is symmetric across the
section.
None
No offset is created.
Single-Sided
Adds a single end offset to the extrude. This kind of offset lets you easily fill holes
and create bosses, simplifying part development.
Two-Sided
Adds an offset with start and end values to the extrude.

Symmetric
Adds an offset with duplicate start and end values, measured from opposite sides
of the section, to the extrude. The value for both start and end is determined by the
last one you specify.
Start See Extrude Offset options for a figure showing offset options.
Sets the value for the start of the offset, as measured from the section, to the value you
type in the box. You can also enter a value in the dynamic input box or drag the start
End
handle.
Settings Sets the value for the end of the offset, as measured from the section, to the value you type in
the box. You can also enter a value in the dynamic input box or drag the end handle.
Lets you specify that the extrude feature is one or more sheet bodies or solid bodies.
To get a solid body, the section must be either a closed profile section or an open profile
Body Type
section with an offset. If you use an offset, you will not be able to get a sheet body.
This option is available during creation or edit, which means that in some cases, you can
change an extruded sheet body to a solid body, or a solid body back to a sheet body.
Lets you change the distance tolerance during creation or edit. The default value is taken
from the Modeling Preference Distance Tolerance setting.
Tolerance Entering a new tolerance value here overrides the modeling distance tolerance for the
extrude operation. To change the tolerance, type a new value in this option box and press
the Return or Enter key. The new distance tolerance is effective for subsequent extrude
operations throughout the current session.
For a general description of the use of tolerances during construction, see Tolerance
Values.
Preview
Generates a preview when you specify the minimum parameters needed to create the
Preview feature.
This option is selected by default.
Show Show Result computes the feature and displays the result. When you click OK or Apply to
Result create the feature, the software reuses the computation, making the creation process
faster.
Undo Result exits the result display and returns you to the dialog box.
Undo
Result
Extrude overview
Use this command to create a body by sweeping a 2D or 3D section of curves, edges, faces,
sketches or curve features a linear distance in a specified direction.
A section of curves (1) extruded (2), with threads added to the final solid body (3)
Boolean options let you unite, subtract or intersect an extrude with other objects.
A single Extrude feature can include multiple sheet and solid bodies.
You can trim an extrude feature using faces, datum planes or solid bodies. You can size an extrude by
dragging distance handles or specifying distance values.
You can create offsets by adding constant values measured from the base section.
You can create drafts by adding degree values.
If you use a face or a sheet body for an extrude section and it is later changed, the extrude feature
updates correctly.
You can use Selection Intent to change the section as you define different ways to create the extrude.
For some simple extrudes, see the following:
Subtracting an extrude from a series of solids
Boolean options let you unite, subtract or intersect an extrude with other objects.
Creating an extrude with Through All, and Boolean Subtract
Selected section
Extrude direction
First solid body
Sheet body
Second solid body
Create an extrude feature with an offset

This example shows how to extrude a solid body using an offset.
1. Choose Home tabFeature groupExtrude .
2. Select a closed string of curves for the section.
A preview of the extrude feature based on the selected section appears.

3. In the Extrude dialog box, in the Limits group, from the Start option list, select Until Extended .
4. In the graphics window, select a face on a solid body for the start of the extrude feature.
In the following figure, the selected face is highlighted in red.
The preview updates to the new start limit.
This example shows how to extrude a solid body using an offset.
2. Select a closed string of curves for the section.
A preview of the extrude feature based on the selected section appears.
3. In the Extrude dialog box, in the Limits group, from the Start option list, select Until Extended .
4. In the graphics window, select a face on a solid body for the start of the extrude feature.
In the following figure, the selected face is highlighted in red.
The preview updates to the new start limit.

5. In the Limits group, from the End option list, select Until Extended.
6. In the graphics window, select a second face on the solid body for the end of the extrude feature.
The preview updates to the new end limit.
7. In the Offset group, from the Offset option list, select Two-Sided.
8. Type offset values in the Start and End boxes.
For this example, 0.0 for Start and 0.1 for End are entered.
9. In the Boolean group, from the list, select Unite, if it is not the inferred option.
10. Choose another command or click Apply to complete the extrude.

Using extrude to create solids
In the following figure, two closed sections are selected, but the Apply button is clicked between them,
which creates two extruded bodies. If Apply had not been clicked between the selections, the result
would have been a different shape and a single body instead of two bodies.
Example construction of two extruded solid bodies
Edges of this planar sheet body are used as profiles for two extruded bodies.
First extruded body is dragged below a section of selected edges.
Apply is used to create the first extruded body.
A second extruded body is created with a 10 draft and a single-sided offset above a section of a
single inner edge.
The result is two extruded bodies.
Extrude with an asymmetric angle
2. Select a closed string of curves or edges for the section.
A preview of the extrude feature based on the selected section and default parameters appears, as in the following
example.
Note If the extrude preview is not already two-sided (that is, it appears on both sides of the section), drag a limit handle
to make it two-sided.
3. In the Draft group, from the Draft option list, select From Section-Asymmetric Angle.
Tip You can also right-click the extrude preview and choose DraftDraftFrom Section-Asymmetric Angle.
4. Angle handles appear with default values.
5.
6. In the Draft group, from the Angle Option list, select Single.
7. Drag the Front Angle and Back Angle handles to get the angles and shape you want. You can also type values in the
Front Angle and Back Angle boxes.
For this example, 2 is entered for Front Angle and 13 is entered for Back Angle.
Extrude using a section with self-intersecting curves
This example shows how to extrude a section with self-intersecting curves as a single feature.
1. Make sure the Customer Default setting will allow self-intersecting sections.
Choose File tabUtilitiesCustomer DefaultsModelingGeneral.
On the Miscellaneous page, select the Allow Self-intersecting Section in Extrude Feature check box.
3. Select the section curves.

4. Set and select the desired parameters.
For this example:

o Offset = Symmetric
o Start/End = 2.0 and 2.0
o Limits (Start/End) = 0.0 to 5.0
o Inferred = Boolean (Unite)
Extrude without open profile smart volume

Extrude with open profile smart volume
The out put by using open profile smart volume is as follows
Revolve
Use this command to create a feature by revolving section curves about a given axis through a
nonzero angle. You can start with a basic cross section and generate round or partially round features.
You can create a revolve feature by:
Revolving section geometry (curves,

sketches, faces, or edges of a face) about a
specified axis.
Revolving section geometry to a trimming

face or relative datum plane.
Revolving section geometry between two

trimming faces or relative datum planes.
You can add an offset to a revolve feature.
Revolving a section around an axis
When you create a revolve feature, you get either

sheet bodies or a solid body.
You get a solid body when you are using:

A closed section with the Body Type set to
Solid.
An open section when the total revolve

angle is equal to 360 degrees.
An open section with an offset or thicken of

any angle.
Indicates the revolve section.
Creates a solid body

You get sheet bodies when you are using:
A closed section with the Body Type set to
Sheet.
An open section with an angle less than 360

degrees with no offset.
Creates sheet bodies
A single Revolve feature can include multiple sheet and solid bodies.
If you select associative curves, a face, or a sheet body for the section, the revolve feature
will update correctly when you make changes to the original section. Other features,
however, that reference the faces or edges of the revolve feature may not update or may
update incorrectly.
If the section crosses the axis of revolution you may get unexpected results.
Revolve a section with an offset
Section
Start = 0
End = 90
Revolve preview before adding an offset

1. After you specify a section and rotation axis for the revolve feature (see Revolve a section for
details), you can add an offset to it using one of the following methods:
o Right-click the revolve preview and choose OffsetTwo Sided.
o In the Revolve dialog box, in the Offset group, choose Two Sided for the Offset Option.
Note that the section must be a single open or closed loop in order to add an offset.
2. An offset with default start and end values appears in the revolve preview.
3. Define the offset by dragging the start and end offset handles or by typing values in the Offset
group's Offset Option Start and End boxes in the dialog box.
Revolve with start and end offsets
Start Offset = -3
End Offset = 6
If the preview does not display an offset, try changing the start or end offset values.
4. Click OK or Apply to create the revolve feature.
Revolve a section to an object
You can revolve section geometry (curves, sketches, faces, or edges of a face) to a trimming face on a
target solid or to a relative datum plane. To use this method, you must have a target solid from which to
select the trimming face.
1. After you specify a section and rotation axis for the revolve feature (see Revolve a section for
details), you can revolve to an object using one of the following methods:
o Right-click the start or end handle and choose Until Selected.
o In the Revolve dialog box, in the Angular Limits group, selecct Until Selected for the
Start Limit or End Limit options
2. Select a solid face on the target solid or a datum plane associated with the target solid.
3. Click OK or Apply to create the revolve feature.
The figures below show a section revolved to a face on a solid.
Section
Solid body
Rotation axis/direction
Start = 0
End = Until Selected
Selected face to trim to

Resulting revolve feature
Revolve a section between objects
You can revolve section geometry from one trimming face on a target solid
or relative datum plane to another. To use this method you must have a
target solid from which to select the trimming faces.
1. After you specify a section and rotation axis for the revolve feature
(see Revolve a section for details), define the start limits by doing
one of the following:
o Right-click the start handle and choose Until Selected.
o In the Revolve dialog box, in the Angular LImits group, choose
Until Selected for the
Start Limit.
2. Select a solid face on the target solid or a datum plane associated

with the target solid for the start limit.
3. Define the end limits by doing one of the following:

o Right-click the end handle and choose Until Selected.
o In the Revolve dialog box, in the Angular LImits group, choose
Until Selected for the
End Limit.
4. Select a solid face on the target solid or a datum plane associated with
the target solid for the end limit.
5. Choose OK or Apply to create the revolve feature.
The following figures show a section revolved between two faces on a solid.
Revolve preview with Until Selected for start and end limits
Section
Rotation axis
Direction vector
Start = Until Selected
Selected face for start limit
End = Until Selected
Selected face for end limit

Resulting revolve feature
Sweep Along Guide
Create a Sweep feature
1. Choose Home tabFeature groupSweep Along Guide .
2. In the Sweep along Guide dialog box, in the Section group click Select Curve, and then select the section curves in
the graphics window.
1. Choose Home tabFeature groupSweep Along Guide .
2. In the Sweep along Guide dialog box, in the Section group click Select Curve, and then select the section curves in
the graphics window.
3. In the Guide group click Select Curve, and then select the guide curves in the graphics window.
4. In the Offsets group, in the First Offset box, specify a value.
For this example, a Offset of 4 is used.
5. Click OK.
Sweep along Guide
Use the Sweep along Guide command to create a body by sweeping one section along one guide. You can:
Select a section and a guide consisting of connected sketches, curves, or edges.
Select a guide that contains sharp corners.
Create a solid body or a sheet body.
If you want to select multiple sections, multiple guides, or control the interpolation, scale, and orientation of the sweep, use the
Swept command.
Create a tube
1. Choose Home tabFeature groupTube .
In the Tube dialog box, in the Path group, Select Curve is active.
2. Select the tube centerline path.
For this example, the edges of an existing solid body are selected as the path.
3. In the Cross Section group, specify a diameter in Outer Diameter.
For this example, 7 is used.
4. In the Boolean group, select the type from the Boolean list.
For this example, Unite is selected.
5. Click OK or Apply to create the tube.

Tube
Creates a single solid body by sweeping a circular cross section along one or more tangent
continuous curves or edges. You can create wire bundles, harnesses, tubing, cabling, or piping
applications with this option.
Tube with inner/outer diameters and selected path highlighted in red

Tube is similar to Sweep Along Guide. If you are going to add associative objects to a tube feature (such
as a datum axis or dimensions), you should use a Sweep Along Guide feature instead. If you create a
Tube feature using a string of non-associative curves and then later edit the string, you may lose your
associative data.
A tube, like other swept features, may show unexpected results if objects are added or removed
from its defining path while the feature is suppressed. You should replace the path instead.
Create a block using a point and edge lengths
1. Choose Home tabFeature groupBlock .
2. In the Type group, select Origin and Edge Lengths from the Type list.
3. Select an object to infer an origin point, or specify a point using the Specify Point options in the Origin
group. Snap Point options are available.
4. Type the block's measurement values in the Dimensions group. All values must be positive.
5. (Optional) If the block intersects another solid, you can choose a Boolean option from the Boolean list.
Select Body becomes available to let you specify a target for the Boolean operation.
6. Click OK or Apply to create the block.
The block is created from the origin point, with edges parallel to the axes of the WCS.
Create a block using two points and a height

2. In the Type group, select Two Points and Height from the Type list.
4. In the Point XC, YC from Origin group, click Specify Point and select or create the second point.
5. In the Dimension group, type a value in the Height (ZC) box for the block height. The value defines the height in the
direction of the +ZC axis, and must be positive.
The block is created between the points, with edges parallel to the axes of the WCS.
Create a block using two diagonal points
2. In the Type group, select Two Diagonal Points from the Type list.
4. In the Point XC, YC, ZC from Origin group, click Specify Point and select or create a second point that is opposite and
diagonal from the first point.
The figure above shows the second point specified at XC = 100, YC = 100, and ZC = 100. You could also select or infer a
point using any of the standard point methods.
The block is created between the points, with edges parallel to the axes of the WCS.
Create a cylinder using an axis, a diameter, and a height
1. Choose Home tabFeature groupCylinder .
2. From the Cylinder Type list, select Axis, Diameter, and Height.
Note A vector, direction, and origin point for the cone's axis are specified by default. If you want to change the defaults,
see steps 3, 4, and 5.
3. Select an object to infer a vector, or specify a vector using the Specify Vector options in the Axis group.
4. (Optional) Create a cylinder in the opposite direction by clicking Reverse Direction .
5. Click Specify Point and select an object to infer a point, or use the Specify Point options to specify one.
Snap Point options are available.
6. In the Dimensions group, type values for the diameter and height of the cylinder.
7. (Optional) Choose a Boolean option from the Boolean list if the cylinder intersects another solid.
Select Body lets you select a body for the Unite, Subtract, or Intersect Boolean operation.
8. Click OK or Apply to create the cylinder.

Create a cylinder using an arc and a height
1. Choose Home tabFeature groupCylinder .
2. From the Cylinder Type list, select Arc and Height.
3. Select an arc for the cylinder using the Select Arc option in the Arc group.
4. (Optional) Create a cylinder in the opposite direction by clicking Reverse Direction .
5. In the Dimensions group, type a value for the height of the cylinder.
6. (Optional) Choose a Boolean option from the Boolean list if the cylinder intersects another solid.
Select Body becomes available to let you select a target for the Boolean operation.
7. Click OK or Apply to create the cylinder.

Cone
You can create cone primitives by specifying an orientation, size and location, using the followin
options:
Diameters, Height Define the base diameter, top diameter, and height values.
Diameters, Half Angle Define the base diameter, top diameter, and half angle values.
Base Diameter, Height, Half Angle Define the base diameter, height, and half vertex angle values.
Top Diameter, Height, Half Angle Define the top diameter, height, and half vertex angle values.
Two Coaxial Arcs Select two arcs, which do not need to be parallel.
Common Concepts
The cone direction (its central axis) is defined using the Vector Constructor. The origin of the base of the
cone is defined using the Point Constructor.
Diameters, Height
This option creates a solid body cone by defining the base diameter, top diameter, and height values.
Procedure
To create a cone using this method:
1. Define the cone direction.
2. Enter the base and top diameters and the cone height.
3. Define the origin.
Diameters, Half Angle
This option creates a cone by defining the base diameter, top diameter and half angle values.
Procedure
To create a cone using this method you must:
2. Enter the base and top diameters and the cone half angle.
3. Enter the base origin.
The half vertex angle defines the angle formed by the axis of the cone and its side. Valid half vertex angle
values range between 1 and 89 degrees. The figure below illustrates how the system measures the half
vertex angle.
The figure below illustrates the effect of different half vertex angle values on the shape of the cone. The
axis point diameter and top diameter values are the same in each case. The half vertex angle affects both
the "sharpness" of the vertex and the height of the cone.
The cone is created such that one circular, planar face passes through the origin point and has a
diameter given by the base diameter value. The other circular, planar face is parallel to the first and has a
diameter given by the top diameter value. The height is adjusted so that the resulting cone has the given
half vertex angle.
Base Diameter, Height, Half Angle
This option creates a cone by defining the base diameter, height and half vertex angle values.
Procedure
2. Enter the base diameter, height, and the half vertex angle.
The half angle defines the angle formed by the cone axis and its side. Valid half angle values range
between 1 and 89 degrees.
diameter given by the base diameter value. The top diameter value must be smaller than the base
diameter value.
The top circular, planar face is parallel to the base and at a distance from it specified by the height value.
Its diameter is calculated so that the resulting cone has the input half vertex angle.
Top Diameter, Height, Half Angle
This option creates a cone by defining the top diameter, height and half vertex angle values.
Procedure
2. Enter the top diameter, height, and the half vertex angle.
The half angle defines the angle formed by the cone axis and its side. Valid half angle values range
between 1 and 89 degrees.
diameter given by the top diameter value. The base diameter value must be larger than the top diameter
value.
The base circular, planar face is parallel to the top and at a distance from it specified by the height value.
Its diameter is calculated so that the resulting cone has the input half vertex angle.
Two Coaxial Arcs
This option creates a cone feature by selecting two arcs. The arcs do not have to be parallel.
After selecting the base and top arcs, a full cone is created. The cone axis is defined as the arc center and
normal of the base arc. The diameters of the cone base and top are taken from the two arcs. The height of
the cone is the distance between the center of the top arc and the plane of the base arc.
If the selected arcs are not coaxial, the system projects the second selected arc (the top arc) parallel to
the plane formed by the base arc, until the two arcs are coaxial.
The cone is not associative with the arcs.
Sphere
You can create sphere primitives by specifying an orientation, size and location, using thefollowing
options:
Diameter, Center Define a diameter value and a center.
Select Arc Select an arc to create the sphere.
Diameter, Center
This option creates a sphere by defining a diameter value and a center.
To create a sphere using this method you must:
1. Enter the diameter value.
2. Define the sphere center.
The center of the sphere is defined using the Point Constructor.

Select Arc
This option creates a sphere by selecting an arc.
The arc you select does not have to be a complete circle. The system creates a complete sphere based
on any arc objects. The selected arc defines the sphere's center and diameter.
The sphere is not associative with the arc; meaning that if you edit the size of the arc, the sphere
does not update to match the change in the arc.
Basic Hole Procedures
This section contains basic procedures to use with the Hole function.
Basic Simple Hole Procedure Basic Counterbore Hole Procedure Basic Countersink Hole Procedure
Simple Hole
This option lets you create a simple Hole, with a specified Diameter, Depth and Tip Angle for a pointed
tip.
Basic Procedure for Simple Hole

To create a hole using the Simple method, follow these steps:
1. Use the Placement Face selection step to select the planar placement face or datum plane on
which to locate the hole. The system displays a preview in the graphics window of the hole and its
dimensions using the current parameters. If you selected a datum plane, you can use the
Reverse Side button to switch the direction of the vector.
You can enter values for the parameters discussed in the following steps before you select
the planar placement face.
When you change a value in one of the parameter fields discussed below, pressing the
Return or Enter key updates the graphics window preview of the hole with the new value.
3. (Optional) Use the Thru Face selection step to select a face through which the hole is to extend
and pass through. If you specify a Thru Face, the Depth and Tip Angle options become
unavailable.
4. Enter a value for the Depth, or accept the default.
5. Enter a value for the Tip Angle, or accept the default. You can press the Return or Enter key to
update the graphics window preview of the hole with the new value.
6. Click OK or Apply to create the hole.
7. Use the Positioning dialog to precisely locate the hole.

Counterbore Hole
This option lets you create a counterbore hole, with a specified Hole Diameter, Hole Depth, Tip Angle, C-
Bore Diameter and C-Bore Depth.
Basic Procedure for Counterbore Hole
To create a hole using the Counterbore method, follow these steps:
1. Use the Placement Face selection step to select the planar placement face or datum plane on
the planar placement face
3. (Optional) Use the Thru Face selection step to select a face through which the hole is to extend
and pass through. If you specify a Thru Face, the Hole Depth and Tip Angle options become
unavailable.
4. Enter a value for the C-Bore Diameter, or accept the default. This value should be greater than
the value for the Hole Diameter.
5. Enter a value for the C-Bore Depth, or accept the default.
6. Enter a value for the Hole Diameter, or accept the default.
7. Enter a value for the Hole Depth, or accept the default. This field is not available if you specified a
Thru Face.
8. Enter a value for the Tip Angle, or accept the default. This field is not available if you specified a
Thru Face.
9. Click OK or Apply to create the hole.

Countersink Hole
This option lets you create a countersink hole, with a specified Hole Diameter, Hole Depth, Tip Angle, C-
Sink Diameter and C-Sink Angle.
Basic Procedure for Countersink Hole
To create a hole using the Countersink method, follow these steps:
Use the Placement Face selection step to select the planar placement face or datum plane on
the planar placement face.
(Optional) Use the Thru Face selection step to select a face through which the hole is to extend
and pass through. If you specify a Thru Face, the Hole Depth and Tip Angle options become
unavailable.
Enter a value for the C-Sink Diameter, or accept the default. This value should be greater than
the value for the Hole Diameter.
Enter a value for the C-Sink Angle, or accept the default.
Enter a value for the Hole Diameter, or accept the default.
Enter a value for the Hole Depth, or accept the default. This field is not available if you specified a
Thru Face.
Enter a value for the Tip Angle, or accept the default. This field is not available if you specified a
Thru Face.
Click OK or Apply to create the hole.
Create a Screw Clearance Hole feature

This example shows how to create a counterbored Screw Clearance Hole feature at the center of circular edge.
1. Choose Home tabFeature groupHole .
2. In the Hole dialog box, from the Type list, select Screw Clearance Hole.
3. On the Top Border bar, make sure that Arc Center is selected.
4. In the graphics window, click the edge of the cone to select the arc center.
5. In the Form and Dimensions group, enter values for Form, Screw Type, Screw Size, and Fit.
For this example, the following are selected:
o Form listCounterbored.
o Screw Type listSocket Head, 4762.
o Screw Size listM10.
o Fit listNormal (H13).
Hole preview
6. Click OK to create the Screw Clearance Hole feature.

7. Final Hole
Start chamfer offset
Start chamfer angle
Counterbore diameter
Neck chamfer angle
Neck chamfer offset
Hole diameter
End chamfer angle
End chamfer offset
Create a Hole feature on a non-planar surface

This example shows how to create a Hole feature on a non-planar surface.
2. In the Hole dialog box, from the Type list, select General.
3. On the Top Border bar, make sure Existing Point is selected.
4. In the graphics window, click an existing point on a curved surface.

5. In the Direction group, select the hole direction.
For this example Normal to Face is selected.
Hole preview
6. Click OK to create the Hole feature.
7. To change the hole direction, in the Direction group, select Along Vector.
For this example the Datum Axis is selected.

Hole preview
Same diameter holes. Left: Normal to Face; Right: Along Vector
Create a Hole Series feature

This example shows how to create a Hole Series feature through three parts in an assembly.
2. Select Top Border barSelection Scope list Entire Assembly, and click Create Interpart Link .
3. In the Hole dialog box, from the Type list, select Hole Series.
4. In the graphics window, click on the near face of the component for the start face.
5. Specified face as the sketch plane
6. Highlight the edge of the arc and select the arc center.
7. Specify Arc Center
8. Click OK.
9. Click Finish Sketch.
10. In the Specification group, specify values for the Start, Middle, and End hole dimensions.
Start body
Middle body
End body
11. Click OK, to create a Hole Series feature in the assembly.

12. Linked face is covering the hole start
13. To hide the linked face created by the hole series, in the Part Navigator, right-click the Linked Face and choose
Hide.
Boss
Use this option to create a boss on a planar surface or datum plane. For a simple procedure
to use this option, see Basic Boss Procedure.

Basic Parameters of a Boss
Rectangular pocket
This option allows a rectangular pocket to be defined to a specified depth, with or without a floor
and/or corner radius, having either straight or tapered walls.
The following parameters may be specified:
1 Length
2 Width
3 Depth
4 Corner Radius
5 Floor Radius
6 Taper Angle
Note The pocket is initially oriented so that the Length is parallel to the selected Horizontal
Reference.
Pocket features may be positioned from a tool edge or from the centerlines provided for this
purpose.
Cylindrical Pocket
Use this option to create a circular pocket, to a specific depth, with or without a blended floor,
having straight or tapered sides.
Create a General Pocket
1. Choose MenuInsertDesign FeaturePocket .
2. On the Pocket dialog box, click General.
3. On the General Pocket dialog box, under Selection Steps, click Placement Face .
4. In the graphics window, select the placement face.
5. Under Selection Steps, click Placement Outline .
6. In the graphics window, select the placement outline curves.
7. Under Selection Steps, click Floor face .
8. In the graphics window, select the floor face.

9. Under Floor Face, from the list, select Offset.
10. In the Of Selected Floor box, type -1.5.
11. Under Selection Steps, click Floor Outline .
12. In the graphics window, select the floor outline.
The selection for the placement outline and floor outline should start in the same location for the
best results.
13. Under Selection Steps, click Target Body .
14. In the graphics window, select the solid body.
15. Click OK twice.

Pad
Use the Pad option to create a pad on an existing solid body.
You can use either of the following methods to create a pad:
Rectangular Lets you define a pad to a specific length, width, and depth, with specific radii in the
corners, having straight or tapered sides.
General Lets you define a pad with greater flexibility than the rectangular pad option.
Rectangular pad options

For a rectangular pad, you must specify the following parameters:
Length The length of the pad.

Width The width of the pad.
Height The height of the pad.
Corner The rounded radius for the vertical edges of the pad. The radius specified must be a positive
Radius or zero. (A zero radius results in a sharp edged pad.)
Taper Angle The angle at which the four walls of the pad incline inward. This value cannot be negative.
(A zero value results in vertical walls.)
General pad options

The General pad option has much greater flexibility to create a pad than that of the Rectangular
option.
The placement face can be a freeform face, rather than strictly a planar face, as with the
rectangular pad.
The top of the pad is defined by a top face, which also can be a free form face if desired.
You define the shape of the pad, at the top and/or the bottom, by chains of curves. The curves
do not have to lie on the selected faces - if they do not, they are projected onto the faces by a
method you control.
The curves do not have to form a closed string. They can be open. You can also let the string
extend beyond the edges of the placement faces.
When you specify a radius between the placement face or top face and the sides of the pad,
you can specify the curves representing the outline of the pad either to the theoretical
intersection of the sides of the pad and the face, or to the point of tangency between the blend
radius and the placement face or top face.
The sides of the pad are a ruled surface between the theoretical curves defining the shape of
the pad. If you specify the curves at the blend tangency, the system internally creates theoretical
intersections with the placement or top face.
Note Edges can be selected as curves.
A feature named GENERAL_PAD is created for the general pad.
General Pad Dialog Options

Selection Steps
Placement Face Lets you select the placement face(s) for the pad. The bottom of the pad follows
the contours of the placement face.
Placement Outline Lets you select the contiguous curves for the outline of the bottom of the pad.
Top Face Lets you select the top face(s) for the pad. The top of the pad follows the contours
of the top face.
Top Outline Lets you select the contiguous curves for the outline of the top of the pad.
Target Body If you want the pad to be in a different body than the one that the first selected
placement face belongs to, select that body as the target body.
Placement Outline If the placement outline curves/edges are not on the placement face, this step
Projection Vector becomes active to let you define the vector that will project them onto the
placement face.
Top Face If you choose to define the top face as a translation, this selection step becomes
Translation Vectoravailable to allow definition of the translation vector.
Top Outline If the top outline curves/edges are not on the top face, this step becomes active to
Projection Vector let you define the vector that will project them onto the top face.
Placement Lets you select points on the placement outline curves for alignment. This step is
Alignment Points available if curves have been selected for both outlines, and if you have chosen
Specify Points for the Outline Alignment Method.
Top Alignment Lets you select points on the top outline curves for alignment. This step is available
Points if curves have been selected for both outlines, and if you have chosen Specify
Points for the Outline Alignment Method.
Other options
Filter Helps you select geometry by letting you limit the selectable types. The options
available depend on which selection step is active.
changeable window Additional options appear in this area, depending on which selection step is active
and your previous definitions.
Outline Alignment If you select both placement and top outlines, you can specify a method for aligning
Method their curves.
Placement Radius Lets you define the blend radius between the placement face (the bottom of the
pad) and the sides of the pad.
Top Radius Lets you define the blend radius between the top face and the sides of the pad.
Corner Radius Lets you define the blend radius placed on the corners of the pad. A corner is
located at a joint between two outline curves/edges whose tangent difference
varies by more than the angle tolerance.
Reverse Pad Region If you select profile curves that are open instead of closed, a vector displays
showing on which side of the profile the pad is to be built. You can use the Reverse
Pad Region option to create the pad on the opposite side of the profile.
If the pad has multiple openings and you have specified a floor radius, you
must attach at least one face on the floor to all of the side walls of the pad.
Otherwise, blends are not produced.
If you specify a Placement Radius, Reverse Pad Region is disabled.
Attach Pad Lets you sew the pad to a target sheet body, or subtract the pad from a target solid
body. If this option is not selected, the pad will be created as a separate solid body.
Confirm Upon Apply Opens the Confirm Upon Apply dialog after you choose Apply, letting you preview
the results, and accept, reject or analyze them. This option is common to Selection
Steps dialogs.
Defining the Shape of a General Pad
To define the shape of a general pad, you must specify the outlines of the pad at the placement and
top faces. These outlines are defined in one of the following ways:
Selecting a string of curves to define the placement face outline and a second string of curves
for the top face outline.
Selecting a string of curves to define the placement face outline. The outline on the top face is
determined by projecting the placement outline onto the top face, at an angle relative to either
the placement face normals or a fixed vector.
Selecting a string of curves to define the top face outline. The outline on the placement face is
determined by projecting the top outline onto the placement face, at an angle relative to either
the top face normals or a fixed vector.
Emboss Overview
Creates an emboss feature on connected faces. Emboss features are useful for stiffener and locator
objects.
There is a wide range of ways to control and manage the shape and orientation of the emboss, its end
caps, and its sidewalls.
Emboss (in Yellow) created on surfaces using a rectangular section
To create an emboss you must:
Specify a closed section.
Specify the faces to emboss.

Specify an emboss direction (or accept the default, normal to section).
You can define the end cap (the floor or ceiling of the emboss) by choosing from a number of methods.
For example, you could define the end cap as the offset of the selected faces to emboss.
You can specify that the sidewalls be drafted and where the draft starts (for example, draft from the end
cap).
You can also create an emboss feature with edges trimmed by adjacent faces or, if the emboss falls on a
free-edge boundary, by a user-selected vector.
Create an emboss
There are many ways to create an emboss. The example below uses basic options.
1. Click InsertDesign FeatureEmboss to open the Emboss dialog box.
2. Click Curve and select a closed section of edges or curves. If you select a planar face
for the section, the Sketcher opens to let you create a section on that face.
You can also click Sketch Section to open the sketcher and create a new section on
a specified plane.
Selected section
3. In the Face to Emboss group, click Select Face and select one or more connected faces
to emboss. Selection Intent is available.
Selected faces to emboss
4. (Optional) In the Emboss Direction group, specify a new emboss draw direction. The default
emboss direction is normal to the plane of the section.
5. In the End Cap group, use one or more of the following options to specify how to cap the sidewall
geometry.
o Geometry Specify the source geometry for the end cap ( Plane of Section,
Embossed Faces, Datum Plane, or Selected Faces).
o Location Specify the process to apply to the source geomet ry to create the end
cap (In Place, Offset, or Translate).
o Distance Specify how far the end cap is offset or translat ed from the source geometry.
See End Cap options for details.

End Cap options: Geometry set to Emboss Faces, Location set to Translate
6. In the Draft group, use the following options to define the shape of the sidewall:
o Draft Specify the location that is held stationary dur ing the draft operation (From End
Cap, From Embossed Faces, From Selected Face, From Selected Datum, From
Section, or None).
o Draft Method Specify how the draft is applied to the sidewall s (Isocline Draft, True
Draft, Surface Draft). This essentially dictates the direction that the angle is measured
from.
o Draft Angle Specify the angles of individual sidewalls.
See Sidewall Draft Options for details.
Depending on which Draft options you choose, you may have to select additional objects. For the
example used here, the Draft Method is True Draft and the Draft option is End Cap.
7. (Optional) You can set or change the following additional options:

o Convexity and Approximate Offset Surface in the Settings group
o Free Edge Vector in the Free Edge Trimming group
8. If the preview disappears, the current combination of options and parameters are invalid for the
selected geometry. Change them until you get a preview of a valid emboss. When the preview
shows the emboss you want, click OK or Apply to create the feature.
Create an Offset Emboss
This command offsets a point or a curve to produce a pad, which is then connected to the input sheet by
sidewalls that may be drafted.
To create an Offset Emboss, you need a sheet body (not a solid body) on which to create it, and either a
point or a curve on the surface of the sheet body.
1. Choose InsertDesign FeatureOffset Emboss, or click Offset Emboss on the

Feature toolbar.
2. In the Offset Emboss dialog box, select Curve or Point from the Type list. Select Body
Faces is active.
3. Select the sheet body you want to create the emboss on.
4. For Curve input:
o Select a curve as the Path to Follow.
o Supply a Height and a Side Offset. The Side Offset is a dimension that is used to taper
the walls. A Side Offset of 0 (zero) makes the walls perpendicular.
Any Side Offset larger than that reduces the
size of the top of the emboss by that amount on each side of the Path. It behaves like a
draft except that you specify an offset rather than an angle. For example, an emboss 30
mm wide at the base with a Side Offset of 5 mm is 20 mm wide at the top, as shown in
the following graphic.
o Supply values for Right Width and Left Width. You are specifying the extent of the
emboss at its base on either side of the Path. In the following figure, L = Left Width, R
= Right Width, and H = Height. (These parameters are displayed on the screen.) In this
case, each width is 15 mm and the height is 10 mm.
5. For Point input:
o Select an existing point, or create one with the Point Constructor.

o Supply a Height and a Side Offset. The side offset reduces the size of the top of the
emboss by that amount on each of the four sides of the point. It behaves like a draft
except that you specify an offset rather than an angle. For example, an emboss 30 mm
by 30 mm at the base with a Side Offset of 5 mm is 20 mm by 20 mm at the top.
o Supply values for all four sides of the base of the Offset Emboss: left and right widths,
and top and bottom distances. In the following figure, L = Left Width, R = Right Width,
T = Top Distance and B = Bottom Distance. Each has a value of 15 mm.
Here is a preview of the result.
6. Click OK or Apply to complete the feature.
There is a very complex method for determining how right and left, and top and bottom are
defined within the command. It is probably easier to use an iterative process of entering values for
the various parameters, viewing the preview, then changing the values until you get the result that
you want.
Slot
This option lets you create a passage through or into a solid body in the shape of a straight slot. An
automatic subtract is performed on the current target solid. The depth value for all slot types is measured
normal to the planar placement face.
Slot Option
Thru Slot Lets you create a slot that goes completely through two selected faces. (Depending on the
shape of a selected face, the slot may go through it more than once.)
Types of Slots
Rectangular Lets you create a slot with sharp edges along the bottom.
Ball-End Lets you create a slot with a full radius bottom and corners.
U-Slot Lets you create a slot with a "U" shape (rounded corners and floor radii).
T-Slot Lets you create a slot whose cross section is an inverted T.
Dove-Tail Lets you create a slot with a "dove-tail" shape (sharp corners and angled walls).
Thru Slot
Turning on the Thru Slot option requires you to select two "thru" faces - the Starting Thru Face and the
Ending Thru Face. (For additional information on thru faces see Thru Status.) The length of the slot is
then defined as going completely through both of these faces, as shown in the figure below.
Sometimes, if you have trouble creating a particular thru slot, try selecting the thru faces in the opposite
order.
When positioning a thru slot, a single constraint that locates the slot perpendicular to its length is all you
need. Do not dimension to the end arcs of the slot.
If the thru face does not completely intersect the slot, the thru face is extended to include adjacent faces
until it does.
Thru slots which intersect a thru face more than once may result in multiple solutions (see the figure
below). Thru slots do not stop at the first contact with the thru face, but continue completely through
the thru face. If this is undesirable, you can split the face to limit the number of solutions.
If the thru face does not completely intersect the slot, the thru face is extended to the include
adjacent faces until it does.
Rectangular
This option lets you create a slot with sharp edges along the bottom.
You must specify the following parameters:
Width The width of the tool which forms the slot.
Depth The depth of the slot, which is measured in the opposite direction of the slot axis and is the
distance from the origin point to the bottom of the slot. This value must be positive.
Length The length of the slot, measured in a direction parallel to the horizontal reference. This value
must be positive.
To create a slot:
1. Choose the type of slot you want.
2. Select a planar placement face.
3. Select a horizontal reference.
4. Enter values for the feature parameters.
5. Use the Positioning dialog to precisely locate the slot.
Ball-End
A ball slot leaves a full radius bottom and corner. You must specify the following parameters:
Ball The width of the slot (i.e., the diameter of the tool).
Diameter
distance from the origin point to the bottom of the slot. This value must be positive
must be positive.
The Depth value must be greater than the ball radius (half the Ball Diameter value).
U-Slot
You can use this option to create a slot with a "U" shape. This type of slot leaves rounded corner and floor
radii. You must specify the following parameters:
Width The width of the slot (i.e., the cutting tool diameter).
distance from the origin point to the bottom of the slot. This value must be positive.
Corner The floor radius of the slot (i.e., the cutting tool edge radius).
Radius
must be positive.
The Depth value must be greater than the Corner Radius value).
T-Slot
This option lets you create a slot whose cross section is an inverted T. You must specify the following
parameters:
Top Width The width of the narrower, upper portion of the slot.
Bottom The width of the wider, lower part of the slot.
Width
Top The depth of the top part of the slot, which is measured in the opposite direction of the slot
Depth axis and is the distance from the slot origin to the top of the bottom depth value.
Bottom The depth of the bottom part of the slot, which is measured in the opposite direction of the tool
Depth axis and is the distance from the bottom of the top depth value to the bottom of the slot.
Dove-Tail
You can use this option to create a slot with a "dove-tail" shape. This type of slot leaves sharp corners
and angled walls. You must specify the following parameters:
Width The width of the slot opening on the face of the solid body, measured perpendicular to the slot path
direction and centered on the slot origin.
Depth The depth of the slot, which is measured in the opposite direction of the tool axis and is the
distance from the origin point to the bottom of the slot.
Angle The angle between the slot floor and the side wall.
Groove
This option lets you create a groove in a solid body, as if a form tool moved inward (from an external
placement face) or outward (from an internal placement face) on a rotating part, as with a turning
operation. Available groove types are:
Rectangular Lets you create a groove, whichleaves sharp corners all around.
Ball-End Lets you create a groove, which leaves a full radius at the bottom.
U-Groove Lets you create a groove, which leaves radii in the corners.
Common Concepts
The Groove option operates only on cylindrical or conical faces. The axis of rotation is the axis of the
selected face. The groove is created near the location where the face is selected (the pick point) and is
automatically linked to the selected face.
You can choose an external or internal face as the groove placement face, as shown in the figure below.
The profile of the groove is symmetric about a plane passing through the pick point and perpendicular to
the axis of rotation, as shown in the figure below.
Positioning a groove works somewhat differently than other form features. You only have to position the
groove in one direction, i.e., along the axis of the target solid. No positioning dimension menu appears.
You position the groove by selecting a target solid edge and then the tool (that is, the groove) edge or
centerline. See the figure below for an illustration.
Procedure
The basic procedure to create a groove is:
1. Choose the type of groove you wish to create ( Rectangular, Ball-End, or U-Groove).
2. Select the cylindrical or conical placement face.
3. Enter the parameter values in the dialog and choose OK. A groove "tool" is temporarily displayed
as a disc. This shape will be subtracted from the target solid.
4. Select the target edge (on the target solid).
Instead of selecting a target edge, you can choose OK; the groove will stay in its initial
location.
5. Select the tool edge or centerline (on the groove tool).
6. Enter the desired horizontal distance between the selected edges and choose OK.
7. Use the Positioning dialog to precisely locate the groove.
Dart Feature - Overview
This function lets you add a dart feature along the intersection curve of two sets of faces.
Dart Feature Example
First Face Set Intersection Curve Second Face Set Dart Feature
To create a dart feature you must specify:
Two sets of faces that intersect. A face set can be a single face or several faces.
A base location point for the dart, either

o a point along the intersection curve, or
o a point at the intersection of the intersection curve and a plane.
A depth.
An angle.
A radius.
By default the orientation of the dart is on a plane that is perpendicular to the intersection curve of the two
sets of faces, but you can define the orientation yourself.
Rib
Use the Rib command to add a thin-wall rib or rib network to a solid body by extruding an intersecting
planar section.
Ribs are created based on a planar section of curves. The section can be any combination of curves:
1. A single open curve with no other curves
endpoint connected.
2. A single closed curve or spline.
3. Connected curves may be open or closed.
4. Y-junctions.
You can specify a wall direction where the rib walls are perpendicular to the section plane or parallel
to it.
Perpendicular Parallel
You can specify how thickness is applied relative to the section.
Symmetric Rib thickness is applied symmetrically about the section curves.
Asymmetric Rib thickness is applied to one side of the section curves.
Create internal ribs for a plastic cover

This example shows how to create internal stiffening ribs.
Open and closed rib features.
A network of ribs in one feature.
Rib feature reordering.

1.
Choose Home tabFeature groupRib
.
In this example, there is only one solid body

in the part so the body is preselected.
2. Select curves for the first rib section.
For this example, a small circle is selected to

create a boss.
The initial rib displays along with handles to
specify offset and thickness.
3. Drag the Thickness handle to specify the

thickness or enter a value in the Thickness
box.
4. Click Apply.
The solid is still selected.

5. Select curves for another rib section.
For this example, a pattern of curves is

selected to create a network of ribs.
The ribs radiate outward from their ends

until they intersect another solid body.
6. Drag the Thickness and Offset handles as

necessary to configure the ribs.
In this example, the ribs are offset to a lower

level.
7. Click Apply.
8. Select curves for another rib section.
In this example, a rib section is created to

connect opposing walls of the cover and the
Offset handle is used to lower the rib.
9. Click OK.
10. Reorder rib features in the Part Navigator, if

necessary.
In this example, the last rib feature is

reordered before the Y-juncture network rib
feature.
11. Hide or suppress any construction geometry.

Thread Terminology and Basic Procedures
Topics
Terminology
Creating a Symbolic Thread
Creating a Detailed Thread
Editing Threads
Terminology
Thread Creation Parameters
Major Diameter is the largest diameter of the thread. For internal threads, the diameter must be larger
than the cylindrical face diameter.
Minor Diameter is the smallest diameter of the thread. For external threads, the diameter must be smaller
than the cylindrical face diameter.
Pitch is the distance from a point on a thread to a corresponding point on the next thread, measured
parallel to the axis.
Angle is the angle included between the sides of the thread measured in a plane through the axis of the
threads. The default is 60 degrees (standard for most screw threads).
Length is the distance from the selected starting face to the end of the thread, measured parallel to the
axis.
The values for pitch, angle, and length must be greater than zero. The pitch and angle values must
meet the following criteria:
Creating a Symbolic Thread

To create symbolic threads:
1. Choose Symbolic for the Thread Type.
2. Choose the thread manufacturing Method.
3. Choose the Form for the thread.
The choices for Method and Form are user defined through customer defaults, and may
differ from examples shown here.
4. Select one or more cylindrical placement faces. Based on Form and on the first selected face,
default values for Major Diameter, Minor Diameter, Pitch, Angle, Length, and Shaft Size (for
external threads) or Tapped Drill Size (for internal threads) appear. Most of the parameters that
were unavailable are now active. Number of Starts specifies whether this is a single thread or
multiple threads.
5. Modify the parameters as desired. (Some parameters, such as Callout, cannot be modified
directly.)
6. Callout references the thread table entry that provides the default values. Choose from Table lets
you choose a different entry (and, therefore, a different set of default values). If you edit the
parameters manually, Callout grays out to indicate that the current parameters do not come
directly from a table.
7. Choose Tapered if you want the thread to be tapered.
8. If you want the thread to update when the cylinder changes, choose Full Thread. ( Length grays
out.)
9. If a selected face belongs to an instance array, you can apply the thread to the other instances by
choosing Include Instances.
10. Decide how you want the rotation of the thread to be, either a Right Hand or a Left Hand thread.
11. Choose Select Start if you want to specify a new starting location for the thread, and select a
planar face on a solid body, or a datum plane.
Reverse Thread Axis lets you specify the direction that the thread is cut in relation to the start
plane.
Under Start Conditions, Extend Thru Start causes the system to generate a full thread beyond the
start plane. Do Not Extend causes the system to generate the thread beginning at the start plane.
See the figure below for a comparison.
12. Choose OK or Apply.
If OK is used to create the thread, all the faces are resized to fit the thread where necessary.
Therefore, select multiple placement faces only when you want them to be the same size after the
threads are created.
If you do not want default values to be supplied from a lookup table, choose Manual Input and select
the cylindrical placement face(s). (Or select the face and then choose Manual Input.) Enter the
parameters, and choose OK to create the thread(s) and update the model, or Apply to create the
thread(s) without resizing the associative features.
Creating a Detailed Thread

To create detailed threads:
1. Choose Detailed for the Thread Type.

2. Select a cylindrical placement face. Default parameter values appear, based on the diameter of
the face.
3. Modify the parameters if required. The parameters that appear on the Create Threads dialog for
detailed threads are Major Diameter, Minor Diameter, Length, Pitch, Angle, Rotation (Right Hand
or Left Hand), and Select Start.
4. Choose OK or Apply (Apply lets you continue to create more threads), and the system creates
the thread.
For improved performance when creating detailed threads, it is highly recommended that U Count
and V Count, located under Preferences Modeling Grid Lines, be set to zero prior to the
creation of detailed thread features. This causes the display of U and V grid lines to be suppressed.
Editing Threads
The parameters that can be edited on a thread feature under Edit Feature Parameters are Major
Diameter (only on internal threads), Minor Diameter (only on external threads), Length, Pitch, Angle, and
the rotation Direction. You cannot change the display parameters or select a new starting location for the
thread using this option.
When feature operations such as suppress and delete are performed on symbolic thread features, they
behave like other features: the dashed arcs are suppressed or deleted. However, if a solid operation
(such as Edit Show and Hide) is performed, the dashed arcs will not be affected.
Because they are attached to other features, threads cannot be repositioned.
Thread
Use the Thread command to create either symbolic or detailed threads on cylindrical faces.
Symbolic threads capture information from external thread tables and are recognized by downstream applications such
as drafting. Symbolic threads are represented by dashed circles at the start and the end of the threaded length.
You can make a symbolic thread partly associative or specify a fixed length. Partly associative means that if the thread is
modified, the feature will update, but not vice versa.
The behavior of the symbolic thread feature is slightly different from other features due to its display. The dashed circles
associated with the thread behave like NX geometry. For example, they can be selected as arcs with the Information
options, and they are added to layers as geometric objects.
Detailed threads offer realistic renderings. They do not capture callout information and they are not recognized by
downstream applications. While they do look more realistic, they produce complex geometry which takes longer to update.
Detailed threads are fully associative; if the feature is modified, its thread updates accordingly.
Note Detailed threads must be created one at a time, while symbolic threads take less time to create and can be created in
multiple sets. For these reasons, along with the advantages of using customized thread tables, we recommend that you
create symbolic threads unless you need greater detail.
You can:
Create (1) internal or (2) external threads.
Create (1) left hand or (2) right hand threads.
Specify a start face or datum plane. If you do not select a start face, it is determined by the topology of the solid body.
Defining a UDF
The User Defined Feature Wizard lets you create UDFs, and save them as special part files. You can
then insert the file as a user defined feature in the Modeling application, and the data can be added as a
feature to a target solid.
Creating UDFs that use features that are suppressed by expression may cause them to fail if those
features share any common edge.
To create a user defined feature, follow these steps:
1. Create a model for the UDF.
It is generally best if you define all features with Relative rather than Absolute definitions. For
example, an EXTRUDE feature that is defined with an Absolute extrude direction of XC (X
direction) will have problems updating when brought into a part in orientations other than the one
in which it was created. On the other hand, an EXTRUDE feature created with a Relative extrude
direction, such as a Relative Datum Axis, will update regardless of the orientation in which it is
brought.
To capture features in a UDF, it is best to use Edit Feature Parameters to examine the
feature references and redefine them to the minimum requirements.
If you use Selection Intent rules to define the UDF part, they will be carried forward and used later
when you instantiate the UDF (although, you can change them at that time).
2. When you have finishing building a part that you want to save as a UDF, you are ready to open
the User Defined Feature Wizard. Use one of the following methods to start the wizard:
o Tools User Defined Feature Wizard
o File Export User Defined Feature
You advance through each page using the selection boxes or the Next and Back buttons. On each page
you enter data for the UDF. When you have specified the minimum amount of data needed to create the
UDF, you can complete it by clicking the Finish button.
Inserting a UDF into a Part
To insert a user defined feature into the current part file:
1. Use one of the following methods to choose a UDF:
o Open the User Defined Feature Library Browser, from either:
Tools User Defined Feature Insert, or
Insert Design Feature User Defined,
and choose a UDF.
o You can drag and drop UDFs from a user defined features Resource Bar Palette. This is
quicker than using the User Defined Feature Library Browser.
The UDF Create dialog displays. If there are references for the UDF that you need to
resolve, a separate graphics UDF definition window also appears and displays the parent
UDF, to give you some idea of the shape and orientation of the UDF.
2. Use the Create dialog to review and change the parameters for the UDF, resolve references,
assign the destination layer and review the documentation, if any.
If available, you can use selection intent to group collections of reference objects for supported
features. You can change the selection intent rule from what was used in its creation to one that
better suits your current purpose.
When you have set all desired values in the dialog, click OK or Apply.
3. In some situations, especially if you have selection intent in your UDF definition and you have a
collection of references in the working part that correspond to a collection in the definition part, a
reference mapping dialog will open to let you specify how to map individual references between
the collections.
For example, if you have a curve string in the UDF definition part with two curves, and you specify
a string of three curves in the working part, you can map the two curves in the definition part to
either of the three curves in the working part, so that their children features can be applied
appropriately.
The mapping dialog lists references that need to be mapped, and shows the UDF definition part
in a mapping window.
Click on an item in the list to highlight the reference in the reference mapping window. You can
then select a corresponding object in the working part.
In addition to the list, you can add new mappings by selecting one object from the mapping object
and then selecting its map in the working part.
References that need to be mapped are determined by how they are used by member features in
the underlying UDF.
If necessary you can reverse reference directions by double-clicking the direction arrow or by using
the Reverse Direction option in the mapping dialog.
Once you complete the mapping dialog, click OK.
4. The UDF is created and appears in the graphics window.
5. If applicable, the Positioning Method dialog displays to let you position the UDF.
Note that, when you insert a UDF, it is treated as a single feature. If you attempt to suppress or delete a
UDF component, the entire UDF is suppressed or deleted. Components on a UDF must be controlled by
a suppress expression in order to be individually suppressed and un suppressed
Create an Extract Face feature
1. Choose InsertAssociative CopyExtract to open the Extract dialog box.
2. From the Type list, select Face.
3. From the Face Option list, select the type of face you want. Select Face is active.
Selected faces to extract
4. Select the faces to extract.

5. (Optional) Under Settings, you can do the following:
o Select the Fix at Current Timestamp check box to fix the timestamp order of the
resulting extract face feature.
o Select the Hide Original check box to hide the original faces once the extract face
feature is created.
o Select the Delete Holes check box to delete any holes on the seed faces to be extracted.
o Select the required surface type from the Surface Type list.
6. Click OK or Apply to create the extract face feature.

Extract Face feature with Delete Holes option selected
Create an Extract Body feature
1. Click InsertAssociative CopyExtract to open the Extract dialog box.
2. From the Type list, select Body. Select Body is active.
3. Select the body to create the extract body feature.
Selected body to extract
o Clear the Fix at Current Timestamp check box to fix the timestamp order of the resulting
extract body feature.
o Select the Hide Original check box to hide the original body once the extract body
feature is created.
5. Click OK or Apply to create the extract body feature.
Extract body feature (original body hidden)
Create a Composite Curve feature
1. Choose InsertAssociative CopyComposite Curve to open the Composite Curve dialog

box.
The Select Curve option is active.
2. Specify the curves to create the composite curve feature. Selection Intent options on the
Selection Bar are available to aid selection.
Curves selected to create composite curve feature
3. (Optional) Click Reverse Direction to reverse the direction of all curve loops.
4. If you select a loop of curves to create the composite curve feature, the Specify Origin Curve
option is active enabling you to select the origin curve.

Edge selected as the Origin Curve
o Clear the Associative check box to create a non-associative composite curve feature.
o Select the Hide Original check box to hide the original input curves.
You cannot use the Hide Original option to hide edges selected as parent
geometry.
o Select the Allow Self-intersection check box to select self-intersecting curves as input
curves.
6. Click OK or Apply to create the composite curve feature.
Composite Curve feature

Pattern Feature
Use the Pattern Feature command to create patterns of features (linear, circular, polygon, etc.) with
various options for defining pattern boundaries, orientation of instances, clocking and variance.
You can create pattern features using a variety of pattern layouts.
Linear Polygon Along Reference
Circular Spiral General Helix

You can fill a specified boundary with a pattern feature.
For a Linear layout, you can specify a Symmetric pattern in one or both directions. You can
also specify to Stagger columns or rows.
For a Circular or Polygon layout, you can choose to radiate a pattern.
You can define a Pattern Increment by using expressions to specify pattern parameters.
You can export pattern parameter values to a spreadsheet and make positional edits that are
propagated back to your pattern definition.
You can explicitly select individual instance points for clocking, suppression and variance of
pattern features.
You can control the orientation of a pattern.

Same As Input Follow Pattern (circular)
. Pattern Feature methods

There are two methods of creating pattern features:
Simple
Simple design features such as holes and extruded features are

supported.
One input feature per output pattern.
Multi-body features are supported.
Variational
All features which support copy-paste are supported.
Detailed features such as blends and drafts are supported.
Each instance of the pattern is fully evaluated.
Works with multiple input features.
Multi-body features are supported.
You can reuse references to the input feature and control

which references from the input features are evaluated at each
instance location.
Advanced hole functions are supported.
Sketch features are supported.

Create a pattern of features on a truncated cone
This example shows you how to:
Create an angled linear pattern of features on

the truncated cone face.
Use the first linear pattern to create another

pattern along a circular edge.
1. Choose Home tabFeature groupPattern
Feature .
2. Select features to pattern.
You can use the Part Navigator to select

features.
Feature groups can also be selected.
3. Set the following Pattern Definition

parameters:
Layout = Linear
Specify Vector = Angled sketch line
Spacing = Count and Span
Count = 4
Span Distance = 70
4. Middle-click to Apply.
You can use the Part Navigator to select

features.
6. Set the following Pattern Definition
parameters:
Layout = Along
Select Path = Edge of base of cone
Count = 10
Location = %Arc Length
% Span By = 100
7. Choose another command or click OK to

create the pattern.
Edit a pattern of features using variance and clocking

Vary a pattern by editing

parameters of selected features
of the pattern.
Use clocking to move specific

features of a feature pattern.
1. In the Part Navigator, position the cursor

over a Pattern node to edit and right-
clickEdit with Rollback.
2. In the Pattern Feature dialog box, in the
Instance Points section, click Select
Instance Point .
3. Select the middle concentric arc of instance

points as the features to edit.
4. With the cursor on a selected pattern point,
right-clickSpecify Variance.
The Variance dialog box becomes available.
5. Select an object expression to variant, then

right-clickAdd to Edit.
The selected expression is added to the

Values group of the Variance dialog box
where its value can be modified for the
selected instance points.
You can edit multiple expressions by adding

them to the Values group.
6. Edit the expressions then OK. In this example

the following expressions were modified:
EXTRUDE: End Limit: Increased from

10 mm. to 30 mm.
SIMPLE HOLE: Diameter. Decreased

from 10 mm. to 5 mm.
Visual check with Show Result
7. Click OK.
8.
Click Deselect All on the Top Border bar.
The selected instance points are deselected.
9. Select the new reference points, use Specify

Variance to vary the diameter.
10. Make modifications to expressions. In this

example, the following expression was
modified:
SIMPLE HOLE: Diameter. Decreased

from 10 mm. to 5 mm.
Click OK.
Visual check with Show Result
11. With the cursor over one of the selected

instance points, right-clickClock.
12. Use the Angle and Radial handles or input

boxes to adjust the clocking. In this example,
the rotation angle is set to 150 degrees.
13. Click OK to accept the clocking parameters.
14. Choose another command or click OK to

create the pattern
Reuse pattern references to control the shape of pattern

features
Create a pattern of slot features along a curve.
Reuse sketch references to control the shape of the pattern

features.
The feature pattern will be created from an extruded sketch.
The sketch is constrained to the base of the cylinder (1) and the
intersection curve on the tube (2).
1. Choose Home tabFeature groupPattern
Feature .
The default Reference Point is displayed. It

is at the center of the objects mass.
3. In the Reference Point group, use Specify
Point options to move the reference point to
the tangency point on the intersection curve.
4. Set the following parameters for Direction 1:
Layout = Along
Path Method = Offset
Select Path = Angled elliptical

intersection curve
Count = 20
Location = % Arc Length
% Span By = 100
5. Set the following parameters for

Orientation:
Orientation = Same as Input
Follow Face (selected)
Select Face = Outside face of the

tube
6. Set the following parameters for Pattern
Method:
Method = Variational
In the Reusable References list,

select the geometry you want to
reference during patterning.
In this example, two sketches which

control the slot geometry are selected.
Extrude
Coordinate system for Datum

Coordinate System for Extrude
Sketch External Reference for

Extrude
Sketch External Reference for

Extrude
7. Use PreviewShow Result to check the

pattern. Choose another command or click
OK to create the pattern.
Along layout options
Pattern Definition Along layout
1. Selected object to pattern.
2. Path Method = Offset, Select

Path = spline
Path Method determines the

relationship between the reference
points of the pattern and the
specified path.
For more information, click the

Path methods for the Along layout
link in Look up more details.
3. Count and Span spacing, Count =

5, %Span By = 100
Sets the type of pattern spacing. In

this example, five instances will
span a specified percentage of the
first path.
4. Use Direction 2 , Direction by

= Curve, Count and Pitch spacing,
Count = 4
Sets the second direction. You can

set the direction using either a
curve or a vector.
If you select Vector, the Specify

Vector options become available.
5. Location = %Arc Length, %Pitch
By = 33
Sets the location of the instances

based on percentage of arc length.
The location of each instance on the

specified arc length is determined
by the specified pitch percentage.
Pattern Settings
Available when the Use Direction 2 check

box is selected.
Input Feature Only for Direction 2
Spiral layout options

Pattern Definition Spiral layout
Spiral 1. Direction = Left Hand
The left-hand direction is clockwise, while

the right-hand direction is counter-
clockwise.
2. Spiral Size By = Total Angle, Angle = 540
Total Angle is measured by degrees from the

reference vector.
A Number of Turns options is also available.
3. Radial Pitch = 75 mm
The distance between the Reference Point

and the curve of the spiral along the
reference vector.
4. Pitch along Spiral = 50 mm

The distance between instances of the
pattern.
5. Reference Vector = XC
The reference vector is an orienting vector

from which the Radial Pitch value and Total
Angle value are measured.
6. Rotation Angle = 25
Sets the angle by which the instance points

are rotated around the specified reference
point.
Helix layout options

Pattern Definition Helix layout
1. Direction = Right Hand
The right-hand direction is counter-clockwise - left-

hand direction is clockwise.
2. Helix Size By = Angle, Helix Pitch, Turns
Distance and Span options are also available.
3. Angle = 60
Sets the angle for instancing from the Reference Point

and Rotation Axis.
4. Helix Pitch = 96
Sets the distance for one helical turn based on the

specified Rotation Axis.
5. Turns = 2
Works in conjunction with Helix Pitch to determine

the total helix span.
Part shown translucent to show

pattern
General layout options
Pattern Definition General layout
1. From Location = Coordinate

System
General
Locates and orients the selected
objects in relation to the CSYS.
You can select an existing CSYS or

create one.
You can define the location using

point definition options.
2. To Select CSYS
Select any CSYS to locate and orient

pattern objects to that CSYS.
You can also specify points to locate

the pattern. Sketch Section is
available to create sketch points to
locate the pattern object.
3. Orientation = Follow Pattern
The pattern of objects that are

created follow the orientation of the
base pattern object (in this case,
the CSYS).
The Same As Input option keeps the

orientation of the pattern feature.
Follow Face
Orients the pattern objects normal to
the defining face at the location of the
object.
By default, the face that is followed is
the face on which the pattern object is
located, but you can specify an
alternative face and a projection
direction.
Reference layout options

Pattern Definition Reference layout
1. Selected objects for pattern.
2. Select Pattern
Select a pattern to be used as reference

for the new pattern.
The reference pattern being created is

associative to the selected pattern.
3. Select Base Instance Handle
Specifies which instance point of the

pattern object being referenced will
match the reference point of the object
being patterned.
Note The reference pattern inherits
instance specific properties such as
clocking and variance from parent
surface.
You can edit the reference

pattern so that instances deviate
from the parent pattern, such as
suppressing an instance that is not
suppressed in the parent pattern.
You can edit reference patterns

to use a different parent pattern.
Pattern Face
Use the Pattern Face command to create patterns of faces in various pattern layouts and define
pattern boundaries, reference points, orientation, and clocking.
You can create a pattern of faces using a variety of pattern layouts.
Linear Polygon Along Reference
Circular Spiral General Helix
You can fill a specified boundary with a pattern of faces.

For a Linear layout, you can specify a Symmetric pattern in one or both directions. You can also
specify to Stagger columns or rows.
For a Circular or Polygon layout, you can choose to radiate a pattern.
You can define a Pattern Increment by using expressions to specify pattern parameters.
You can export pattern parameter values to a spreadsheet and make positional edits that are
propagated back to your pattern definition.
You can explicitly select individual instance points for deletion or for clocking instances to different
locations.
Delete
Multiple instances of the

pattern can be deleted at one
Linear time.
4x4
layout

Clock
Each move shown above is a

separate clocking operation.
You can control the orientation of a pattern.
Same As Input Follow Pattern (circular)
The Pattern Face command differs from the Pattern Feature command in the following ways:
You can select a set of faces to copy instead of features.
The result is a single feature instead of instanced copies of features, so feature creation and
editing are faster.
Pattern Face is especially useful when working with imported solid models when there are no features
in the model to pattern
Move a face set with Mirror Face

This example shows how to create a mirrored set of faces, mirrored about a defined plane.
1. Choose Home tabFeature groupMirror Face .
In the Mirror Face dialog box, in the Face group, Select Face is active.
2. Select a set of faces to mirror about a plane.
You can optionally use the Face Finder options to select additional, related faces.
3. In the Mirror Plane group, select New Plane from the Plane list, and specify an inferred plane.
A preview of the mirror face appears.

4. Click OK or Apply to mirror the faces.
Mirror Feature overview
Use the Mirror Feature command to create symmetrical models by mirroring selected features
through a datum plane or planar face. To mirror an entire body, use the Mirror Body command. With
Mirror Feature, you can mirror one or more features within a body.
With Selection options, you can mirror all the features in a body or the dependent features of the selected
feature.
When you edit the mirror feature, you can redefine the mirror plane and add and remove features.
The following graphics show examples of mirrored features:

Extrude and hole array selected and mirrored across a datum plane
All features mirrored across a datum plane
Isolate Object of Feature
What is it?
Use the Isolate Object of Feature command to control which individual object of a feature is used for
downstream features. The downstream object can be a body, a curve chain (one or more curves), or a
point. The isolated object is determined by its proximity to a selected plane or point.
Sketch with 3 chains of curves

(1) Extrusion created using the Isolate Slot (with Proximity point)
& Proximity point for Isolate feature moved
feature (2)
Create and locate an isolated object of a feature

This example shows how to locate a hole at a point that is isolated from an intersection point set, and
then move the proximity object for that point. The proximity object is the datum plane.
1. Choose Home tabFeature groupIsolate
Object of Feature.
2. Select the point set.
3. Select the datum plane as the proximity

object.
4. Click OK.
5. Choose Home tabFeature groupHole
6. In the Form and Dimensions group, in the

Diameter box, type 0.31.
7. On the Top Border bar, make sure that the
only snap point active is Existing Point .

8. Select the Existing PointPoint of Isolate.
Note Make sure to select the Point of Isolate, not

the Point of Point Set.
9. Click OK.
10. Double-click the datum plane.
11. Drag the datum plane angle handle, so the

datum plane is located near the next point on
the flange.
12. Click OK.
All features mirrored across a datum plane
Mirror Body overview
Use the Mirror Body command to mirror an entire body in a part across a datum plane. You can use
this, for example, to form the other hand of a left hand or right hand part. You can timestamp the mirrored
body, but after you do so, any modification you make to the original body is not reflected in the mirrored
body.
When you mirror a body, the mirror feature is associative to the original body. You cannot edit any
parameters in the mirrored body.
The following graphic shows an original body mirrored across a datum plane:
unite
Unite
Use this Boolean command to combine the volume of two or more solid tool bodies into a single
target body. The target body and tool body must overlap or share faces so that the result is a valid solid
body. This command creates a Unite feature
Target solid body (1) united with two tool solid bodies (2) into a single solid body (3)
You get a single, modified target body, and separate unite features for each tool body. You have the
option to save and retain unmodified copies of the target and tool bodies.
You can only use this Unite Boolean command to unite solid bodies.
Combine tool body volumes using Unite
1. Choose InsertCombine BodiesUnite.
Note: In the Unite dialog box, by default, Select Body is active first in the Target
group, and after you select a target, it is active in the Tool group.
2. Select a target solid body.
Selected target body (cyan)
3. Select one or more tool solid bodies.
Selected tool solid bodies (red)
4. (Optional) You can do one or more of the following:
o In the Preview group, use Show Result / Undo Result to check how the target
and tool solid bodies will be modified.
Modified solid body
o To save an unmodified copy of the target body, select Keep Target.

o To save unmodified copies of the tool bodies, select Keep Tool.
5. Choose OK or Apply
The target body is modified by combining it with the volumes of the four tool bodies.
Remove tool body volume using Subtract
1. Choose InsertCombine BodiesSubtract.
Note: in the Subtract dialog box, by default, Select Body is active first in the Target
2. Select a target body.

3. Select one or more tool bodies.
Selected tool bodies (red)
4. (Optional) You can do the following:
o In the Preview group, use Show Result / Undo Result to check how the
target body will be modified when the volume of the tool bodies is subtracted from it.
Preview of modified target body
o To save an unmodified copy of the original target body, select Keep Target.
o To save an unmodified copy of the original tool bodies, select Keep Tool.
The target body is modified by subtracting the volumes of the four tool bodies.
Subtract
Use the Subtract command to remove the volume of one or more tool bodies from a target body.
The target body must be a solid body. The tool bodies are normally solid bodies.
Two solid bodies (2) subtracted from a target solid body (1) resulting in a single solid body (3)
The normal result after performing a Subtract command is one new subtract feature appended to
the target body for each selected tool body.
Special conditions
If a sheet body is selected as a tool body, it must completely bisect the target body. The sheet
body divides the tool body into two new unparameterized solid bodies. To preserve the history,
use the Trim Body command instead.
Avoid using Subtract where the tool body completely splits the target body into multiple solid
bodies as shown below. The resulting solid bodies are unparameterized features that cannot be
edited. If separate solid bodies are the desired result, preserve the history by making copies of
the target body first. Use separate applications of Subtract or Trim Body on each solid body to
preserve the history of each.
A tool solid (2) is subtracted from a target solid (1), which becomes two unparameterized features (3)
Note that Subtract may leave empty space where the subtracted target body existed.
Create shared body volume using Intersect
1. Choose InsertCombine BodiesIntersect.
Note: in the Intersect dialog box, by default, Select Body is active first in the Target
2. Select a target body.

3. Select a tool body.
Selected tool body (red)
o In the Preview group, use Show Result / Undo Result to check how the target
and tool body will be modified when an intersect body containing the volume they share
is created..
Preview of modified target body
o To save an unmodified copy of the original target body, select Keep Target.
o To save an unmodified copy of the original tool body, select Keep Tool.
An intersect body is created containing the volume shared by the target and tool bodies.
Sew sheets together
1. Click InsertCombine BodiesSew.
2. In the Sew dialog box, select Sheet from the Type list.
3. If it is not already active, click Select Sheet Body in the Target group and select a
sheet body for the target.
Target sheet body selected
4. If it is not already active, click Select Sheet Body in the Tool group and select one or more
sheet bodies to sew to the target. The sheet body faces should be coincident with the target.
Tool sheet bodies selected
o In the Preview group, click Show Result
. The preview shows the sew feature.

Preview of the sew feature
Click Undo Result to return to the dialog or OK or Apply to create the sew feature.
o In the Settings group, select Output Multiple Sheets to create more than one sewn
sheet.
o In the Settings group, type a new value for the Tolerance if the current setting is too
small to create the sew feature.
6. Click OK or Apply to create the sew feature.
Sew solids together
1. Click InsertCombine BodiesSew .
2. In the Sew dialog box, select Solid from the Type list.
3. If it is not already active, click Select Face in the Target group and select a solid face for
the target.
Bottom surface of the top solid selected for the target
4. If it is not already active, click Select Face in the Tool group and select one or more
solid faces to sew to the target. The solid faces should be coincident with the target.
Top surface of the bottom solid selected for the tool
o In the Preview group, click Show Result
. The preview shows the sew feature.
Preview of new sew solid body
Click Undo Result to return to the dialog or OK or Apply to create the sew feature. o
In the Tool group, click Search Common Faces to see where the sewing will occur.
o If a selected body is part of an instance array, and you want all the instances to be sewn,
select Sew All Instances in the Settings group.
o In the Settings group, type a new value for the Tolerance if the current setting is too
small to create the sew feature.
6. Click OK or Apply to create the sew feature.
Patch
You can modify a solid body or a sheet body by replacing faces with the faces of another sheet. You
can also patch a sheet to another sheet.
The following figure shows how a sheet body is patched to a cylinder.

Patching a sheet body to a cylinder
Sheet body (yellow).
Cylinder (tan).
The cylinder is selected as the target body (cyan) and the sheet body selected as the patch tool (red).
Note the outward pointing vector, indicating the direction from which faces will be removed from the target
body.
Resulting sheet body patched to the cylinder.
If you reverse the direction of the target region, you get the patch body shown below.
Reversed direction of the target region to remove

Edges of patch tool sheets must be on or close to the face of the target body, and new edges must form a
closed loop.
Create a patch feature
1. Click InsertCombine BodiesPatch .
2. In the Patch dialog box, click Target (if it is not already active), and select a target for
the patch. The target can be a sheet or a solid.
Body selected for the target to patch (highlighted in cyan)
3. In the Tool group, click Tool (if it is not already active), and select the tool sheet to patch to
the target. Note the direction of the vector.
Sheet on the body selected for the patch tool (highlighted in red)
4. In the Preview group, click Show Result .
Preview of the new solid body
The preview shows the new solid you get by removing the region of the face on the target solid
body that lies between the sheet and the solid and is bounded by the sheet edges.
Click Undo Result to return to the dialog or OK or Apply to create the patch.
5. (Optional) To reverse the direction of the patch, click Reverse Direction in the
Target Region to Remove group.
Direction of the target region to remove arrow reversed
In the Preview group, click Show Result again.
Preview after reversing the direction
The preview in this case shows a different solid body that is formed from the sheet and the solid
body face that is bounded by the sheet edges
6. (Optional) If the tool sheet has multiple faces and you want to use one of them instead of the
default for the remove direction, click Select Face in the Tool Direction Face group
and select the face with the desired direction.
7. (Optional) If you are patching a closed sheet to a target body to make a hole, click Make Hole in
Solid Target in the Settings group.
8. Choose OK or Apply to create the patch feature.
Create an Unsew feature
1. Choose InsertCombine BodiesUnsew to open the Unsew dialog box. Select Face
is active.
2. Select the faces you want to unsew.
Selected face to unsew
3. (Optional) Under Settings, select the Keep Original check box to retain the original objects.
4. Select the required option from the Output list.
5. Click OK or Apply to create the unsew feature.
The following graphic shows the unsew feature created with the original body retained and One
Body for Each Face selected as the Output option.
Divide Face overview
Use this command to divide one or more faces of an existing body (or bodies) in a single operation
using multiple dividing objects like curves, edges, faces, datum planes, and/or solid bodies. The faces to
be divided and the dividing objects are associative, that is, if either input object is changed, the results
update to reflect the changes.
Divide Face is commonly used to create parting edges on models of parts, patterns, molds, or dies.
Divide face feature example
Face selected for the divide face operation
Curve selected as the dividing object
Faces resulting from the divide face operation
You can add a single Divide Face feature to multiple bodies.
Join Faces
You can choose from the following two methods to join faces on a solid body:
On Same Surface Lets you remove redundant faces, edges, and vertices from selected sheet and solid
bodies.
Convert to B- Lets you join multiple faces into a single B-surface type face.
Surface
On Same Surface
This option lets you remove redundant faces, edges, and vertices from selected sheet and solid bodies.
You may need to use this option after a Subdivide Face operation.
For example, if you subdivide a face and subsequently discover that you no longer need or want that
subdivision, you can perform a Join Face on the body to remove the now unwanted edges and/or faces.
Convert to B-Surface
You can use this option to join multiple faces into a single B-surface type face. The selected faces must
be adjacent to each other, belong to the same solid body, have matching u-v box ranges, and the edges
at which they join must be isoparametric.
When you select more than two faces for the join operation, the system attempts to match the faces in pairs.
You must select the faces in order so that the matching pairs share edges (see the figure below).
General Tips and Techniques
Immediately after a Join Face operation, you can use Undo to reverse the effect of the operation and
restore the body to its previous state.
You can change the tolerance values used to join faces of a body by editing the distance tolerance and
the angle tolerance.
Trim Body
This option lets you trim one or more target bodies using a face or datum plane. You can select a
portion of the body that you want to retain, and the trimmed bodies take the shape of the trimming
geometry.
Trim Body and Vector Direction
The direction of the normal vector determines which portion of the target body is kept. The vector points
away from the portion of the body that is kept. The following figures show how the direction of the vector
affects which portion of the body is kept.
Trimming body
Cylinder axis
Vector direction pointing towards the axis of the cylinder
Target body
Resulting trim body feature

Trimming body
Cylinder axis
Vector direction pointing away from the axis of the cylinder
Target body
Resulting trim body feature
In the following figure, the displayed direction is accepted. Notice that the resulting body is the portion of
the target body that the vector pointed away from.
Selected datum plane
Accepted direction
Create a trim body
1. To open the Trim Body dialog box, choose InsertTrimTrim Body.
The Trim Body dialog box opens, and Select Body is active.
2. Select one or more target bodies to trim.
Highlighted target body
3. Choose Face or Plane or New Plane for the Tool Option.
o If you chose Face or Plane, Select Face or Plane becomes active.
Select one or more faces that intersect the target body. At least one face must form a
complete intersection with the target body.
o If you chose New Plane, either select an existing plane, a datum plane, or create a new
reference plane.
To create a reference plane, select an individual plane method or click Plane
Dialog to take advantage of available plane creation options. Any plane you select or
create must intersect the target body. Selection Intent is available to aid selection.
4. A vector points towards the trimming direction.
5.
6. Ttrimming tool highlighted in red
7. (Optional) Click Reverse Direction to reverse the trimming direction.
Trimming direction reversed
8. Click Apply or OK to create the trim body feature.
Final Trim Body feature

Split Body
This option lets you divide one or more target bodies using a face, datum plane, or other geometry.
This operation removes all parameters from the bodies that are created by the split. The following
warning is displayed when you first choose the icon:
This operation removes parameters from all involved bodies. Drafting information in section views will
also be lost. Do you want to continue? (This warning will not be repeated.)
If you do not want to remove the parameters from the body, choose Cancel. To continue with the split,
choose OK. The warning message is not repeated if you choose Split Body again.
If you find that you do not like the results of the split operation, choose Edit Undo to restore the body's
parameters.
Target Bodies
You must select at least one target body, even when there is only one possible target displayed.
You can select a face or datum plane to split the target bodies.
When you split a body using a face, the face must be large enough to cut through the body
completely. If it is not, the following error message is displayed:
Non-Manifold Solid
You can also use the menu to define the following alternative objects to split the target bodies. (These are
the same methods used by Trim Body):
Plane Cylinder Sphere Cone Torus
Split Body Procedure

To use the Split Body option, follow these steps:
1. Choose the Split Body icon. A warning dialog is displayed.
2. Choose OK.
3. Select one or more target bodies, then choose OK.
4. Select a face or datum plane, or define other geometry to split the target bodies.
Failure Conditions
If you are splitting a solid body, the split operation will probably fail if:
The face being used to split the body is tangent to the face of the body.
The face of the body is coincident with any joint of adjacent faces of the splitting sheet body.
To resolve this problem, try the following.
Extract sheets from the solid body.
Trim the sheets with curves and/or planes.
Create any necessary caps and sew the sheet bodies into a solid body.
Defining Alternate Trim Geometry
This section explains how to define a plane, cylinder, sphere, cone or torus to trim the target bodies. (This
section also applies to Split Body features.) The following options are available when it is time to select
the trimming objects (after you have finished selecting the target bodies):
Define Plane Lets you use the Plane Constructor to define a plane, which is then used as a trimming
object.
Define Lets you define a cylinder as a trimming object.

Cylinder
Define Sphere Lets you define a sphere as a trimming object.
Define Cone Lets you define a cone as a trimming object.
Define Torus Lets you define a torus as a trimming object.
Define Cylinder
Define Cylinder lets you define a cylinder as a trimming object, by defining an axis (a point and direction),
a diameter, and a height. You enter the values when you use the Diameter method; the system
determines them when you use Arc/Circle. Each of these methods is interactively similar to the Diameter,
Height and Height, Arc methods used by the Insert Feature Cylinder option.
Diameter Define the cylinder direction, and then enter the diameter and height.
Arc/Circle Select an arc or circle, then accept or reverse the default direction.
Define Sphere
Define Sphere lets you define a sphere as a trimming object. You can define the sphere using either the
Center, Diameter or Great Circle method. Each of these methods is interactively identical to the Diameter,
Center and Select Arc methods used by the Insert Feature Sphere option.
Center, Diameter Define the sphere's diameter, and then use the Point Constructor to define its center.
Great Circle Select an arc or circle, then accept or reverse the default direction.
Define Cone
Define Cone lets you define a cone as a trimming object. You can define the cone using any of the
following methods:
Two Coaxial Arcs Select two arcs. (The arcs do not have to be parallel.)
Diameters, Height Define the cone's base diameter, top diameter, and height values.
Diameter, Half Angle Define the cone's base diameter, top diameter, and half angle.
Each of the above methods is interactively similar to those found in the Insert Feature Cone option.
Define Torus
Define Torus lets you define a torus as a trimming object. To create a torus solid body you must:
Enter the major and minor radius values.
Define the Torus Axis.
When entering radius values keep in mind that the Minor Radius cannot be negative. If you enter a
negative value for the Major Radius, the Minor Radius must be greater than the absolute value of the
Major Radius. Refer to the figures below.
Torus Axis is defined using the Vector Constructor. The axis you specify determines the torus orientation
and location.
After you specify a point, if you have Axis Confirmation in the Vector Constructor set to ON, you can
change the orientation of the torus you are about to create. If Axis Confirmation is OFF, the torus is
immediately created in the same orientation as the previous torus.
Create a Trimmed Sheet feature
1. Choose InsertTrimTrimmed Sheet to open the Trimmed Sheet dialog box. The Select
Sheet Body option is active.
2. Select the target sheet body to be trimmed.
Selected sheet body to be trimmed (highlighted in orange)
3. Use Select Object to select the boundary objects.
Selected boundary objects (highlighted in orange)
4. (Optional) Select the Allow Target Edges as Tool Objects check box to filter out the edges of
the target sheet body as trimming objects.
5. Select the projection direction from the Projection Direction list.
If the projection is defined when the target surface body is selected, any currently defined trim
boundaries are imprinted on the target body. Additional trim boundaries are imprinted on the
target surface as they are defined by additional selected trimming objects.
6. Specify the regions to be kept or discarded.
The preview provides a good visual clue before you carry out the trim sheet operation, by
differentiating the regions that will be trimmed, and the regions that will be retained.
Preview of resulting trimmed sheet
7. (Optional) In the Settings group, you can do the following:
o Select the Keep Target check box, to maintain the selection of the trimming boundary
objects, so that you can use it again with different target sheet bodies.
o Select the Output Exact Geometry check box to produce the intersection edges as
imprinted edges, except when the projection is along face normals and edges or curves
are used as the trimming objects.
o Enter a new value for the Tolerance.
8. Click OK or Apply to create the trimmed sheet feature.
Resulting trimmed sheet feature
If possible, avoid re-selecting trimming objects, because the imprinting of edges can be time
consuming. Changing the tolerance or the projection vector also causes all the trimming edges to
be recreated.
Trim and Extend overview
This option lets you extend and trim one or more surfaces using a set of tool objects composed of
edges or surfaces.
Trim Operation
Two intersecting solid bodies.
Selected body on the right is the object to trim (the target).
The faces of the left body are selected as the limiting edges (the tool).
The result is the body on the right is trimmed by the body on the left.
Trim and Extend creates a TRIM_AND_EXTEND feature.
Trim a sheet with another sheet in Trim and Extend
1. Choose InsertTrimTrim and Extend.
2. For the Type, select Until Selected.
Select Face or Edge in the Target group becomes active.
3. Select the faces or edges you want to trim in the graphics window.
Selected target to trim highlighted
4. In the Settings group, select Natural Curvature for the Extension Method.
5. Click Select Face or Edge in the Tool group, and select the sheet edges to use as
tool sheets to trim against the target.
Selected edge to trim against the target highlighted
6. In the Desired Results group, select Delete for the Arrow Side option. The area on the target
sheet that is on the same side as the arrow is discarded in the trim. The opposite side of the
target sheet is retained.
7. Click OK to trim the target sheet against the tool sheet.
Trim a solid body with a sheet body in Trim and Extend
2. For the Type, select Until Selected.
Select Face or Edge in the Target group becomes active.
3. For Selection Intent, select Body Faces.
4. Select the target body you want to trim.
Selected target body highlighted
5. Click Select Face or Edge in the Tool group and select the tool edges of the sheet body
to use to trim against the target.
Three tool edges selected to trim against the body
6. In the Desired Results group, select Retain for the Arrow Side option. The area on the target
body on the same side as the vector is retained in the trim and the opposite side is discarded.
7. Check the trim in the preview.In the example, the preview shows a line corresponding to the tool
edges that crosses the target body. This line marks the boundary of the trim operation.
8. Click OK to trim the target body against the tool body.
Extend a sheet body with Trim and Extend
2. For the Type, select By Distance.
Select Edge becomes active.
3. Select the edges you want to extend.

Selected target edges with preview
Selected edges to extend
Preview of the extended edges

4. In the Extension group, type the value for the distance to extend the sheet body edges into the
Distance box. In this example, we used a value of .37.
The preview updates with the new Distance value
5. For the Extension Method, select Natural Curvature.
6. Check the extension in the preview. If it is not what you expected, change the Distance value or
other appropriate parameters in the Settings group.
7. Click OK to extend the target edges.

Trim and Extend Feature
Create a corner with Trim and Extend
2. For the Type, select Make Corner.
Select Face or Edge becomes active.
3. Select the face or edge on which to create a corner.
Selected target face to trim
4. For this example, in the Desired Results group, set the Arrow Side option to Delete.
5. In the Tool group, click Select Face or Edge , and select the face or sheet edges to use
as a tool to trim the target. A preview of the corner is displayed.
After the tool is selected, a preview of the corner displays
6. For this example, select Reverse Direction . The direction of the tool on the target
is inverted.
Tool is reversed
7. Check the corner in the preview. If it is not what you expected, go back and adjust settings in the
Desired Results or Settings groups, or reselect objects, or click Reverse Direction
8. Click OK to create the corner.
Trim and Extend corner

Untrim overview
The Untrim command enables you to remove imposed boundaries and extends planar, cylindrical,
and conical faces in the linear direction of the selected face.
Instead of extracting multiple faces and then extending them, use the Untrim command to perform
additional modeling tasks on a specific region of an existing model.
You can use faces of a solid body, or a sheet body as input. The selected faces are copied and extended
along their axis to create an associative untrim feature.
An untrimmed face is inherently unsewn.

For more information about the Unsew feature, see Unsew overview.
The following graphic shows an untrim feature.
Create an Untrim feature
1. Choose InsertTrimUntrim to open the Untrim dialog box. Select Face is active.
2. Select the faces you want to untrim. Selection Intent options are available on the Selection Bar to
aid selection of faces.
Selected face to untrim
3. (Optional) Under Settings select the Hide Original check box to hide the original body.
4. Click OK or Apply to untrim the selected faces and create an untrim feature.
Untrim feature with original body shown
Create an offset surface Click Insert Offset/Scale Offset Surface.
1. In the Offset Surface dialog box, specify a value to offset by typing it in the Offset 1 box.
A positive value offsets the base face in the direction of the vector. A negative value offsets in the
opposite direction.
2. Click Select Face (if not already active) and select the faces to offset.
A preview of the offset surface appears with a direction vector normal to the selected faces.
Preview of three faces selected for the first face set
If you want to offset only a single face or a single face set and you have no other options to
set, skip the following steps and click OK or Apply to quickly create the offset surface.
4. If you want to specify additional face sets, confirm your current selections by clicking Add new
set (or click the middle mouse button) and select the faces for the next face set. Confirm
every additional face set you add by clicking Add new set .
Preview with two additional face sets
It is helpful to select Preview when specifying offset values. If the preview disappears after
entering a value, it is an indication that the value was invalid for the selected surfaces.
Change the value or the selected faces. If the preview reappears, success of the operation is
likely.
5. (Optional) You can set or change the following additional options:

o Output in the Feature group.
o Approximate Offset Faces and Tangent Edges in the Settings group.
See Offset Surface options for details.

6. Click OK or Apply to create the offset surface feature.
Final Offset Surface feature

Creating a Rough Offset
1. Use the Offset Face/Sheet selection step to select faces or sheet bodies to offset. In the example
shown below four faces on a sheet body have been selected (highlighted in red).
2. Use the Offset CSYS selection step and the CSYS Constructor to specify a CSYS. If you skip this
selection step the default current working CSYS is used, and the Z direction will be the offset
direction.
3. Specify an Offset Distance, an Offset Deviation and a Stepover Distance. In the example, the
following values were used: Offset Distance 40, Offset Deviation 1.0 and Stepover Distance 2.0.
4. Specify the Surface Generation Method, either Cloud Points, Through Curves, or Rough Fit.
o If you are using the Cloud Points Surface Generation Method, specify the Surface Control
setting, to control the number of patches in the U direction.
Specify the Boundary Trimming setting, either No Trim, Trim or Boundary Curve. In the
example, we use the Boundary Curve option, which will leave the offset surface
untrimmed, but with a boundary curve.
o If you are using the Through Curves or Rough Fit Surface Generation Method, you can
optionally use Show Section Preview to see the section curves that will be used to create
the rough offset surface. If the section curves are not what you intended you may want to
change the coordinate system or other parameters.
5. Click OK or Apply. The example below shows the results in shaded and wireframe display
modes. Since we used the Boundary Curve option for Boundary Trimming, the offset surface is
untrimmed. However, it is accompanied by a curve marking the boundary where the trim would
have been if the Trim option had been used instead.
Create an offset face feature
1. Choose InsertOffset/ScaleOffset Face to open the Offset Face dialog box. Select Face
is active.
2. Select the face or faces to offset.
Selected face to offset
3. Specify the value by which to offset the selected face, or faces, in the Offset box.
Preview of offset direction (1) and offset value (2)
4. (Optional) Click Reverse Direction to reverse the displayed offset direction.
5. Click OK or Apply to create the offset face feature.
Result after the offset face operation
Create a scale feature
1. Choose InsertOffset/ScaleScale to open the Scale dialog box.
2. Select the scale type.
3. Select the body to scale.

Body selected for scaling
4. Depending on the scale type you select, specify the scale point, axis or CSYS:
If you select Uniform, specify a scale point. Either use Point Constructor , or select a
point from the point method list, and then select a point on the body.
If you select Axisymmetric, specify the Scale Axis by selecting the axis vector and the axis
point. Use Vector Constructor , or select from the available vector method list. To select
the axis point, use the instructions above.
If you select General, specify the Scale CSYS using CSYS dialog , or by selecting from
the available CSYS method list.
Axis vector and point specified for axisymmetric type of scaling
5. Specify the required scale factor, depending on the scale type you select.
6. Click Apply or OK to scale the body.
Model after the scale operation, where the scale factor along axis is 1.5, and in other directions is 0.5
Scale overview
Use the Scale command to scale solid, and sheet bodies. The scale is applied to the geometry of
the body, rather than to the independent features that comprise the body. The operation is fully
associative.
There are three different scaling methods you can use: Uniform, Axisymmetric or General. The
following figure illustrates the different methods.
Model before scaling
Model after uniform scaling, where the scale factor is 1.5
Model after axisymmetric scaling, where the scale factor along axis is 1.5 and in other directions is 1
Model after general scaling, where the X, Y and Z scale factors are 0.5, 1 and 2 respectively
About Thicken
Use this command to offset (thicken) one or more connected faces or sheets into a solid body.
Thickening occurs by offsetting the selected faces along their face normals, and then creating sidewalls.
A thicken feature (lower figure) created from the three top faces of a plate
Shell Overview
Use this command to hollow out a solid body, or to create a shell around it, using values you specify for
the wall thicknesses. You can assign individual thicknesses to faces and remove individual faces.
Solid body before shell (left) and after (right)

Create a Shell
1. Choose InsertOffset/ScaleShell.
2. In the Shell dialog box, select the Type option for the shell you want to create:
o Remove Faces, Then Shell
o Shell All Faces
3. If you chose:
o Remove Faces, Then Shell, use Select Face in the Face to Pierce group
and select one or more faces to remove from the solid you want to shell.
Preview to remove selected top face and then shell
o If you chose Shell All Faces, use Select Body in the Body to Shell group to
select the body you want to shell.
Preview to shell all faces
4. In the Thickness group, type a distance value in the Thickness box, or drag the thickness
handle or type a value in its dynamic input box.
5. (Optional) Click Reverse Direction in the Thickness group if you need to invert the
direction of the thickness.
6. (Optional) You can assign different shell thicknesses to different faces in the solid with the options
in the Alternate Thickness group.
a. Click Select Face if necessary and select the faces for the first face thickness set.
b. Type a thickness value in the Thickness 0 box. You can also drag the thickness handle or type a
value in its dynamic input box.
If the direction is wrong, click Reverse Direction for the face thickness set.
First thickness face set consisting of one face with a new thickness
c. To complete the face thickness set, click Add New Set . You can also complete the set
by clicking the middle mouse button.
d. Repeat this sequence for each set of faces that require a unique wall thickness.
Second thickness face set of one face with a new thickness
(Optional) You can set or change the Approximate Offset Faces, Tangent Edges, and
Tolerance options in the Settings group (see Shell options for details).
Click OK or Apply to create the shell.
Resulting shelled solid

Wrap Geometry
Wrap Geometry lets you simplify a detailed model by computing a solid envelope to surround it,
effectively "shrink wrapping" it with a convex polyhedron of planar faces (a WRAP_GEOMETRY feature).
The original model can consist of any number of solids, sheets, curves and points.
For simple instructions on using this option see the Basic Wrap Geometry Procedure.
Wrap Geometry works by converting the input geometry to points, which are then wrapped in a single
solid body composed of planar faces. The faces are offset slightly outward to ensure that the wrapping
envelope encompasses all of the selected geometry. The underlying geometry is unaltered. If you wish,
you can specify an additional offset by entering a value in the Additional Offset field.
Since the result of the wrapping operation is a solid body, the input you specify must not be coplanar.
The following figure shows how a solid body appears before and after it is wrapped.
Wrap Geometry can be useful if you are:
Performing packaging studies (for example, to simplify a complex model)
Performing space capturing studies (for example, to get an approximation of space required for
multiple disjointed objects)
Converting wireframe data (for example, as a starting point for converting it to a solid body)
Hiding proprietary data (for example, to get a reasonable representation without details)
Sheets to Solid Assistant
Sheets to Solid Assistant produces solids from sets of unsewn sheet bodies, by automating the
process of sewing a set of sheets ( Sew) and then thickening the result ( Thicken). If the given sheets
should cause this process to fail, an analysis is automatically done on them to try to find the source of the
problem. Sometimes this can result in a simple deduced remedy, and sometimes the surfaces must be
rebuilt.
Basic Sheets to Solid Assistant Procedure
1. Use the Target Sheet selection step to select a sheet on which you want to generate a solid with
thickness. An arrow displays on the sheet to indicate the direction of the first offset.
In the example figure below a single sheet has been selected, and an arrow displays the offset
direction.
2. [optional] Use the Tool Sheets selection step to select sheets you wish to sew to the target. If you
skip this step, there will be no sew operation, and only the thicken operation will be attempted.
In the example figure below, three tool sheets that border the target sheet have been selected
(displayed in red).
3. Enter First and Second Offset data to add thickness to the solid. For the example figure, the first
offset is -1 and the second offset is -0.2.
4. If you selected one or more tool sheets, enter a desired Sew Tolerance. For the example figure,
the sew tolerance is .010.
5. Click Apply. The system then performs a validity check of the input surfaces. If any problems are
found, the message, "Failed input checks" displays on the Cue line, and the appropriate Analysis
Results Display options become available. Click those that apply to your situation and attempt to
resolve the problem. You can both change the geometry, and you can turn on appropriate
Remedy Options.
After resolving any input check failures, and have specified any Remedy Options you may want to
use, click Apply again. If the input checks succeed, the system will attempt to create the solid
body using the specified parameters and remedies.
6. If the input sheets pass the first validity check, the system attempts to create the solid body. If this
succeeds, the solid body is created and is itself checked for validity. If the new solid body passes
the last validity check, creation of the solid becomes final.
If the attempt to create the solid fails, a message will display on the Cue line identifying the part of
the process that failed, such as "unable to thicken," or more generally, "failed to create solid."
Failures can occur because either the thicken or sew operation (or both) failed, or if the thicken
produced an invalid body. At this point, you can try adjusting the inputs, such as the Sew
Tolerance, or you can try other (or all of the) Remedy Options, or you can edit the geometry.
7. Once you have made all adjustments click Apply. If all is well at this point, the solid is created. In
the example figure shown below, a solid body composed of the four sheets is created .
Create a constant radius edge blend
1. Choose InsertDetail FeatureEdge Blend to open the Edge Blend dialog box. Select Edge
is active.
2. Select one or more edges for the first edge set. The edges do not have to be connected, but they
must all be on the same body.
Selection Intent rules are available.

Two strings of edges selected for the first edge set
3. Change the radius of the edge set using one of the following methods:
o In the graphics window, drag the radius drag handles or type a value in the dynamic input
box.
o In the dialog box, type a radius value in the Radius 1 box.
4. Complete the Radius 1 edge set by clicking Add New Set or by clicking the middle
mouse button.
A handle for the edge set is displayed, and the Radius 1 set is closed in the list box.
Radius 1 edge set completed
5. (Optional) To add a second edge set (Radius 2), select additional edges.
Edges selected for Radius 2 edge set
Complete the Radius 2 edge set by clicking Add New Set or by clicking the middle mouse
button.
Radius 2 edge set completed
Add additional edge sets in the same way.
o Add one or more Variable Radius Points to blended edges (for details, see Add variable
radius points to an edge blend).
o Stop an edge blend before it reaches a corner by adding Stop Short of Corner points
(for details, see Add stop short points to an edge blend).
o Add a Corner Setback to the vertex of a three-edge blended corner (for details, see Add
stop short points to an edge blend corner).
o Specify Overflow options to handle those cases where the blend passes over an edge.
o Adjust the edge blend by applying options found in the Trim Options and Overflow
Resolutions dialog groups.
o To delete an edge set, select it in the list box and click Remove , or right-click
the edge set handle in the graphics window and choose Remove.
7. Click OK or Apply to create the edge blend feature.
Final edge blend feature
Add variable radius points to an edge blend
is active.
2. Select edges for your edge sets (see Create a constant radius edge blend for details).
Completed edge sets
3. In the dialog box, in the Variable Radius Points group, click Specify New Location. The Point
and Point Constructor options become active.
4. Specify one or more points on the edges in the edge sets where you want to explicitly specify a
radius value.
Snap Point options are available on the Selection Bar.
Every variable radius point you add displays drag and point handles.
Handles for six variable radius points (1)
Variable radius points are identified as V Radius 1, V Radius 2, and so on, and appear as such
in the dialog box and dynamic input boxes.
5. Specify a new radius value for a variable radius point using one of the following methods:
o In the graphics window, drag the handle of the variable radius point, or select the variable
radius point and type a new value in its dynamic input box.
o In the dialog box, select the variable radius point in the list box and type a new value in
the V Radius box.
New radii assigned to the variable radius points
6. (Optional) Move or redefine the location of a variable radius point using one of the following
methods:
o Drag the variable radius point along the edge. Snap Point options are available on the
Selection Bar.
o When defining variable radius points, choose a Location option best suited to your
purpose, either %Arc Length, Arc Length, or Through Point. (You can also right-click a
variable radius point to choose the same options.) You can then type a value for the arc
length or %arc length, or specify a through point.
Note that if you manually move the point location by changing the value for % Arc Length, it
loses its associativity.
7.
8. Adjusted variable radius points
9. Click OK or Apply to create the blend feature with variable radius points.
Variable radius edge blend
Add setback points to an edge blend corner
is active.
Completed edge sets
3. In the dialog box, in the Corner Setack group, choose Select End Point .
4. Select a vertex point of a blend corner that has at least three edges.
A corner setback with default values is displayed at the vertex, and is aligned along the three
edges.
Default corner setback handles appear after corner vertex point is selected (right)
The three setbacks are labeled as Point 1 Setback 1, Point 1 Setback 2, and Point 1 Setback 3. If
you specify a second setback point, it is labeled Point 2 Setback 1, Point 2 Setback 2, and
Point 2 Setback 3.
Setback drag handles (1) controlling respective setback edges (2)
5. Specify a setback distance for each setback using one of these methods:
o In the dialog box, type distance values for each setback using the Point / Setback box
and list box.
o In the graphics window, type distance values for each setback in the dynamic input boxes
or drag individual setback handles to the desired distance from the vertex.
New setback distances change the shape of the corner

For this example, a second setback was added to the opposite corner of the edge using the same
distance parameters.
6. (Optional) To delete a setback:

o Right-click one of the handles in a setback and choose Remove.
o Select the setback in the dialog list box and click Remove .
7. Click OK or Apply to create the blend feature with setback corners.
Edge blend with setback corners
Add stop short points to an edge blend
is active.
Completed edge sets
3. In the dialog box, in the Stop Short of Corner group, ensure that the Stopping Location option
is set to At Distance.
4. Choose Select End Point and select an endpoint in an edge set where you want to stop
the blend.
Four stop short endpoints selected (1)
Stop short points are identified as Stopshort 1, Stopshort 2, Stopshort 3, and so on,
and appear as such in the dialog box and the dynamic input boxes.
5. Move (or redefine) the location of a stop short point using one of the following methods:
o Drag the stop short point along the edge.
o Choose a Location option best suited to your purpose, either %Arc Length, Arc
Length, or Through Point. (You can also right-click a stop short point handle and
choose the same options.) You can then type or drag a value for the arc length or %arc
length, or specify a through point.
Result of moving the stop short points
6. Click OK or Apply to create the edge blend with stop short points.
Face Blend overview
Use this command to create complex blend faces tangent to two sets of input faces, with options to
trim and attach the blended faces. Face Blend lets you control the orientation of the cross-sections using
one of two types:
Rolling Ball creates a face blend as if it were subtended by a ball rolling in constant contact with
two sets of input faces. The plane of the blend cross section is defined by the two contact points
and the center of the ball.
Swept Section sweeps a cross section along a spine curve. The plane of the blend cross section
is always normal to the spine curve.
Additional options let you force the blend to pass through edges belonging to either face set, define
associative trimming planes for the blend, and constrain the blend to other curves, edges, or faces. You
can create a face blend between the faces of solid and/or sheet bodies. The faces can be nonadjacent
and/or part of a different sheet body.
Original Faces and Rolling Ball Face Blend (Green)

Create a Rolling Ball Face Blend
This example shows you how to create a rolling ball Face Blend from the following sheet bodies, and trim
the sheets and blend.
Input sheet bodies and Rolling Ball Blend with Constant Radius
1. On the Feature Operations toolbar, click Face Blend, or select InsertDetail
FeatureFace Blend.
2. In the Face Blend dialog box, select Rolling Ball from the Type list, and keep the default
Circular blend cross section shape.
3. Click the Preview check box to see a preview before applying the blend to your model. Note that
NX creates a preview only after you specify sufficient parameters.
4. Select the first set of faces or bodies. Selection Intent rules apply during object selection. If you
need to reverse the set's normal, double-click the normal arrow in the graphics window or click
Reverse Direction in the dialog box.
1. Double-click the normal arrow to reverse its

direction toward the center of the blend.
5.
6. Click the middle mouse button to complete Face Chain 1 and select the second set of faces or
bodies. Selection Intent rules apply during object selection. If you need to reverse the set's
normal, double-click the cone head in the graphics window.
2. Blend preview
3. Radius input box.
7.
8. Specify appropriate Radius, Trim and Sew, and other options for your blend. This example uses
a radius of 0.75 and the default Trim and Sew options.
9. Click OK or Apply to create the blend. If the blend fails, an error message will identify the cause,
and in some cases, a large asterisk may show the location of the error.
Note that NX:

o Trims the input faces to the blend
o Trims the blend to the input faces
o Sews the two faces and blend
together
10. Suppose you decide to switch the blend radius from constant to Law Controlled. To modify an
existing blend, right-click the blend and choose Edit with Rollback.
11. In the Face Blend dialog box, select Law Controlled from the Radius Method list.
12. From the Law Type list, choose Linear.
13. Under Blend Cross Section, click Select Spine Curve and , and in the graphics
window, select a spine curve.
14. Specify Start and End Values (this example uses 1.25 and 0.5) and click OK to create the blend
with the new radius.
Face Blend with Law Controlled Radius

Create a Swept Section Face Blend
This example shows you how to create a swept section face blend from the part below, and define the
radius of the section using a Law Control.
Input solid and Swept Section Blend with Law Controlled Radius
1. On the Feature Operations toolbar, click Face Blend , or select InsertDetail
FeatureFace Blend.
2. In the Face Blend dialog box, select Swept Section from the Type list, choose Swept Section
and keep the default Circular blend cross section shape.
4. In the Settings group, clear the Terminate at Sharp Edge check box. This allows the blend to
cross the crease in the first face chain.
5. Select the first set of faces or bodies. Selection Intent rules apply during object selection. If you
need to reverse the set's normal, double-click the conehead in the graphics window or click
1. Double-click the conehead to reverse the

normal direction away from the face.
6.
normal, double-click the conehead in the graphics window.
8. For Swept Section blends, you must select a spine curve. Under Blend Cross Sections, click
Select Spine Curve and select the spine curve.
2. Spine curve for a Law Controlled blend.

The conehead shows the direction of the
line, beginning from the line's start point.
9.
10. In the Face Blend dialog box, select Law Controlled from the Radius Method list.
11. From the Law Type list, select Linear.
12. Specify Start and End values for the Law Control. This example uses 3.25 and 5.00, and the
default Trim and Sew Options. NX previews the swept blend.
Preview of the Blend
13. Click OK or Apply to create the blend. If the blend fails, an error message identifies the cause,
Final Swept Blend

Create a Face Blend with tangent curves
This example shows you how to create a face blend that is tangent to the face 1 along the curve at 1
below, and tangent to the face at 2.
1. On the Feature Operations toolbar, click Face Blend , or select InsertDetail
FeatureFace Blend.
2. In the Face Blend dialog box, choose Rolling Ball from the Type list, and keep the default
Circular blend cross section shape
4. Click the first set of faces or bodies. Selection Intent rules apply during object selection. If you
need to reverse the set's normal, double-click the cone head in the graphics window or click
normal, double-click the cone head in the graphics window.
6. Specify appropriate Radius, Trim and Sew, and other options for your blend.
7. Click Select Tangent Curve and select the curve on surface. NX previews the face blend.
8. Choose OK or Apply to create the blend. If the blend fails, an error message identifies the cause,
Soft Blend
Soft blends let you create blends whose cross sectional shape is not circular, which can help you
avoid the hard "mechanical" appearance sometimes associated with circular blends. This function gives
you more control over the cross sectional shape, and allows you to create designs that are more
aesthetically pleasing than other types of blends. Adjusting the shapes of blends may let you produce
designs with lower weights, or better stress resistance properties.
For simple instructions to use this option see the Soft Blend Basic Procedure.
For field descriptions, see Dialog Options.
Several of the options on the Soft Blend dialog are the same as the corresponding options on the Face
Blend dialog, and the documentation may refer to that section.
The figure below shows the geometry that is defined to create a soft blend, and the resulting soft blend
feature.
Bridge
Bridge lets you create a sheet body that joins two faces. You can specify either tangent or curvature
continuity between the bridge and defining faces. Optional side faces or strings (up to two, in any
combination), or the drag option, can be used to control the shape of the bridge sheet body.
For simple instructions on using this option see the Basic Bridge Procedure.
Bridge Dialog Options
Selection
Steps Primary Faces
Lets you select the two primary faces that will be joined by the bridge feature. This is a
required step.
Side Faces
Lets you select one or two side faces (optional).
First Side String
Second Side String
Both the First and Second Side String selection steps are optional, and let you select one or
two strings (curves or edges) to guide the shape of the bridge
Selecting Faces
You should select each face near the edge along which you wish the new bridge to be
created, and near the end of the edge that determines the correct direction of the bridge face.
The order of selection is not important. The system highlights the face and displays an
arrowhead along the selected edge to indicate the direction of the bridge face along that edge.
If any of the primary or side faces are trimmed, you cannot select only one side object (face or
string). If you want to use side objects, you must select two of them. Otherwise, this error
message appears:
Cannot bridge trimmed surface with one side object
Continuity Lets you specify tangent (Tangent) or curvature (Curvature) continuity between the selected
type faces and the bridge face.
Spherical Corner Overview
You can create a spherical corner from three walls of one or more faces each. The spherical corner
consists of a single face
Spherical Corner
To create a spherical corner you only need to select faces for three walls that form a corner and
specify a radius. The walls do not actually have to come in contact with one another. The system
previews the spherical corner for you, at which time you can experiment by reversing the wall
directions, changing the radius, and specifying new wall faces.
This option creates a SPHERICAL_CORNER feature.

Creating Chamfers
1. Click InsertDetail FeaturesChamfer.
2. In the Chamfer dialog box, use Select Edge to select one or more edges to
chamfer. A preview of the chamfer is displayed.
3. In the Offsets group, select a Cross Section option:
o Symmetric
o Asymmetric
o Offset and Angle
You can also right-click the offset handle in the graphics window to select the option.
4. Specify the chamfer offset parameters:

o If you selected Symmetric, type a distance value in the Distance box (or drag the first
offset handle, or type a value in the dynamic input box).
Chamfer preview, Symmetric Cross Section
o If you selected Asymmetric, type distance values in the Distance 1 and Distance 2
boxes (or drag the offset handles or type values in their dynamic input boxes).
Chamfer preview, Asymmetric cross section
o If you selected Offset and Angle, type a distance value in the Distance box and an
angle value in the Angle box (or drag the offset and angle handles or type the values in
their dynamic input boxes).
Chamfer preview, Offset and Angle cross section
5. (Optional) Click Reverse Direction in the Offsets group to flip the order of offsets from
one side of the selected edges to the other.
Reverse Direction is not available when the Cross Section is Symmetric.
6. (Optional) Set or change the Offset Method in the Settings group (see Chamfer options for
details). You may want to do this if the body shape is complicated, as when the edge angle has a
lot of variation.
Offset Method is not available when the Cross Section is Offset and Angle.
7. Click OK or Apply to create the chamfer.
Draft options
Type
From Use this type if the draft operation requires that a planar cross section through the part be
Plane maintained throughout the face rotation.
Draft faces rotate around section defined by a datum plane
From Use this type if the draft operation requires that an edge of the target face be maintained
Edges throughout the face rotation. This is the only draft type that can have varying draft angles
within a face.
Draft faces rotate from two stationary edges
Tangent Use this type if the draft operation requires that the faces to be drafted remain tangent to
to Faces adjacent faces after the draft operation.
Draft moves side faces to maintain tangency with the top
To Use this type if the draft operation requires that a planar cross section through the part be
Parting maintained throughout the face rotation, and that a ledge be created as necessary at parting
Edges edges.
Draft creates a ledge at parting edge, defined by a datum plane
Draft Body overview
Use the Draft Body command to draft a model on both sides of a parting surface or datum plane.
You can also use the command to optionally match the drafted faces at the parting object. Note that the
edge matching constraint requires that some faces violate the specified draft angle.
With the exception of matching faces at the parting object, Draft and Draft Body produce the same
results.
The examples below show some common applications of the Draft Body Command.
Basic Body Drafts

Unmatched body draft (left) and matched body
draft (right). Material is added to the body, but no
material is removed from the face.
Undercut Body Draft
An undercut taper (green) is single-sided and

fills the undercut region with material
Highest Point Body Draft
Use this option to specify that the draft begin at

the highest reference point for each face. When
the pad at the front of the part becomes the
highest point, NX automatically recreates the
draft from that point.
Create an undercut Draft Body
1. On the Feature Operation toolbar, click Draft Body or choose InsertDetail Feature
Body Draft.
2. Choose either the From Edges or the Faces to Draft method. This example uses the Faces to
Draft method.
Undercut body drafts do not require a parting edge.

3. Under Draw Direction, specify the direction in which the draft is to be drawn. This example uses
the Vector Constructor and the Two Point method to define a vector on the surface with the
boss feature.
Draw direction vector
4. Under the Faces to Draft group, specify the faces you want to draft.
Faces to draft
5. Specify a draft angle. This example uses 6 degrees.

6. Click Apply or OK to create the undercut draft.
Undercut draft
Surface By 4 Points
Surface By 4 Points lets you create a degree 1X1 surface by simply specifying four corners of a
quadrangle on the screen or on the scan data. This is useful for creating base surfaces that support the
surface based (control point edit methodology) Class-A workflow. You can easily modify such a surface by
increasing the degree and patch into a more complex surface with the desired shape.
You must follow several point specifying conditions:
No three selected points can be collinear.

No two selected points can be the same or at the very same location in space.
You must specify four points to create the surface. Specifying three or fewer points generates an
error message.
The order for specifying the surface points on the screen determines the shape of the surface created. In
the example below, the selection sequence is indicated by the numbers.
This Selection Sequence Results in a Bow-Shaped Surface
Swoop:
Pick the first corner point and opposite diagonal corner point to create a flat surface , later apply the
suitable bending ,stretch ,skew and twisting operations dynamically as follows and click on the ok button.
Sheets From Curves
This option lets you create bodies through selected curves.
Note Many illustrations in this section use solid fill shading to represent wire frame parts. The fill often
hides portions of curves that would be visible in a wireframe model. The purpose is to represent
the concepts with clearly recognizable figures at the loss of some technical viewing accuracy.
Local Settings
When you choose Sheets From Curves, the following options appear:
Cycle By Processes all selectable curves one layer at a time. To speed up the processing, you may wish
Layer to turn this option ON. This causes the system to create bodies by processing all selectable
curves one layer at a time. All the curves defining a body must be on a single layer.
Note Using the Cycle By Layer option can significantly increase processing performance. This
option also significantly reduces the use of virtual memory. If you receive the message:
Virtual Memory Exhausted, you may want to spread the wireframe geometry over
several layers. But be sure to place all defining curves for a body on a single layer.
Warnings Causes the system to stop processing and to display warning messages after generating
bodies, if there are any warnings. You are warned about nonclosed planar loops of curves,
and non planar boundaries. If you select OFF, you are not warned, and processing does not
stop.
Basic Procedure
To convert curves to sheets, you must:
1. Set the Cycle By Layer toggle switch as desired.
2. Set the Warnings toggle switch as desired.
3. Choose OK.
4. Choose the curves you wish to sheet using the Class Selection Tool.
5. Choose OK.
The message Creating Bodies appears during this stage of processing. The system then uses all selected
curves to generate bounded planes, cylinders, extruded bodies, and truncated cones.
Tips and Techniques

You can generate bodies using any planar curve. Sheets From Curves creates the following bodies:
Bounded planes - by forming planar closed loops (using the ends of curves)
Note Single planar loops must be periodic.
Cylinders - by pairing circles and ellipses with coaxial centers.
Cones - by pairing arcs with coaxial centers.
Extruded bodies - by pairing conics and planar splines. They must be on parallel planes and one
must project onto the other (via a translation perpendicular to the planes of the curves).
You can create bodies on one plane using:
Loops of objects - These form a bounded plane. For example, the adjoining lines on any face of
a simple rectangle.
You can create bodies between two parallel planes using:
Coaxial arcs - For example, two circles with the same radius become a cylinder, and two circles
having different radii become a cone. In both cases, they share the same axis and are parallel.
Identical splines, parabolas, ellipses, hyperbolas - These form an extruded body; for example,
the thickness of the sole of a shoe.
Note Two coaxial conics do not always have to lie on parallel planes. An ellipse and arc on
nonparallel planes can match and form a body if they are both segments of the same cylinder.
These objects appear similar when viewed along their common axis. See the figure below.
Sheets From Curves does not create spherical sections. Before using this option, you must create sheets
at all sections of spheres. This option also does not create typical ruled sheets.
Sheets From Curves Design Considerations
Sheets From Curves usually develops the sheets you desire. However, you will be successful if you follow
certain design requirements:
Use Guiding Lines when required.
Follow the Rules for Bounded Planes.
Use separate layers for each assembly component.

Guiding Lines
Use guiding lines in ambiguous situations - You must connect defining arcs/ellipses if there are more than
two, and they are coaxial and geometrically similar (that is, the same size in degrees but not necessarily
in arc length). Otherwise the processor cannot determine which object to connect. See the figure below.
You must use arcs (not ellipses) to generate cones. The system always generates truncated (nonpointed)
cones.
It is always safest to create guiding lines using arc endpoints. But you can connect any points on two
circles if the guiding lines do not touch. If they do touch, you must use arc endpoints. See the figure
below.
"Soft Edge" Recognition - It is not necessary to create guiding lines to form a bounded plane if there are
only two identical coaxial arcs limiting the plane. See the figure below.
Guiding Line Rules

When in doubt - use a guiding line.
In the figure below, area A shows that two coaxial arcs of the same size do not require guiding lines. The
processor is able to match the partial arcs and the full arcs without additional help.
However, in area B you must indicate whether the circles should form cones or cylinders.
Area C requires you to match the 4 lower arcs with 4 upper arcs. Because there are more than 2 similar
coaxial arcs you must connect the arc endpoints of the matched arcs. That requires eight guiding lines.
Bounded Plane Rules

Bounded plane object members must form a single unambiguous closed loop. A closed loop does
not split and has no "dangling" object. Therefore the loop is reliably chainable.
In the example shown in the figure below, the boundary members of both front faces do not chain
because the upper line segment extends outside of each boundary.
Normally the solution is to create two segments. However, in this particular example, the following
requirement further prevents sheet generation.
Only two coplanar objects can share an endpoint. This option cannot reliably create a body if a boundary
member object shares a common endpoint with more than one other object on that plane.
In the figure below, even though you subdivide the dangling line, you still may not succeed in creating bodies
the front faces. This is because each face has more than 2 coplanar objects that meet at a vertex.
Notice that lines 1, 2, and 3, in the figure below, are all on the same plane. They also share a common
endpoint. No. 1 effectively becomes a dangling line and that face is not turned into a sheet.
Lines 1, 2, and 4 present the same problem in another plane.
You must manually create sheets for these faces.
Bounded planes must not contain more than two colinear line segments. You cannot create a sheet if
three or more sequential lines are colinear. In the figure below, the front slope is moved towards the
center of its front face. The processor cannot create a bounded plane for the top sheet using the three
colinear lines.
You can generate a trimmed bounded plane if the interior objects do not touch or cross the boundary.
Assemblies
Place multiple assembly components on separate layers. They often have curves that cross or touch. The
figure below shows the bottom component trimmed by the base of the top component. The base of the
top component is not turned into a sheet either.
Multiple components on a single layer can cause more than 2 curves on the same plane to share a
common endpoint. Therefore, the bodies might not be properly created, or created at all. See the figure
below.
Invalid Sheets
Trimmed Cylinders - You cannot generate a trimmed cylinder. The interior curves are either ignored or
converted as usual.
Not all sheets are generated, such as unknown sheet types and sections of spheres. See the figure
below.
Bounded Plane
This option lets you generate a planar sheet by utilizing strings of end-to-end curves for the sheet
boundaries. The strings selected must be coplanar and form a closed shape, and you must be able to
chain them.
To create a bounded plane you must establish the boundary, and if necessary, define any internal
boundaries (holes).
A bounding string can consist of single or multiple objects. Each object can be either a curve, solid
edge or a solid face.
To specify the planar boundary, select a closed string of end-to-end curves and/or solid edges. Objects in
each section string can be selected in an arbitrary order - the system sorts the selected objects.
The bounded plane can be created with or without holes. A hole in a bounded plane is defined as an
internal boundary where the sheet is not created. After the outer boundary is selected, you can define
holes by continuing the selection of objects and selecting complete internal boundaries (holes) one at a
time. The system calculates where the boundaries start and end.
Transition Feature - Overview
The Transition function lets you create a feature at the intersection of two or more sectional shapes.
You can impose either a tangent or curvature condition on the sections. You can have a different number
of elements for the sections. If you do not use a surface to impose match conditions on a section, a
tangent condition is imposed that is normal to the plane of the input section.
The Transition feature is parametric and associative to any geometry used in its creation.
Three Sections (Numbered) Form a Transition Feature
Through Points and From Poles
The Through Points and From Poles free form features options use the same interactive creation
techniques, so they are described together in this section.
Through Points - Lets you define a rectangular array of points through which the body will pass. The
body interpolates each specified point. Using this option, you have very good control over the body
in the sense that it always passes through the points that you specify.
From Poles - Lets you specify points as poles (vertices) of a control net which defines the shape of
the sheet. Using poles gives you much better control of the overall shape and character of the body.
Using this option also gives you a much better chance of avoiding unwanted undulations (reversals of
curvature) in the sheet.
The options on the Through Points and From Poles dialogs are the same.
See the basic Procedure for creating Through Points and From Poles free form features.
Through Points and From Poles Dialog Options
Patch Type Lets you create a body containing a single patch or multiple patches.
Closed Lets you select a method for closing a multiple patch sheet body.
Along
Row Lets you specify the row degree (1 to 24) for a multiple patch. For a single patch, the system
Degree determines the row degree from the row with the highest number of points.
Column Lets you specify the column degree for a multiple patch (up to one less than the number of
Degree specified rows). For a single patch, the system sets this to one less than the number of
specified rows.
Points Lets you define the points by choosing a file that contains them.
From File
Ribbon Builder - Procedure
1. Use the Profile to Offset selection step to select curve/edge(s) representing the shape of the
ribbon sheet you wish to create.
2. Use the Offset View selection step to specify a vector defining a normal to the view in which the
profile will be offset.
3. Supply the Offset Distance for the profile.
4. Supply the Angle you wish the ribbon sheet to be rotated in the normal direction.
5. Supply the Minimum Radius you wish the offset profile to have.
6. Click OK or Apply to create the RIBBON_SHEET feature.
Create a Through Points & From Poles surface

To create a body using Through Points or From Poles, you must:
1. Choose a Patch Type.
2. For multiple patch, choose a Closed Along method for closing the sheet body.
3. For multiple patch, enter the degrees for rows and columns. You do not have to specify degrees
for single patch.
4. Specify rows of points or poles to be used to create the body, using either the Point
Specification Method dialog or by using specifying a file containing the point definitions.
Patch Type
Single creates a body consisting of only one patch.
Multiple creates a body consisting of a rectangular array of single patches.
Closing the Patch

Closed Along lets you choose a method for closing a multiple patch sheet body using the following
options:
Neither The sheet body begins and ends with the specified points.
Rows The first column of points/poles becomes the last.
Columns The first row of points/poles becomes the last.
Both Closes the body in both directions (rows and columns).
If you choose to close the body in both directions or you close the body in one direction and the other
direction the ends are planar, a solid body is created.
Degrees for Single Patch Bodies
For a single patch body, the system determines both the row and column degrees for you, depending on
the points/poles and rows that you specify.
The Row Degree (U direction) comes from the row with the highest number of points.
The Column Degree (V direction) is equal to one less than the number of rows you specify.
Note The minimum number of rows or points per row is two (minimum degree of one) and the maximum
number of rows or points per row is 25 (maximum degree of 24 + 1).
The sheet shown in the figure below has 4 rows of points, so its column degree (V degree) is equal to 3
(=4-1). The largest number of points in any row is 6, so the rows degree (U degree) is equal to 5 (=6-1).
Degrees for Multiple Patch Bodies

For a multiple patch body, you must specify degrees for the rows and columns.
The Row Degree can be any number from 1 to 24. The default is 3.
The Column Degree can be set to any number from one to one less than the number of rows you
specified. The default is 3.
Note The minimum number of rows or points per row is two (minimum degree of one) and the maximum
number of rows or points per row is 25 (maximum degree of 24).
For example in the figure below, the row degree can be set to any number from 1 to 4. The column
degree is equal to 3.
Points/Poles
Once you have specified the degree and set the Patch Type and Closed Along parameter values, you
must specify the points in one of the following ways:
Choose OK, then specify the rows of points using the Ordered Point Constructor, or the rows of
poles using the Point Constructor.
Choose Points From File and specify the name of the file containing the point definitions. It
must be a Rows of Points type file.
If you use the first method, when you have specified two or more rows of points (enough to satisfy the
degree), you are prompted with two options:
All Points Specified Creates the body and returns you to the dialog.
Specify Another Row Lets you specify another row of points for the body you are creating.
Ribbon builder
Ribbon builder is used to extend the surface and bend it to some specified angle as fallows
Mid surface
The Midsurface function is used mainly from the Advanced Simulaton application, but it is available
here in Modeling as well. Advanced Simulation's model idealization uses a simplified model whose
behavior can be utilized to model the behavior of a more complicated system. This is performed using the
Midsurface feature.
The model idealization process allows you to create a midsurface feature that resides in a single target
solid. There can only be one midsurface feature in a target solid.
For a description of how to use this option, please see the discussion for Midsurface in the Advanced
Simulation Help.
After clicking auto matically create face pairs, keep the source solid body transparent by using ctrl+j to
see the surface extracted in the middle of the part.
.
Ruled Surface Overview
Ruled Surface creates a ruled body (sheet or solid) through two curve outlines. The curve
outlines are referred to as section strings. A section string can consist of a single object or multiple
objects, and each object can be one of the following: a curve, a solid edge, or a solid face. You can also
select a point or an endpoint of a curve as the first of the two section strings. Point selection for section
strings is only available if the alignment is set to Parameter or Arclength. This is because the selected
point string cannot be reparameterized by the other alignment options. Use Selection Intent to aid object
selection and to set selection rules.
A circle and rectangle before mesh
After Creating the Ruled Body
Through Curves
This command creates a sheet or solid body through a set of up to 150 section strings. A section
string can consist of a single object or multiple objects, and each object can be a curve, a solid edge, or a
solid face. Through Curves is similar to a Ruled Surface, except that you can specify more than two
section strings. You can also:
Constrain the new surface to be G0, G1, or G2 continuous with tangent surfaces.
Control the shape of the surface by aligning it to the section strings in a variety of ways.
Specify single or multiple output patches.
Make the new surface normal to the end sections.

Through Curves section strings (top) and resulting solid body (bottom)
Through Curve Mesh
This command creates a body from sets of primary and cross strings. Strings in each set must be
roughly parallel to each other and non-intersecting. Primary strings must be roughly perpendicular to
crossing strings. You can also:
Constrain the new surface to be G0, G1, or G2 continuous with tangent surfaces.
Control cross string parameterization with a spine string.
Locate the surface near the primary or cross strings, or at an average between the two sets.
Choose Insert Mesh Surface Through Curve Mesh.
Create a basic Through Curve Mesh surface

This example shows you how to create a surface from a curve mesh like this.
Basic Through Curve Mesh surface
1. Choose InsertMesh SurfaceThough Curve Mesh. The Select Curve or Point option is
active.
2. Select the brown curve at the top as the first primary string and click the middle mouse button.
You must select the primary and cross strings in consecutive order, moving from one side of
the body to the other.
3. In this example, the last primary section is a point at the lower end of the model. Under Primary
Curves, click Point Constructor , select the end point of any blue curve, and click the
middle mouse button.
Point selected as Last Primary string
4. Click the middle mouse button again to complete primary string selection.
5. To define Cross Curves, select each blue curve at its left end and click the middle mouse button after
each selection. Click the middle mouse button again to complete cross curve selection.
All Cross strings selected
6. In the List box , remove or reorder strings as necessary. You can also right-click the ball handle
on a string to remove it from the list.
Right-click a string handle to remove the string (1)
7. You can also select a string handle and then right click to modify Selection Intent options (Single
Curves, Connected Curves, and so on.).
8. This example uses the default Emphasis and Construction settings for Output Surface
Options. Click OK or Apply to create the surface.
Click a string handle to remove the string (1)
The type of body (solid or sheet) depends on the Body Type modeling preference.
9. To refine surface quality, you can optionally select Rebuild options for both the primary and cross
strings.
N-Sided Surface - Overview
This option lets you build a surface with an unrestricted number of curves or edges that form a simple,
open or closed loop, and assign continuity to outside faces. You can remove holes in surfaces that
are not four-sided. Shape control options are available to refine sharpness at center point, while
maintaining continuity constraints.
This option creates an NSIDED_SURFACE feature
For Trimmed Single Sheet:
1. Select the Trimmed Single Sheet Type.
2. Use the Boundary Curves selection step to select a section profile. The profile can consist of
edges or curves, and can be open or form a closed loop. Use the Filter if necessary to aid
object selection.
3. Use the UV Orientation - Area method to quickly create a surface. Select Trim to Boundary to
trim the surface to the boundary curves, and Match Boundary Face to match the tangency of
the new surface to the faces of the boundary curves.
(Optional) The UV Orientation - Area method also lets you define a base surface boundary
outside the selected closed loop profile by clicking two diagonal points to create a rectangular
region that defines the new surface area. Use the Snap Point tool if necessary. (See Non-
Smooth Loops under Usage Tips for an example using this method.)
4. Click Apply to create the surface.
5. (Optional) Choose a different UV Orientation method, either UV Orientation - Spine or UV

Orientation - Vector, and specify a spine or vector to define the U/V orientation for the surface.
c. Use the Boundary Faces selection step to select faces to represent a constraining
boundary.
d. Select Trim to Boundary if you want the surface trimmed to the boundary curves or
edges.
e. Click Apply.
If you used Boundary Faces to specify faces on which to base tangency, the
new surface is created.
If you did not use Boundary Faces, clicking Apply opens the Shape Control dialog
box, where you can adjust the center flatness with the Center Flat option. Once you
are satisfied with the flatness, click Apply to create the surface.
For Multiple Triangular Patches:
1. Select the Mulitple Triangular Patches Type.
2. Use the Boundary Curves selection step to select a profile forming a closed loop. The profile
can consist of edges or curves. Use the Filter if necessary to aid object selection.
3. (Optional) Use the Boundary Faces selection step to select faces to represent a constraining
boundary.
4. (Optional) Select Merge Faces if Possible if you want the software to treat tangent-continuous
portions of the loop as single curves, and build one face for each tangent-continuous section.
5. Click Apply to create a temporary surface and open the Shape Control dialog box.
6. In the Shape Control dialog box you can make dynamic changes to the surface:
o Use Match Continuity to assign a continuity constraint.

o Use Center Control to change the position of the center point and tilt its plane using N-
Sided Surface - Shape Control X, Y, Z sliders.
o Change the flatness of the surface around the center point using the Center Flat slider.
o Specify flow direction using the Flow Direction on Outside Walls options.
7. Once you are satisfied with the temporary surface, click OK or Apply to create the n-sided
surface.
.
Examples of N-Sided surfaces applied to a void in a group of faces (1)

Swept
This command creates a solid body or a sheet by sweeping one or more section strings along one,
two, or three guide strings. You can:
Control the shape of the swept body by aligning section strings along the guide(s) in a variety of
ways.
Control the orientation of sections as they sweep along the guide(s).
Scale the swept body.
Control section parameterization using a spine string.
This example sweeps a single section string (blue) along one guide string (green), and uses another
string (red) to scale the sweep from back to front.
Swept feature, scaled using another string
Swept with one or two guides
Use a single guide string when you want to specify orientation and/or scaling of the section(s) as they
sweep along the guide. Two guide strings fully specify the scale and orientation of the swept body. A
second guide always scales the body, either laterally or uniformly. This example shows you how to create
one- and two-guide bodies from the following curves:
Section string (blue)
Two guide strings (green)
Spine string (red)
1. On the Surface toolbar, click Swept , or choose InsertSweepSwept.
2. Click the blue string near either end, and then click the middle mouse button to complete section
string selection.
3. Click the upper green string near either end, and click the middle mouse button to complete guide
string selection.
4. To create the swept body, click OK.
5. Rightclick the swept body and select Edit with Rollback. When you specify a single guide
string, you can refine the shape of the body using orientation and scaling options. For example,
from the Scaling list, select Blending Function.
6. Retain the default Start value, specify 1.5 as the End value, and click OK.
7. Next, modify the swept body to use two guide strings.
o Rightclick the swept body and select Edit with Rollback.
o In the Guides group, click Add New Set
. o Click the lower green curve.
Notice that the Orientation methods are longer available, and that the Scaling Method
options are now Uniform and Lateral.
o From the Scaling list, select Lateral.
8. Switch to a top view of the part. Notice that the surface isoparametric lines are uneven.
9. You can use a spine curve to control the orientation of the section strings and avoid distortions
caused by uneven distribution of the parameters on the guides. Rightclick the swept body and
select Edit with Rollback.
10. In the Spine group, click Select Curve , and then click the red curve.
11. Click OK to complete the part. Notice that NX has now spaced the isoparametric lines evenly
along the body.
Swept with three guides
When you specify three guides, the first and second guides fully define the orientation and scaling of the
body, and the third guide shears the body on an independent axis. This example builds a swept feature
with two guides, and then adds a third guide so that you can see the affect.
Section guide (blue)
First two guide curves (red)
Third guide (green)
1. On the Surface toolbar, click Swept , or choose InsertSweepSwept.
2. Click the blue string near either end, and then click the middle mouse button to complete section
string selection.
3. Click each green string near the same end, and click the middle mouse button after each
selection.
4. Click the middle mouse button again to complete guide string selection.
5. To create the swept body, click OK.
6. Rightclick the swept body and select Edit with Rollback.
7. In the Guides group, click Add New Set .
8. Click the green guide string near the same end you selected the original guides.
9. Click OK to complete the updated swept feature.
Variational Sweep
Use this command to create a solid or sheet body feature that sweeps a primary cross section, and
optional secondary sections, variably along a path. You can create multiple bodies in one feature from a
single primary cross section.
The primary cross section is a sketch you create with the Sketch on Path option in the Sketcher. The
path you select for the sketch defines the origin of the sketch on path. You can add optional rails to serve
as guides for the master cross section as it sweeps along the path using the Sketcher Intersection Point
command. Guide rails can be curves or edges.
You can define some or all of the geometry of the sketch on path to act as the primary cross section for
the sweep. During the sweep, the primary cross section need not remain constant; it can change its
geometry as a function of the path location and the internal sketch constraints. A primary cross section
constrained to be coincident to an intersection point should result in a surface that has a boundary
coincident with the corresponding rail.
The sweep will follow the entire path as long as participating rails do not deviate markedly. If a rail
deviates too much, the system can determine the path length by the last available intersection between
the rail and the path. The system can extend the rails as needed.
Variational Sweep Using 6 Guide Rails
= Primary cross section (orange)
= 6 Optional guide rails (dark blue)
= 6 Intersection Points where the master cross section intersects guide rails (created with the
Sketcher Intersect Point command)
= Sweep extends past the guide rails
You can sweep faces that are coincident, tangent, or normal to other curves and faces. Boolean
operations such as Unite, Subtract, Intersect, and Sew are available.
Controlling the Sweep With Constraints

You can control the sweep by adding or removing constraints from the master cross section sketch. You
can generate a variational sweep using a partially or fully constrained master cross section. A simple
variational sweep may not need any constraints at all. However, UGS strongly recommends that the
sketch be fully constrained.
The next figure shows a sketch on path primary cross section intersecting two face edges, which will be
used for guide rails.
Primary cross section
Intersection (Vertex) points and tangent and horizontal constraints (2x)
Guide rails on face edges
The next figure shows the variable sweep you can get with this combination of cross section, face edges
and contstraints.
In the next figure, the shape of a variational sweep is altered by
changing the constraints in the primary cross section.
Primary cross section.
2 Guide rails.
Adding constraints to different lines in the primary cross section

(highlighted) produces different results for the sweep.
Create a Variational Sweep with limits and secondary sections
You can use the Limits and Secondary Sections options to tailor the extent and shape of a Variational
Sweep. This example shows you how to build and customize a basic sweep.
1. On the Features toolbar, click Variational Sweep , or choose Insert
Sweep Variational Sweep.
2. Click Sketch Section to open the Sketcher and create a new sketch on path that is internal
to the variational sweep feature.
3. In the Variational Sweep dialog box, select the On Path from the Type list and click the edge of
the sheet body.
4. Use the Sketcher tools (Profile, Line, Arc, and so on) to create the primary cross section profile.
5. Constrain the segments according to how you want to control the variational sweep.
6. Press Ctrl+Q to exit Sketcher. NX previews the sweep.

7. To extend the sweep past the start of the sheet body, specify a negative value in the Start Limit
dynamic input box. This example extends the sweep by 20%.
8. To create a secondary section, click Add New Set under Secondary Sections in the
dialog box. Type 60 in the % Arc Length box.
9. Click Add New Set again and create a secondary section at the end of the sweep.
10. Click an appropriate dimension on the secondary section. In the dynamic input box, click
to launch the Formula Editor.
11. Edit the two dimensions that control the size of the two sketch lines. This example multiplies each
value by 1.6 to produce the final variational sweep.
Law Extension Basic Procedure
Basic Procedure to Create a Dynamic Law Extension

To create a dynamic law extension, follow these steps:
1. Open the Law Extension function, Insert Flange Surface Law Extension.
2. Select a curve or edge for the Base Curve String from which the extension is to be
created. Use Selection Intent to aid object selection and to set selection rules.
3. Choose the Reference Method option and the appropriate selection step to define a reference
direction.
o If you set the reference method to Faces, use the Reference Face selection step
to select one or more faces. Selection Intent Selection Intent overview is available.
o If you set the reference method to Vector, use the Reference Vector selection
step to create a temporary vector.
Once you have established a base curve string and a reference face, advance to the Define Law
selection step.
Two handle-sets display at the start and end of the base string, and direction coneheads show
the 0 and 90 degrees axes of the defined reference direction (to aid in assigning values for the
angle).
Start Handle-Set (1), Reference Direction Coneheads (2), End Handle-Set (3)
4. In the Law Specification Method group, click the Dynamic button.
o Drag any of the base points, including those for the start and end sets, along the base
curve string to new locations. Snap Point is available
o Click the base curve to add additional base points on the curve near the picked locations.
A new handle-set is displayed at the selected point location.
Snap Point is available.
Selecting any existing base point handles and then clicking on a point on the base curve
will move the selected point to the new location.
The cursor changes to the Point Indicator cursor when placed on the base curve string
A new handle-set appears at the new base point
You can delete any additional base points (and their respective handle-sets);
however, the start and end point locations cannot be deleted.
o Rotate or drag the handles to specify angle or length values for a point. You can also
select a handle and type values into the dynamic input box.
o Use the Spine String selection step to select a spine curve string for
alternate orientations for the law-controlled extension.
o Right click an angle or distance handle to present options to change the transition type.
Transition types vary depending on which handle-sets you have selected.
Selecting the Set Original Reference transition option for an angle handle after it
has been moved will change the orientation of the angle back to zero (the original
reference point).
o To create the law-controlled extension on both sides of the base curve string, select
Extend on Both Sides.
o If you want the end length and angle handles to have the same values as you change
them, select Lock End Length/Angle Handles. You can use this option to create a
periodic flange on a periodic base string
o If you do not want the law-controlled extension faces merged as a single sheet body,
clear the Merge Faces if Possible check box.
o To preview the law-controlled extension, select Show Preview.
6. Click Ok or Apply to create the law-controlled extension.

Basic Procedure to Create a General Law Extension
To create a general law extension, follow these steps:
1. Follow steps 1-3 above.
Once you have established a base curve string and a reference face and you advance to the
next selection step, the system displays direction coneheads to show you the 0 and 90
degrees axes of the reference direction you have defined. This is intended as an aid to help
you assign values for the angle.
Reference Direction Coneheads
2. In the Law Specification Method group, click the General button.
3. Click the Length button, choose a law function for the length, and then enter the
appropriate values.
Both the Length and Angle buttons open the Law Subfunction menus, where methods
are available to specify the distance and angle. See Law Subfunction for details on
using these menus.
4. Click the Angle button, choose a law function for the angle, and then enter or
specify the appropriate values.

o To create the law-controlled extension on both sides of the base curve string, select
Extend on Both Sides.
o If you do not want the law-controlled extension faces merged as a single sheet
body, clear the Merge Faces if Possible check box.
6. Click OK or Apply to create the law-controlled extension.
Creating a Basic Silhouette Flange
Let's suppose you want to create a Silhouette Flange on the sheet below.
Original Surface and Final Silhouette Flange
1. Click (Silhouette Flange) on the Studio Surface toolbar.
2. On the Silhouette Flange dialog, you may want to set certain output parameters. For example:
o Set Output to Blend and Flange.
o Select Show Preview.
o Select Show Pipe.
o Set Base and Pipe and Flange and Pipe to G2 continuity.

o For G2 continuity, use the slider to specify the amount of edge shift.
3. In the graphics window, select an edge or a curve on the target surface.
4. Click MB2 to advance to the Base Faces and select a face on the surface.
5. Click either MB2 or Reference Direction.
6. Set the Reference Direction to Face Normal or Vector. If you select Vector, use the
Inferred Vector drop-down menu to specify a direction.
7. To preview and customize the flange, click either MB2 or Shape Silhouette Flange.
8.When the Silhouette Flange appears on the surface, you can click the Length handle,
the Angle handle, and/or the pipe centerline:
Flange Length Handle (1)

Flange Angle Handle (2)
Additional Set of Centerline Control Point Handles (3)
9. Rightclick either the Length/Angle or Radius handles to 1) customize the flange or

2) Switch between Length/Angle and Radius Dynamic Law options.
10. To create the Silhouette Flange and close the dialog, click OK.
Creating an Absolute Gap Silhouette Flange
Let's suppose you want to add a Silhouette Flange to the part below using the Absolute Gap method.
Input Flange and Absolute Gap Output
1. Click Silhouette Flange on the Studio Surface toolbar.
o Set continuity (G1 or G2) between the Base and Pipe and between Flange and
Pipe. o For G2 Continuity, use the slider to specify the amount of edge shift.

o Select Show Pipe.
3. Click (Absolute Gap) on the Silhouette Flange dialog.
4. In the graphics window, select an existing flange.
5.
6. Click MB2 and select the second surface.
7. To advance to the Reference Direction step, click MB2. Select the Vector option and set the
direction to -YC.
8. In the dialog box, set Radius to 0.25 and Gap to .50.
9. To preview and customize the flange, click MB2 Shape Silhouette Flange.
Absolute Gap Flange (1)
10. (Optional) When the Silhouette Flange appears on the surface, you can either click the Length
and/or Angle handles to input an input box, or drag the handles.
Flange Length Handle (2)

Flange Angle Handle (3)
11. (Optional) Rightclick either the Length or Angle handles to 1) customize the flange or 2) switch
between Length/Angle and Radius Dynamic Law options.
12. To create the Silhouette Flange and close the dialog, click OK.
Creating a Visual Gap Silhouette Flange
Let's suppose you want to create the Silhouette Flange on the right using the Visual Gap method.
1. Click (Silhouette Flange) on the Studio Surface toolbar.
o Set continuity (G1 or G2) between the Base and Pipe and between Flange and
Pipe. o For G2 continuity, use the slider to specify the amount of edge shift.
o Select Show Pipe.
3. Click (Visual Gap) on the Silhouette Flange dialog.
4. In the graphics window, select an existing flange.

5. Click MB2 and select the second surface.
6. To advance to the Reference Direction step, click MB2. Select the Vector option and set the
direction to -YC.
7. In the dialog, set Radius to 0.25 and Gap to .50.
8. To preview and customize the flange, click either MB2 or (Shape Silhouette Flange).
9. To create the Silhouette Flange and close the dialog, click OK twice.
Create a clamp assembly
In this project, you will create this clamp assembly and assign assembly constraints.
Assembly constraints may be assigned using one of two available methods:

Assignment on existing components of an assembly.
Assignment on components as they are added to an assembly.
You will begin by creating an empty assembly part.
Click on file new
Create a new part file using an Assembly template. Use the suitable units. Name the assembly
clamp_assm. Place the file in a directory where you have saved all the part
.
Load the absolute datum coordinate system by using datum coordinate system.
Assembly constraint types
Assembly Description
constraint type
Defines an angle dimension between two objects.
Angle
Welds components together so they move as a rigid body.
Bond Note Bond constraints can only be applied to components, or to

components and assembly-level geometry. Other objects are
not selectable.
Centers one or two objects between a pair of objects, or centers a
pair of objects along another object.
Center
Constrains circular or elliptical edges of two components so the
centers are coincident and the planes of the edges are coplanar.
Concentric
Specifies the minimum 3D distance between two objects.
Distance
Brings together two cylindrical faces with equal radii. This constraint
is useful for locating pins or bolts in holes.
Fit
If the radii later become non-equal, the constraint is invalid.
Fixes a component at its current position.
Fix Note A fix constraint is useful when you need an implied stationary
object. With no fixed node, the entire assembly has freedom to
move.
Defines the direction vectors of two objects as parallel to each other.
Parallel
Defines the direction vectors of two objects as perpendicular to each
other.
Perpendicular
Constrains two components so they touch or align with each other.
Touch Align Note

Touch Align is the most commonly-used constraint.
Bottom-Up Design
Creating a New Part and Adding it to an Assembly

To design components using a bottom-up construction method, first create the new part using
FileNew. Then create the desired geometry using the various Modeling functions. Change the work
part to the
assembly part file and position the new part in the assembly using Add Component from the
Assemblies toolbar, or choose AssembliesComponentsAdd Component.
Checking the Part Before Adding it to the Assembly

To inspect an existing part before adding it to an assembly, first load the existing part using the
FileOpen option. If necessary, modify or edit the part. When the part is ready to be added to the
assembly, change the displayed part to the assembly part and position the component part in the
assembly using Add Component from the Assemblies toolbar, or choose

AssembliesComponentsAdd Component .
click on the icon add component > select the name Of the component as clamp_base > ok
Add the part clamp_base to clamp_assm at the Absolute Origin. In the Settings group,
use Entire Part, and Work, and click OK.
Click Assembly Constraints and add a Fix constraint for the clamp base.
Verify that the constraint is displayed in the
Assembly Navigator. If necessary, click Include
Constraints .
Add the clamp cap
You will add the clamp_cap so that the assembly looks like
this.
Add the clamp cap
Click Add Component , and add the

clamp_cap part. Use the positioning of By
Constraints. Use settings of BODY and
Work.
Click Apply.
Position the clamp cap using
centerlines
Align the cylindrical axes of the holes of the cap and the
base.
Add a touch constrain for the clamp cap
touch the faces shown below

Add an angle constraint
Click Assembly Constraint and add an Angle constraint of 180 degrees between the top
face of the cap to a top face of the base.
Add the clamp lug
Add the clamp_lug component. For settings, use the Entire Part and Work layer. Align the
datum axes of the clamp_lug and the right hole in the clamp_base.
Align the datum planes
Align the datum planes.
Click OK.
Add an angle constraint
Add the Angle constraint to the centerline of the clamp_lug and the flat upper face of the
clamp_base, and use an angle of 90 degrees.
Your successful solution should look like the illustration below.
Add the clamp nut and clamp pins
The last components to be added and constrained are the clamp nut and two clamp pins.
Clamp nut Clamp pin
Test your knowledge by adding and mating the two pins. The two pins hold the cap and lug to the
base.
Your successful solution should look like the illustration below.
Hide all constraints, and replace all reference sets with Model.
Close all parts.
Top-Down Design
Creating a New Part and Adding it to the Assembly

To design components using a top-down construction method, create a new component part and add that
component to the assembly using Add Component from the Assemblies toolbar, or choose
AssembliesComponentsAdd Component. You can select geometry from the assembly part and
either move or copy it to the new component part. Because you can specify an orientation for the new
component, the geometry is in a coordinate system natural to that of the component part, irrespective of
assembly coordinates.
Top-down modeling lets you copy and move geometry between parts, while maintaining the
necessary associative links to keep the design of the part intact.
When you export a part, you can choose whether it should remain parametric; that is, whether its current
interpart expressions, local-part expressions, dimensions, and positioning dimensions are retained.
If you retain expressions while exporting into an existing part, those expressions are automatically
renamed in the destination part by adding a single quotation mark and a number to the end of the
expression (e.g., p1 is renamed p1'1, or p1'2 if p1'1 already exists). This prevents confusion that
could occur if different expressions had the same name.
If you export into a new part or create a new component, retained expressions are not automatically
renamed; since a new part has no existing expressions when it is created, there are no possible
name conflicts.
You can also use FileExport to select geometry from the assembly part and save it to a new part.
See Exporting Part Files for a brief discussion about exporting parts, and for a more complete
discussion, see the Common Tools Help.
Converting a Part to a Master Model Part

Suppose you have the geometry and drawing in the same part and wish to convert this to a master
model pseudo-assembly with the geometry in a component part and the drawing in an assembly part.
This can be achieved by first selecting Retain Annotations in the Drafting Preferences dialog box.
Next, using
Add Component from the Assemblies toolbar, or AssembliesComponentsAdd

Component, select all the geometry and select Delete Originals. After the new component is created,
the geometry is in the component and the drawing in the assembly. However, the drafting annotation in
the assembly is no longer associative to the geometry. It is now necessary to manually reattach all the
annotation to the occurrences of the geometry.
Click on file new
Create a new part file using an Assembly template. Use the suitable units. Name the
assembly it fix_assm. Place the file in a directory where you have saved all the par
Load the absolute datum coordinate system by using datum coordinate system
Create the component in the assembly work bench itself just like how u follow in the part
module
By applying the suitable features as follows

.
But the part is not saved ,so it is not added to the assembly navigator.
Click on the icon assemblies components crate new > select the geometry u created >select the
templete model select the units >enter name as fix_baseplate_skt >ok >ok.
So that the componet is saved like a part file as well as added to the assembly navigator.
But no constrains have been applied>select the icon assembly constrains by going to
assemblies > component position > assembly constraints to add constraints.
later select touch constraint and select the side face of the component and select the z-x plane of
the assembly coordinate system as follows, so that it will arrest the movement of the component in y
direction .
It also displays in the que line that only 3 degrees of freedom are remaining,
That is 1. Movement in x -direction
2. Movement in z -direction
3. Rotation of the component about z-x plane.
We can observe all these in the graphic window by the arrow marks as follows
.
Select the component ,right click and select show degrees of freedom.
Later again select the touch option , select the another side face of the component and select the z-
y plane now click on the apply button. It shows the display in the que line that only one degree of
Freedom is remaining as the movement of the component in x direction as well as rotation of the
Component about z-x plane are arrested due to the second mate option.
Now we are having only the movement in z-direction as indicated by the arrows.
Now select the align option and select the top face of the component and select the x-y
plane Of the assembly coordinate system , click on apply button.
The movement in the z- direction is arrested and finally the status in the que line is
fully constrained.
Now the component is fixed.
.
Click on the ok button in the mating conditions window to close it.
If we observe the assembly navigator it shows the status as fully constrained by a filled circle
As follows.
To add the second component to the assembly
Create an empty component
You will add a component in one of the top-down approaches creating an empty component,
and then adding geometry to it.
Be sure the Assemblies application is active.
Choose AssembliesComponentsCreate New.
The Class Selection dialog box appears. It can be used for geometry selection, but you do not need
to do this, since you are creating an empty component part.
Click OK to create the empty component.
The Create New Component dialog box appears.
From the Units list, select the required units.
From the Templates list, select Model.

In the Name box, type fix_locpin1.
Make sure the Folder box contains a location where you have write permission.
Click OK.
Design intent for the locator pin geometry
Your design intent is to control one of the diameters of the locator pin with the hole geometry in the
baseplate.
To do this, and as shown below, (1) the circle in the baseplate will be used to create bottom part of
the locator pin (2).
You need to set the fix_locpin1 component as the work part, so that any geometry that you create will
reside in that part.
In the Assembly Navigator, double-click fix_locpin1 to make it the work part.
Remember, you will use geometry (the hole) in the fix_baseplate_skt to help define and link a locator
pin in the new (empty) component (fix_locpin1) that you just added to the assembly. This method of
creating geometry is referred to as "working in context of the assembly".
Create the linked geometry in the work part
InsertAssociative CopyWAVE Geometry Linker is used to link geometry from one component of
an assembly to another.
Choose InsertAssociative CopyWAVE Geometry Linker.
The WAVE Geometry Linker dialog box appears.
Your will create the geometry in the new component part. There are two ways you can do this.
If you want unlinked geometry, you can simply model new geometry in the new component.
If you want the new component linked to geometry in some other component, you can link
geometry from one component to the other.
The WAVE Geometry Linker dialog box lets you define link geometry. The options on the dialog box
vary, depending on which Type you choose.
You will be creating a linked curve at the upper edge of the hole, and extruding that curve into a solid
body.
In the WAVE Geometry Linker dialog box, from the Type list, select Composite Curve.
Select the top edge of the hole as geometry to be linked.
In the Settings Group, make sure the Associative check box is selected.
Click OK.
The linked curve is created in the Work Part (fix_locpin1). This can be checked by looking at the Part
Navigator.
Extrude the linked curve into a solid

The solid body that you are about to create will have a diameter that is linked to the hole in the
fix_baseplate_skt.
Click Extrude .
The Extrude dialog box appears.
Select the linked curve in the graphics window. (You may need to change the Selection Bar
toolbar options to select the curve.)
In the Limits group of the dialog box, from the End list, make sure Value is selected.
You want the curve to extend into the fix_baseplate_skt, but if it extends above the top face of the
baseplate. you can reverse it.
In graphics window, in the End box, type 0.75 and press Enter.
Make sure the extruded body goes into the solid base plate.
If needed, click Reverse Direction to reverse the extruded body below the surface of the
fix_baseplate_skt.
The extruded feature fills the hole on the baseplate.
Click OK.
The Extrude feature and the linked curve are listed in the Part Navigator. When Timestamp Order
is cleared (unchecked), you will see that the Extrude is dependent on Linked Composite Curve.
Add a boss to the locator pin
You can continue to create the upper part of the pin, and add the Boss feature to the model.
Choose InsertDesign FeatureBoss.
Select the top face of the Extrude feature.
In the Boss dialog box, in the Diameter box, type 0.5.

In the Height box, type 2.
Use the default zero taper angle.

Click OK.
The Positioning dialog box appears. You will align the arc centers of the linked curve and the boss.
Click Point onto Point .
Change to a static wireframe view for easier selection, if needed.
Select the linked curve again.
In the Set Arc Position dialog box, click Arc Center.
The locator pin is complete.
Check the WAVE linked relationship
Linked geometry will always be referenced in the Part Navigator.
In the Part Navigator and look at the relationships that exist.
Check associativity
Shade the view.
Make the fix_baseplate_skt the work part.

Replace the reference set with Model.
In the Part Navigator, right-click Simple Hole(1) and choose Edit Parameters.
Click Feature Dialog.
In the Diameter box, type 0.25 and click OK.
Click OK again.
Change to a wireframe view to see the change.
Both the hole (fix_baseplate_skt) and the lower cylinder of the fix_locpin1 are modified because of
the linkage between the fix_baseplate_skt hole and the fix_locpin1.
Choose EditUndo List Edit Feature Parameters to get back to the original diameter.
Return to a shaded view.
Add another locator pin
You will add another occurrence of the fix_locpin1 to this assembly, so that the assembly contains
two of them.
Make sure that fix_assm is the work part.
On the Assemblies toolbar, click Add Component .
In the Add Component dialog box, select fix_locpin1.
In the Placement group, from the Positioning list, select Move.
In the Settings group, from the Reference Set list, select Entire Part.
From the Layer Option list, select Work.
Click OK.
The Point dialog box appears.
Click Arc/Ellipse/Sphere Center and select the arc center of the hole on the right side of
the fix_baseplate_skt.
The locator pin appears with the handles.
Move the locator pin
Because you specified Move, the Move Component dialog box appears.
In the Position group, select the Move Handles Only check box.
Select the arc center of the bottom boss to position the handles.
The handles move to the location that you selected.
Clear the Move Handles Only check box, if needed.
In the dialog box, click Point Dialog .
The Point dialog box appears.
In the dialog box, click Arc/Ellipse/Sphere Center.
Select the arc center of the hole in the fix_baseplate_skt.
Click OK twice.
The second locator pin is now positioned in the assembly.
Change the work part and replace a reference set

You will create a new component and add sketch geometry to it from the fix_baseplate_skt part.
Then, this sketch can be extruded into a solid.
The fix_assm should still be the work part.
Replace the reference set for the fix_baseplate_skt with Entire Part.
The sketch that is to be used for the locator appears in the view.
Create a new empty component
Choose AssembliesComponentsCreate New.
In the Class Selection dialog box, click OK to create an empty part.
In the Create New Component dialog box, from the Units list, select Inches.
Select the Model template.
In the Name box, type fix_locator.
Make sure the Folder box contains a location where you have write permission.
Click OK.
Use the default Component Name, and Layer Options, and click OK.
Change the work part
Make the fix_locator the work part.

In the WAVE Geometry Linker dialog box, from the Type list, select Composite Curve.
Carefully select only these six curves that make up the sketch for the locator.
Make sure the Associative check box is selected, and click OK.
The curve geometry was added to the component. You can now extrude this geometry into a solid.
Design intent for the fixture locator
The locator dimensions will be controlled by a sketch, so that a minor edit to a dimension of the
sketch will update the solid. You will use the sketch that you added to the part to create the solid
geometry.
Note:
When creating solid geometry, the only difference between using sketch curves and regular curves
is that sketch geometry has parameters that can be modified to change the geometry.
You can use the following functions to create this part.
Extrude the sketch.

Add additional features to the locator.
Extrude the sketch

Click Extrude .
Drag a rectangle around the curves to select all of them.
From the End list, make sure Value is selected.
In the view, in the End box, type 1.0, press Enter. Then click OK.
The solid body is created.
Create a pocket in the locator

You may want to use Add or Remove Buttons on the Form Feature toolbar to add the button to
the toolbar.
Click Pocket or choose InsertDesign FeaturePocket.
Click here for information about toolbar customization for this course.
In the Pocket dialog box, click Rectangular and select the top face as the placement face.
Select one of the top horizontal edges as the horizontal reference.

In the Length box, type 1.25.
In the Width box, type 1.25.
In the Depth box, type 0.5
Click OK.
Note:
You may want to change the Rendering Style easier selection of objects in the view.
Position the pocket with Line onto Line and Point onto Line. (Watch the
cue, which will tell you what to select, and remember to adjust the view as needed.)
When you have finished positioning the pocket, click Cancel.
Create a relief on the locator
Click Hole .
Click here for information about toolbar customization for this course.
Select the top face of the locator as the placement face.
The Hole dialog box appears.
In the Diameter box, type 0.2.
In the Depth box, type 0.5.
In the Tip Angle box, type 0.
Click OK.
The Positioning dialog box appears.
Click Point onto Point and position the hole and the endpoint where the corner of the
pocket is located.
Remember to change the rendering style as needed for easier selection.

Create holes using WAVE Geometry Linker
Now you can create linked circles in the locator part, and extrude and subtract them from the fixture
locator.
Use associative copy techniques learned earlier for the WAVE Geometry Linker to create circles
in the locator part based on the cylinder edges in the fix_baseplate_skt part.

From the Type list, select Composite Curve.
Make sure the Associative check box is selected.
Select the two edges of the holes.
Click OK.
Check the Part Navigator to verify that the linked composite curves exist.
Using extrude techniques learner earlier, extrude the two circles using the Formula for p2 which
is the end limit for the locator, make sure that the direction is upward, and Subtract the extrude
from the solid.
Click Extrude .
Select the circles.
Click the parameter entry option for the End Distance box, and select Formula.
List All expressions in the Expressions dialog box.
Double-click the p8 expression.
Click OK.
Make sure that the direction points upward into the locator. Use Reverse Direction if needed.
From the Boolean list, select Subtract.
Click OK.
In a writable directory, FileSave only the fix_locator part.
Note:
You cannot save any new parts you generate into the tutorial parts directory.
Make fix_assm the work part.
Add more locators
Change to a Shaded with Edges rendering style.
With the work part changed back to the assembly you can now add three more locators to the
assembly.
Add the fix_locator component that you created to the assembly three more times and position
them as shown below.
On the Assemblies toolbar, click Add Component .
In the Add Existing Part dialog box, use Model, use Move, and use Work.
Recalling techniques you learned about moving components, locate one of the fix_locator
components.
Repeat this procedure to add the remaining two locators.

Edit in place
When you create a new component and add solid geometry to it, all parameterization associated with
that solid is copied into the new component. This also includes any expressions that are required to
control that parameterization.
In this section you will edit a parameter of a component part while working in context of the
assembly.
The rectangular opening in the base plate is a little too big. The locators hang over the edge of the
opening. You will edit the size of this opening.
Change the work part to the fix_baseplate.
Show all components.
With the fix_baseplate as the work part you can now edit the value of the expression controlling the
size of this opening.
Choose ToolsExpression.
The Expressions dialog box lists all the expressions found in the current work part.
Select the expression named sketchwidth.
In the Formula box, change it to read blockwidth3.5 .
Press Enter.
Update the assembly
Click Cancel.
Note:
An Expressions message states that the model is out of date and prompts you for an update.
Click Yes.
The fix_baseplate is updated.
Change the work part back to the assembly.
The assembly is completed.
Close all parts.
This is the procedure for creating the parts in the top down approach.
We can see all the parts list in the assembly navigator. To make the total assembly fully
Constrained, select the parts one by one in the assembly navigator >right click >mate
conditions, To add or remove the suitable constrains just like how we applied for first component
fix_baseplate_skt.
Assembly Cut Options
The options on the creation and editing dialogs are the same. Open the creation dialog by choosing
InsertCombine BodiesAssembly Cut. To open the editing dialog box, select an assembly cut
feature and choose EditFeatureEdit Parameters.
You must be in the Modeling application and have an Assemblies license.
Assembly Cut Dialog Options
Selection Steps
When this selection step is active, select one or more bodies that will be cut.
Target
Body
When this selection step is active, select one or more bodies that will be used to perform the
cut.
Tool Body
Suppose if we want to do any changes in the part after loading into the assembly >select the
name of the part in the assembly navigator > right click >make work part .
So that all the other components in the assembly will get deactivated, and when we click on
part navigator we can see the model tree of the part and we can also edit it .
To make the total assembly active mode, select the name of the assembly in the assembly
navigator >right click >make work part .
See the title bar we can understand what is your current part.
To open the part file separately right on the component >display parent>select the name of the
part file.
activate the part file> go to part navigator and delete the pocket at the center as shown below.
Later to activate the assembly >select the name of the assembly in the assembly navigator>
Right click > make work part.

Now I am loading another component into the assembly and I want to array it
Go to assemblies >component >add component> select the name of the component
> Load it and fully constrain it.

Create a datum axis in the middle > go to assemblies > component >create array> select the
component > select array type circular array >select the axis > number of items as 4 >angle
between the items as 90 degrees.
But we are having only two holes in the base part.
To create the holes in the assembly itself with respect to the intersecting objects instead of going
to part files for editing we go for assembly cut.
Go to insert > combine bodies >assembly cut > select the target body as the base part >
Select the tool bodies as the two shafts with respect to which u want to create holes> ok.
After applying assembly cut > if we hide the tool bodies the result will be as follows
Later click on show button and retrieve the tool bodies.
Replace component
To replace one component with another in an assembly
Go to assemblies > component > replace component> select the component to replace >select
the name of the component with which u want to replace
>ok.
See the assembly navigator > shaft is substituted by tapered shaft .
Also all the constrains have been removed.

Mirror assembly:
go to mirror assembly > click on next >select the component >select the mirror plane>next > next >
finish.
After mirroring expand the assembly navigator ,it will display only one shaft, select that right
click and choose unpack option, then it will show the individual part as shown below.
For the arrayed objects in the assembly constrains will be applied.
But for mirrored components no constrains will be applied >select the component > right
click> Click on assembly constrains option to add constrains.

Suppress component
It removes a component constrains display in the assembly navigator as well as from
graphic window.
Go to assemblies > component > suppress component >select the parts in the graphic window
> ok.
Here I selected two parts to suppress , the names of the parts have been removed from the
display of the assembly navigator where as if we hide the parts only geometry will be hided
but we can have the display in the assembly navigator.

UN suppress component
It displays the previously suppressed component.
Go to assemblies > component > unsuppressed component >select the names of the parts in the
list > ok.

Assemblies >exploded views > new explosion>enter the name of explosion >ok.
Exploded views
Use the Exploded Views commands to create a view in which selected parts or subassemblies are
moved apart visually, for drawings or illustrations, as shown in the figure below. This command
transforms components visually in the exploded view and does not change the actual assembly position
of the components.
To create an exploded view, you must follow the steps below:
1. Create a new explosion.
2. Reposition components in the explosion.
New Explosion
Use the New Explosion command to create a new explosion, in which components can be visually
repositioned to produce an exploded view. This command also lets you specify a name for the explosion
or use the default name.
Note It is important to remember that model view names are not the same as explosion names. NX does
not change the name of a model view that displays an explosion. It only adds the word EXPLODED
to the information about the displayed model view in the corner of the graphics window.
If the view already has exploded components, you can use it as a start point to create a new explosion.
This is useful when you want to create a series of explosions.
Edit Explosion
Use the Edit Explosion command to reposition one or more selected components in an explosion. This
command is available when the work view displays an explosion.
Auto-explode Components
Use the Auto-explode Components command to define the position of one or more selected
components in an exploded view. This command offsets each selected component along a normal
vector based on the assembly constraints of the component.
Note This command has no effect on unconstrained components.
This command does not produce a perfect exploded view every time. Use the Edit Explosion command
to refine an autoexploded view if necessary.
Unexplode Component
Use the Unexplode Component command to restore one or more selected components to their
original, unexploded position.
Delete Explosion
Use the Delete Explosion command to delete an exploded view. If more than one exploded view exits,
a list of all exploded views appears which lets you select the view to delete.
Note An explode view can not be deleted if it is the displayed view. To delete this view, you must
change the displayed view or hide the explosion first.
If a selected exploded view is associated with any other view, a warning is displayed to indicate that
the associated view must be deleted first.
Work View Explosion

The Work View Explosion list displays existing explosions. Use this to select an explosion and display it
in the work view. You can also select No Explosion if you do not want to display an explosion.
Hide Explosion
Use the Hide Explosion command to hide the assembly explosion in the work view. This command is
available when the work view shows an explosion.
Show Explosion
Use the Show Explosion command to show an assembly explosion in the work view. It lists available
explosions and lets you select one to display.
.
Create a Traceline
1. Open or create an exploded view.
On the Exploded Views toolbar, click Create Tracelines to open the

Create Tracelines dialog box.
Specify Point is active.
2. Select the Start Point of the traceline.

4. Specify whether the End Object is a Point or a Component.
A point is more specific, but if the geometry of the end component is not suitable for defining a
point, you may want to select the component itself. NX determines the position of the end point by
using the unexploded positions of the components.
5. Select the End Point of the traceline.
(Notice the green vector at the selected Start Point in the figure. You can edit this vector; see
step 7.)
6. Choose Alternate Solution to cycle through possibilities for the traceline. You can also
select any of the segment drag handles (the small green arrows in the traceline segments) and
drag them until the traceline is the shape that you want.
Alternate Solution #1
Figure. Alternate Solution #2

Alternate Solution #3
7. (Optional) If you do not like any of the alternate solutions, you can select and drag segments of
the traceline until the traceline is the shape that you want.
You can select and drag a Start Point or End Point to extend the traceline beyond the point
it is attached to. Right-click one of these points to Reset it to its original attachment position,
or you can Reattach the traceline to a new point.
8. You could also change the shape of the traceline by right-clicking the vector at either end of the
traceline to see options for editing that vector.
9.
10. Choose OK or Apply to create the vector.

After creating the exploded view go to menu bar >view >operations >save as and give the name
as exploded view>ok. So that we can place the view in to the drawing sheet.
Assembly Arrangements Dialog
The Assembly Arrangements dialog lets you create new arrangements, or edit existing ones. You can
open it by any of the following methods:
Assemblies Components Arrangements
Edit from the Arrangements cascade menu in the Assembly Navigator
Edit from the graphics window's Arrangements cascade menu
Clicking (Edit Arrangements) on the Assemblies toolbar
You can select multiple arrangements for Delete or Information operations. The other operations require
a single selected arrangement.
Arrangement Properties Dialog
When you press the Properties button on the Assembly Arrangements dialog, the Arrangement
Properties dialog appears.
The Arrangement Properties dialog has one tab: General.
Arrangement Properties Dialog Options
Name The name of the selected arrangement. You can modify the arrangement's name by
entering a new name (that is not used by any other arrangement) in this field.
Ignore All Controls whether new assembly constraints in the part are applied to the selected
Mating arrangement. If this option is on, the position of the arranged components will not be re-
Constraints solved by mating constraints.
You can also control whether arrangements that have been set to ignore their mating
constraints are shown in the Mating Conditions dialog tree. Use the Show Arrangements
Ignoring Constraints option on constraint nodes in that tree to control whether such
arrangements appear.
Information Provides information about the selected arrangement. This option is the same as the
Information option on the Assembly Arrangements dialog.
The information includes whether the selected arrangement is used by any other loaded
assemblies, exploded views, interpart links, assembly cuts, promotions, or sequences.
Create an Assembly Sequence Motion step
Go to > assemblies >sequencing.

This example opens the vise in the following figure:
Vise
1. On the Assemblies toolbar, click Assembly Sequences . NX

enters the sequencing environment.
2. On the Assembly Sequencing and Motion toolbar, click Create New Sequence . NX
creates a sequence, and the Sequence Navigator appears on the Resource Bar.
3. Click Insert Motion .
The Record Component Motion dialog bar appears.
4. On the Record Component Motion dialog bar, click Select Objects and select
the components that you want, as shown in the figure below.
Select the screw
5. Click Disassemble if you want to disassemble the component from the
assembly. If you want to move the component without disassembling it, click Move
Objects . The drag handles appear, as shown in the figure below.

Drag handles appear
6. (Optional) If the drag handles are in an awkward location (as in the figure above, where some of
the handles are hidden behind the screw), you can move them by doing one of the following:
o Click Snap Handles to WCS on the Record Component Motion dialog bar.
The handles move to the WCS, as shown in the figure below.
Snap Handles to WCS
o Click Move Handles Only and drag the handles to a new location.
Click Move Objects again to activate it after the drag handles are in the desired location.
7. (Optional) Click Motion Record Preferences if you want to modify default preferences
that affect motion steps and frames.
See Motion Record Preferences for more information.
8. (Optional) If you want to reorient the sequence view during playback (for example, to zoom in on
small components), use manipulation tools such as zoom and click Camera .
9. When you are ready to drag the selected components, click Move Objects , and drag
the handles until the components are in their new location, as shown in the figure below.
Several other components move with the screw, due to mating conditions.
Drag the screw to the vise's fully-open position
If you select one of the drag handles before moving the components, the Vector Tool
options on the Record Component Motion dialog bar are available.
Click OK when you finish moving the components. A new Motion step appears in the Sequence
Navigator
. Add the exploded view to a drawing

1. Start the Drafting application.
2. In the View Creation Wizard, click Cancel.
3. Right-click the border of Sheet : Sheet 1, and then choose Add Base View.
4. In the Base View dialog box, in the Model View group, from the Model View to
Use list, select Trimetric.
5. Right-click and choose View Style.
6. On the General tab, make sure the Centerlines check box is selected.
7. Click OK.
8. Click in the middle of the graphics window to place the view in the center of the
drawing sheet.
9. In the Projected View dialog box, click Close.
Notice how the explosion appears in the view along with the tracelines you created.
10.
TO START DRAWING > CLICK ON FILE > NEW > SELECT THE TEMPLATE DRAWING >
SELECT THE SIZE OF THE SHEET > DRAWING WITH VIEWS OR NO VIEWS > SELECT THE
NAME OF THE PART TO CREATE A DRAWING OF > OK.
The Drafting interface

In addition to standard tools and selection toolbars, the Drafting user interface contains
the following unique features:
Drawing sheet boundary
View boundary
Drafting toolbars
Drawing node on the Part Navigator
Drawing sheet name
Sketch Tools toolbar

NX Drafting methods and the master model workflow
NX provides different methods for creating drawings. You can use:
A 2D drafting process and start from a new drawing that does not reference any 3D
model geometry.
A 3D drafting process and place your drawing directly in the assembly or part file
that contains your 3D data.
The master model workflow and manage your model files separately from your
drawing files. This is the recommended workflow when working with 3D data.
Create a new drawing part and select the master model

part to add to it
1. On the Standard toolbar, click New .
2. In the New dialog box, click the Drawing tab.
3. Set the Relationship filter to Reference Existing Part.
4. Make sure the Units are set to Millimeters.
5. From the Templates list, select A1 Size.
6. In the New File Name group, leave the Name entry of dwg1.prt as is for now.
Now you must select the master model part to add to this drawing.
7. In the Part to create a drawing of group, click .
The Select master part dialog box appears.
8. In the Select master part dialog box, click Open .

9. Select part drf3_10011_valve_body and click OK (or just doubleclick the part
name).
The part you selected now appears in the Select Part list.
10. Click OK.
Note how the New File Name has updated. It now reads:
o drf3_10011_valve_body_dwg1.prt
11. In the New dialog box, click OK.

The drawing sheet template is imported into your new part and appears in your
graphics window.
Create the non-master drawing

1. Click Close in the Populate Title Block dialog box.
2. If the View Creation Wizard is not displayed, on the Drawing toolbar, from the
Add View drop-down list, click View Creation Wizard .

3. In the View Creation Wizard dialog box, click Next until you reach the Layout
page.
Alternately, you can select Layout in the Task Navigator to go directly to the layout
page.
4. In the Layout group, click the Top, Right, and Isometric layout buttons.
5. Click Finish to create the drawing views.
Base views
Use the Base command to add any standard modeling or custom view saved in a part to a
drawing sheet. A single drawing sheet may contain one or more base views. From base
views, you can create associated child views such as Projected, Section, and Detail
views.
The Base command provides options that enable you to:
Add any view from the master model part, the current part, or another loaded
part.
Specify the position and orientation of a view on the drawing.
Set the scale and style of the view.
Control the appearance of components in views on assembly drawings.
Note Exploded views can only be added as base views if the exploded view resides in the
part that contains the drawing. See Exploded Views in Drafting for additional
information.
Projected views
You can project views from an existing base, drawing, orthographic, or auxiliary view. NX
automatically infers orthographic and auxiliary alignment as you move the cursor in a
circular motion about the parent view's center.
Note The Automatically Start Projected View Command option on the General tab of the
PreferencesDrafting dialog box controls the automatic start up of the projected
view command.
The system automatically infers:
A hinge line to use as a reference to rotate the view into orthographic space.
A vector direction that is perpendicular to the hinge line. The arrow indicates the
projection direction from the parent view.
You can manually define the hinge line and also reverse the projection direction before
you place the view.
Orthographic views
The Projected view command allows you to automatically create orthographic
projections from existing views. To place an orthographic view onto the drawing sheet,
drag the projected preview image directly to the right or left, above or below the parent
view. When view snaps to vertical or horizontal alignment with the parent view, an
orthographic view is created according to the projection angle of the drawing sheet. The
orthographic view inherits its initial view preferences from the parent view.
Hinge Line
Orthographic Direction
Helper Line
Auxiliary views
By revolving the hinge line to an oblique angle in the parent view, you can automatically
project an auxiliary view from it.
Hinge Line
Orthographic Direction
Shaded Auxiliary Preview

As you rotate the hinge line about the center of the parent view, it automatically snaps to
45 degree increments. To prevent the angle snapping, press Alt as you position the view
on the drawing sheet.
Drafting View Style and View Preferences

The dialog box is used to create or modify the visual appearance of a view, as well as control
the preference settings for the style options associated with all view types.
The dialog box is called the View Style dialog box if you are creating or modifying
a specific views appearance.
It is called the View Preferences dialog box if you are setting the global
preferences for all view types.
The title of the dialog box, the tabs displayed in the dialog box, and the options displayed on
the different tabs of the dialog box, depend on whether you are setting the style of a view or
setting the preference for all views.
From this dialog box you can:
Control visual properties of the view such as how hidden lines, visible lines, virtual
intersections, and smooth edges are rendered, and whether the view is displayed as a
shaded or wireframe image.
Set the perspective, angle, and scale of the view.
Control the visibility of the view annotation such as the view label, scale label,
and centerline symbols.
Set the display characteristics for tracelines and thread representations in the
view.
Control the appearance of a section view, including the display of foreground,
background, and crosshatch elements.
Where do I find it?

To open the View Style dialog box:
Application Drafting
Toolbar Drafting Edit Edit Style , then select one or more views
from the drawing sheet
Highlight the view border, press and hold the right mouse button
Radial Toolbar Style

Menu EditStyle then select one or more views from the drawing sheet
or Part Navigator
Graphics Doubleclick a view boundary

window Rightclick one or more view boundaries Style
Part Navigator Rightclick a view node Style
To open the View Preferences dialog box
Toolbar DrawingView Preferences

Menu PreferencesView
Automatic centerlines
This option automatically applies either a center mark or centerline symbol to a
cylindrical or conical shaped feature in a newlyplaced view where the axis of the feature
is perpendicular or parallel to the plane of the drawing view. The edge of the feature
must be a complete 360 degree circle for a symbol to be applied to it.
With automatic Without automatic

centerlines centerlines
To specify automatic centerlines, see PreferencesView. On the General tab, select the
Centerlines check box.
Note For those views that have had automatic centerline symbols applied to them, you
cannot go back and deselect the Centerlines check box for the view in order to omit
the existing symbols. Instead, you will need to manually delete the symbols from the
view.
Open a part to a specific drawing sheet

1. On the Standard toolbar, click Open .
2. Click drf3_bonnet_dwg_1 but do not click OK yet.
3. In the Open dialog box, make sure the Preview check box is selected.
4. From the Drawing Sheet list, select SHT2.
5. Click OK.
Edit the hidden line style

1. Zoom in close to the TOP view.
The hidden line font in this view is currently set to invisible. However, to see more
detail in this view, you need to set the hidden line font to one of the visible fonts.
2. Rightclick the border of the top view and choose Style.

3. On the View Style dialog box, click the Hidden Lines tab.
4. From the Font list, select Dashed.
5. Click Apply (do not close the dialog box).
Now the top view displays all hidden edges as dashed.

Turn off smooth edges
1. Click the Smooth Edges tab.
You can see the lines that display the smooth edges at several places on this view. A
typical example is the smooth edge where the face of a blend (fillet or round) meets
the face of the flange.
Smooth edges are those edges in a view where adjacent faces have the same surface
tangent where they meet.
2. Clear the Smooth Edges check box.
3. Click OK.
The display of all smooth edges disappears from the view.
Also observe that all of the edges in the drawing views are displayed at a uniform
line width.
You can control the line density of the geometry and annotations in any view, but
you must direct NX to display the density in a drafting view.
Turn on the line width display

1. On the Visualization toobar, click Visualization Preferences .
2. Click the Color/Font tab.
3. In the Drawing Part Settings group, select the Show Widths check box.
4. Click OK.
Now every model edge is displayed in their original width, and the centerline
symbols are displayed with a thin width.
The Show Widths option only affects your screen display. The original line widths
still exist.
Turn on the shaded display

1. Open the Part Navigator .
2. Under the Drawing node, right-click SHT3 and select Open.
3. In the Part Navigator, under the Sheet SHT3 node, rightclick Imported TFR-
TRI@7 and choose Style.
4. Click the Shading tab.
5. From the Rendering Style list, select Fully Shaded.
6. Click OK.
Edit the scale of the view

1. Rightclick the border of the view and choose Style.
You would like to have the Trimetric view appear actual size.
2. Make sure the General tab is open.

3. In the Scale box, type 1.00
4. Click OK.
The view is updated to full scale.

5. Close all parts without saving.
Change a drafting view's angle

1. Select the drafting view(s) whose angle you want to edit.
2. Right-click and choose Settings.
3. In the Settings dialog box, expand the Common node, and select the Angle node.
4. In the Angle group, type a new value into the Angle box.
5. Click Apply or OK to rotate the view.

Note If you change the angle of a section view or a detail of a section view the crosshatching does not
rotate with the view. Additionally, if you change the scale of the view the distance between
crosshatch lines does not change.
Section view at 0 angle Section view at 45 angle

Make a reference/active view
An active drafting view is one that can be edited, and updates when the model changes. A drafting
view that has been set to a reference view cannot be edited, the view geometry is not visible, and a
reference marker appears inside the view boundary.
1. Doubleclick a view border, or right-click one or more view boundaries and choose Settings.
An active view is selected
2. In the Settings dialog box, expand the Common node, and select the General node.
3. In the Display group, set the Show as Reference View check box.
4. Click Apply or OK.
Reference View
Display hidden edges of overlapping solid bodies
The Self Hidden option lets you control how hidden lines are displayed when more than one solid body
is in the part. When selected, all hidden edges are displayed. When not selected and the hidden line
font is set to a visible font, only the edges hidden by another solid are visible. Edges hidden by the
solid body itself are not displayed.
1. Double-click a view border to open the Setting dialog box.
2. In the Settings dialog box, expand the Common node, and then select the Hidden Lines node.
3. In the Format group, make sure the hidden line Font is set to one of the visible options.
4. Make sure the Process Hidden Line check box is set.
5. Clear the Self Hidden check box.
6. Click OK or Apply.
Self Hidden is not set Self Hidden is set
Display a referenced edge
If an edge referenced by a dimension or annotation is obscured by geometry, you can set a hidden line
option so that only the referenced edge is visible in the drafting view.
Note This procedure is only available for views that display exact model geometry. This option is not
available for views with smart lightweight or lightweight edges.
1. Double-click a view border to open the Settings dialog box.
3. In the Format group, make sure Process Hidden Lines is selected.
4. Set the hidden line Font to Solid.
5. Set the Self Hidden check box.
6. Set the Show Referenced Edges Only check box.
Self Hidden is set and Referenced Edges Only is Self Hidden is set and Referenced Edges Only is
set not set
Simplify and hide small features

1. Right-click a view border and choose Settings.
3. In the Small Features group, set Small Features to Simplify.
4. Drag the Tolerance slider all the way to the right.
5. Click Apply.
Small details like the individual contacts in the receptacles are removed from the view.
6. In the Small Features group, set Small Features to Hide.
7. Click OK.
Create a shaded view
1. Double-click a view border, or right-click the border and choose Settings.
2. Expand the Common node, and then select the Shading node.
3. From the Rendering Style list, select Fully Shaded.
4. Click OK.
Unshaded view
All small features are completely removed from the view.

Add partial shading to a drafting view
1. Double-click the border of a drafting view.
2. In the Settings dialog box, expand the Common node, and then select the Shading node.
3. From the Rendering Style list, select Partially Shaded.
4. Click OK to accept the change.

Note if your model does not have partial shading already applied in the Modeling view no change
will appear in your drafting view.
5. Right-click the view border again and select View Dependent Edit.
6. In the Add Edits group, click Edit Shaded Objects .
7. Select an object from the drafting view.

Note Make sure that you select a body and not just the face of the object.
8.
9. Click OK to close the Class Selection dialog box.
10. In the Shade Edits group of the View Dependent Edit dialog box, from the Partially Shaded
list, select Yes.
11. Click Apply to see the change.
12. Click Edit Shaded Objects again.
13. Select another object from the drafting view and click OK.
14. In the Shade Edits group of the View Dependent Edit dialog box, do the following:
a. Change the Shade Color.
In this example, the shade color is set to Pure Blue .
b. Set Translucency to Yes.
c. Set the Translucency slider to 75.
15. Click OK to see the changes.
Tip If you do not see shading in the drafting view, make sure the Use Translucency option in the
Drafting Preferences dialog box is set.
Transfer view-dependent annotation from a model view to a drawing

This example shows how to transfer view-dependent annotation contained in a modeling view, for
example from an imported file, to both the drafting view and the drawing sheet.
Note This example does not demonstrate how to import PMI objects into a drawing. PMI object display
is controlled by the options in the PMI node in the view Settings dialog box and the Drafting
Preferences dialog box.
Model view with view-dependent annotation
Add the model view with annotation to the drawing
1. Choose StartDrafting to start the Drafting application.
2. In the Size group of the Sheet dialog box, select Use Template
3. Select an appropriate drawing size from the list of available templates.
4. Click OK to create the blank sheet.
5. Choose File tabDrafting Preferences.

6. In the Preferences dialog box, expand the View node, expand the Base/Drawing node, and
select the Settings node.
7. In the Format group, from the Copy Annotation to list, select Base View.
8. Click OK.
9. Use one of the following methods to add a Base view to the drawing:
o Choose Home tabView groupBase View .
o Right-click the sheet name under the Drawing node on the Part Navigator and select
Add Base View.
o Right-click the drawing border and select Add Base View from the shortcut menu.
10. Make sure the Model View to Use option in the Model View group of the Base View dialog box
is set to the view that contains the view-dependent annotation.
11. Right-click in the graphics window and select Settings to set the view style options
12. Click the Base tab, and make sure both the Inherit Clipping Boundary and Transfer
Annotation options are not selected.
13. Click to place the view on the drawing.
14. Press Esc to exit the add view command.
Notice that the view and all the geometry in the view is placed on the drawing sheet.
15. (Optional) Drag the annotation to see that the view boundary re-sizes to keep all annotation
within the view
Add the model view to the drawing and the annotation to the drawing sheet
1. Choose File tabDrafting Preferences.
2. In the Preferences dialog box, expand the View node, expand the Base/Drawing node, and
select the Settings node.
3. In the Format group, from the Copy Annotation to list, select Drawing Sheet.
4. Click OK.
5. Add the model view with the view dependent annotation to the drawing.
6. Drag the annotation in the view.
Notice that the annotation now moves outside the view boundary.
When a view is placed with Copy Annotation to option not set, but the Inherit Clipping Planes option
is set, the view boundary may clip the display of some of the annotation.
You can fix the display by editing the view boundary and changing it from a Manual Rectangle to an
Automatic Rectangle.
Detail views
A Detail view contains a portion of an existing view. The scale of the detail view may be
adjusted independent of its parent view so that objects shown in it are more easily seen and
annotated. You can create detail views with either circular or rectangular view boundaries.
Associative view and scale labels can be attached to the detail view as well as to the detail
boundary in the parent view.
Circular and Rectangular Detail Views with label
Detail views are fully associative to their parent views. Any changes made to model geometry
are immediately reflected in the detail view. Like its parent view, you may need to update
the detail view to clean up the display of hidden and silhouette edges.
If the parent view contains 2D geometry such as sketches or curves, associative copies of
them are placed in the detail view.
Where do I find it?

DrawingDetail View
Toolbar
DrawingAdd View Drop-down listDetail View
Menu InsertViewDetail
Shortcut Menu Rightclick the border of an existing viewAdd Detail View
Part Navigator Rightclick a view nodeAdd Detail View
Define the boundary radius of the detail view

1. Move the cursor away from the hole center you just selected. You do not need to
press the mouse button to do this.
Note how a circular boundary image rubberbands with your cursor.
2. Click to define the radius of the circular boundary of the detail view and to create
the label on the parent.
3. Position your cursor in the lower right portion of the drawing sheet, and then click
to place the view.
Observe how a letter appeared in the parent label.

4. Press Esc to close the Detail View dialog box.
Edit the size of the detail view boundary

1. Open SHT4 of drf3_bonnet _dwg_3.

3. Rightclick the boundary of DETAIL B and choose Boundary.
4. Select the boundary of the detail view, and then drag it to a smaller size.
5. Click one time to define the new radius of the view boundary.
The detail view boundary and label on the parent view change accordingly.
6. Click Cancel.
Add an empty view
1. Choose 2D Layout tabView groupDrawing View .
2. In the View Boundary group, under Placement, select either Center or Corners.
o For a Center type, move the cursor to the desired location, and then select the
location to place the view. NX sets the initial center coordinates to (0,0). NX creates the
drawing view with a default boundary size. When you add a sketch or curves to it, NX
automatically adjusts the view boundary to a bounding box that includes the curves and
sketches you create.
o For a Corners type, specify a screen position for two corners of the view boundary and
specify X and Y Center Coordinates to define the position of the drawing view in 3D model
space.
3. (Optional) Specify the Orientation.

Note Orientation is required if you plan to use the Copy To 3D command on this view.
Drawing views
The Drawing View command creates a drafting view which does not contain any geometry from the
current model. The empty view is not associated to model geometry, but you can identify it as a
standard view orientation (TOP, LEFT, and so on), or define its orientation relative to the model's
absolute CSYS.
There are two ways to place a Drawing view:
Center lets you create and adjust position of the view on the sheet in one selection. The
resulting boundary is an Automatic Rectangle.
Corners lets you control the size of the view and its position on the sheet by specifying two
diagonal points. The resulting view boundary is a Manual Rectangle.
To create view dependent geometry in the Drawing view:
Make the view the Active Sketch View and create sketch curves in it.
Expand the drawing view and use the curve tools to construct 2D geometry inside the view.
Move drawing sheet objects to a drawing view

This example shows how to move drawing sheet objects into two separate Drawing views.
Drawing
Sheet Sheet 1 (Work-Active)
Sketch SKETCH_Sheet 1_000 (Active)
Out-of-Date
1. Select drawing sheet objects that you want

to move to the first Drawing view.
2. Right-click the selection and choose Move

to New View.
3. 1. From the View Orientation list,

select Front.
2. Click Apply.
4. Select drawing sheet objects that you want
to move to a second Drawing view.
5. 1. From the View Orientation list,

select Right.
2. Click OK.
Drawing
Drawing View Front@1
Sketch SKETCH_Front1_000
Drawing View Right@2
Sketch SKETCH_Right2_000
Out-of-Date
Move to New View

Use the Move to New View command to move selected sheet objects to a new Drawing view. Placing
objects in a Drawing view lets you leverage a number of view-centric design workflows such as using
the Project to View and Copy to 3D commands to create 3D models from 2D drawings.
Selected sketch objects placed in two new
Initial sketch on the sheet
views
In the Move to New View dialog box, you specify:
A set of objects to move. If you select annotations that reference hidden objects, these objects
are included in the selection.
The view coordinate system, scale, orientation, and style.

Objects maintain their apparent size and position. As a result, dimension values change whenever the
view scale is not 1:1.
If your selection contains part of a sketch, the sketch is split and the selected part is placed in a new
view sketch. Sketch constraints that cannot be preserved are removed.
All annotations and dimensions remain view dependent on the sheet.
Where do I find it?
Command Finder
Move to New View
Graphics window Right-click sketch curvesMove to New View
Right-click the sheet sketch nodeMove to New View

Part Navigator
Smash View
Use the Smash View command to move view dependent objects from a view onto the sheet. You can
move objects from the following views:
Drawing views
Detail views created from Drawing views

This command helps you reorganize how data is represented on a 2D layout. This supports a more
flexible 2D design workflow.
If you smash a Drawing view that has associated Detail views, the Detail views become independent.
Drawing views to smash View dependent objects on the sheet
Note The original view is removed from the drawing.
Standard views
The Standard Views command lets you use a single command to place multiple drawing views, or sets
of imported views, onto a drawing sheet in a standard orthographic layout.
You can place multiple views of the following types:
Drawing View, which is an empty view that does not contain any geometry.
Base View, which is a view that is associative to the 3D model.

Warning Only Drawing views can be used with the Copy to 3D command. See Copy to 3D for more
information.
You can select from a number of view configurations, and can place the views using the following
options:
Center
Lets you place the views with a single step by specifying the location of the center of the group
of views.
Corners
Lets you place the views by specifying the location of the first corner, and then the second
corner. The two corners determine the extent of the group of views being placed.
For both placement options, helper lines are available to help align the group of views with existing
views or with the center of the drawing sheet
You can specify the scale, center coordinates, preview style, view settings, and margins for the view
sets you create. Creating standard sets also ensures consistency when defining center coordinates,
margins and style within a given drawing.
Note You can edit any individual view, but you cannot edit the layout once it is placed.
View Break
You can use the View Break command to add multiple horizontal or vertical view breaks. Two
types of view breaks are available:
Regular, where the view break has two break lines representing the conceptual gap on the
drawing.
Single-sided, where the view break has only one break line. The second virtual break line is
located past the corresponding end of the part and is not visible.
For the first view break in a view, the direction of the break lines can be horizontal, vertical, or
general. NX sets the default break direction to horizontal if the geometry is wider than it is high on the
sheet, otherwise it sets it to vertical. You can also specify a vector to set a general direction for the
break line. When you add a new break to a view that already has a view break, the direction must be
either parallel or perpendicular to the previous breaks.
You can add breaks to the following views:
Base views
Projected views
2D drawing views.
Section views with simple or stepped section lines, and Break-out section views.
Note Sketch curves and associated annotations cannot be added to views that contain view breaks.
For example, if you want to add view breaks to a Break-out section view, it is recommended
that you create the section view first, before adding view breaks. Or, you can suppress the
view breaks, create the Break-out view, and then unsuppress the view breaks. Associating
drafting annotation to views with unsuppressed view breaks is not supported.
Note You cannot add breaks to detail views, perspective views, and legacy broken views using the View
Break command.
When the parent view (1) already has a view break, you can create projected views (2) and section
views with view breaks that NX creates automatically.
The view breaks created in the projected and section views are independent and you can modify or
delete them.
Note If you create a section view from a parent view with one or more view breaks, the section view
line in the parent view will be hidden.
The Propagate View Break customer default controls whether or not the view break is propagated to
projected and section views.
Shortcut menu commands

The breaks associated to a view are displayed in the Part Navigator.

Drawing View TOP@22
Sketch SKETCH_TOP22_000
View Break 1
View Break 2
You can use shortcut menu commands on the view break node to do the following:
Edit the selected view break.
Suppress the view break in the graphics window to modify the sketch or the boundary of the
view. The Unsuppress shortcut command displays the view break after you modified the view. NX
suppresses all active view breaks when you activate the expand mode.
Delete the view break.
Rename the view break.

When a view break is active in a view, you cannot access the following commands:
Add Half Section View
Add Revolved Section View

Boundary
Active Sketch View

To access these commands you must suppress all view breaks in the view.
Where do I find it?
Command Finder
View Break
Graphics window Right-click the view borderAdd View Break
Part Navigator Right-click the view nodeAdd View Break
Add regular view breaks
This example shows how to create two parallel view breaks.
1. Right-click the boundary of the view that you

want to break and choose Add View Break.
2. In the Direction group, click Specify Vector.

3. Select an edge of the model to define the
direction of the break.
4.
Click Reverse Direction
The direction of the vector indicates the

direction of the break, from the first break
line to the second.
5. Select an anchor point for the first break
line.
6. You can drag the offset handle to move the

first break line.
7. Select an anchor point for the second break

line.
8. You can drag the offset handle to move the
second break line.
9. You can modify the break line type,

amplitude, extensions, color, width, and
other settings in the Settings group.
10. Click Apply.
11. From the Orientation list, select Parallel.

12. Select the first anchor point and offset for
the first break line.
13. Select the second anchor point and offset for

the second break line.
14. Click OK.
In the Part Navigator, NX creates two View Break nodes under the parent view node.
Drawing
Imported TFR-ISO@57
View Break 1
View Break 2
Modify a view that contains a view break
This example shows how to add and move lines in the sketch of a view that has a view break. This
example also shows the associativity of the break line.
1.
In the Part Navigator , right-click the View Break node an
choose Suppress.
In the graphics window, the view without the view break is

displayed and in the Part Navigator, the view break icon
changes to the suppressed icon for the View Break node.
Drawing View RIGHT@36

Sketch SKETCH_RIGHT36_000
View Break 1
2. Activate the sketch of the active view.
3.
Click Line .
4. Define the starting point of the line.
5. Define the ending point of the line.
6.
Click Line to finish the line.
7. Right-click the line and choose Move Object.
8. From the Motion type list, select Distance.

9. Click Specify Vector.
10. Select the X-axis.
11. Enter the distance to move the line. For this example, -0.2 is
entered in the Distance box.
12.
Click Finish Sketch .
13.
In the Part Navigator , right-click the View Break node an
choose Unsuppress.
Section views
The Section view commands let you create views in which some of the model geometry is removed in
order to expose internal features that would otherwise be obscured in the view.
You begin any section view by constructing a section line symbol in an existing view. This view becomes
the parent for the section view so that a true parent/child view relationship is established between the
two. Once the section line symbol is completed, the section view is generated complete with
associative crosshatching coinciding with the plane of the cut or cuts in the parent view. The section
view can also have a view label and scale label associated with it. The section view's letter corresponds
with the section line symbol letter in the parent view.
Note You must use caution when deleting objects from a section view while it is in an expanded view
mode. If the drawing is a non-master part, the component part can inadvertently be selected and
deleted from the drawing.
Section View Tool

You can use Section View Tool to:
Preview a section cut before you place it.
Display the cut planes.
Control the display of background faces.
Lock the section view's orientation to the one currently displayed in the Section View preview
window.
Select a preview style.

Section View Tool
Cut
Click Cut to preview the section view cut before you place the view. You can preview the cut in all
three preview styles (wireframe, hidden wireframe, and shaded).
Wireframe cut preview

Hidden wireframe cut preview
Shaded cut preview

Display Cut Planes
You can use this option to redisplay a preview of the model with cutting planes after you use the Cut
option.
Cut Planes
Background Faces
Controls which background faces or bodies to keep in the section view. Click this option and then from
the Section Tool preview window, select the faces or bodies you wish to keep. Click the middle mouse
button to keep your selections and exit the tool.
Note The following items apply to this functionality:
In order for this option to work, MenuPreferencesDraftingView node

SectionSettingsFormat group Show Background must be selected.
Hide Components in View takes precedence over this functionality.
Section view with all background faces Section view with selected background faces
included included
Change a section view's orientation
To use Lock Orientation to change the orientation of a section view:
1. Right-click the parent view border and choose Add Section View.
2. Place and orient the section line.

3. Place and orient the section line
4. Right-click and choose Lock Alignment.
5. Right-click and choose Section View Tool.
6. Use middle mouse button dynamic rotation to orient the model in the preview window.
7. Lock orientation
8. Click Lock Orientation .
9. Click the middle mouse button in the preview window.
10. Move the cursor to the desired location and click to place the section view.
11. Section view with custom orientation
Create a stepped section view

Creating a stepped section view is similar to creating a simple section view. The only difference is that
you define additional points for the section line to bend or cut through by right-clicking and choosing
Add Segment.
1. Choose Home tabView groupSection View .
2. Select the view you want to section.

Note You can also right-click directly on the border of the parent view and choose Add Section
View.
3. Turn snap point methods on or off to assist you in picking a point on the view geometry.
4. Move the dynamic section line to the desired cut position.
5. Select first point

6. Orient the cut direction as desired, then right-click and choose Lock Alignment.
7. Lock alignment
8. Right-click and choose Add Segment.
9. Select the next point to place a cut segment.
10. Add a second cut segment

Note You do not need to right-click and choose Add Segment each time you select a new cut
position.
11. Add subsequent cut segments as desired.

12. Additional cut segments
13. Right-click and choose Move Segment.
14. Select a bend segment and drag it to a new position in the parent view.
15. Move a bend segment
16. Right-click and choose Place View then move the cursor to the desired location.
17. Click to place the view.
18. Completed Stepped section view
Create a half section view

1. Choose Home tabView groupHalf Section View .
2. Select a parent view to section.
3. Select a parent view

Note You can also right-click the border of the parent view and choose Add Half Section View.
4. Use the Snap Point option Arc Center to place the cut position.
5. Select a cut position
6. Select a second point to place the bend.
7. Select the bend position
8. Drag the cursor to orient the section line symbol in the parent view.

Note Silhouettes are not selectable for indicating cut positions.
Create a revolved section view
1. Choose Home tabView groupRevolved Section View .
2. Select a parent view to section.

Note You can directly right-click the border of the parent view and choose Add Revolved Section
View.
3. Select a rotation point to place the section line symbol.
4. Rotation point
5. Select a point for the first segment.

6. First segment point
7. Select a second segment point.
8. Second segment point
9. You can now place the revolved section view. In this example, we add an additional segment.
10. While inside the view, right-click and choose Add Segment.
11. Select a segment leg.
12. Select a segment leg
13. Select a point to define the new segment.

14. Define a new segment point
15. Right-click and choose Place View. Drag the view to the desired location and click to place it.
16. Place the section view
Create a folded section view
1. Choose Home tabView groupFolded Section View .
2. Select the parent view.

3. In the Hinge Line group, from the Vector Constructor list, select YC Axis to define the hinge
line.
4. If required, right-click and choose Reverse Direction.
5. From the Snap Point options, make sure Quadrant Point is turned on and all of the other
options turned off.
6. Select the edge shown below.

7. From the Snap Point options, select Arc Center and make sure all of the other options are
turned off.
8. Select the center shafts of the three gears.
9. For the last cut position, on the Selection bar, select Point Constructor .
10. In the Point dialog box, from the Type list, select Angle on Arc/Ellipse.
11. Select the arc segment for the center point.
12. In the Angle on Curve group, type 135 into the Angle box.
13. Click OK.
14. Right-click and choose Place View.
15. Drag the view to the desired location on the drawing sheet.
16. Click to place the view on the drawing sheet.
17. Folded section and parent view
Unfolded Section views

Unfolded section views are generated from multiple cut segments running through selected points in
the parent view with no adjoining bend segments in between them. The section cuts are then unfolded
or 'flattened' onto a single viewing plane in the section view.
An Unfolded section view with its associated section line symbol
Where do I find it?
Command
Finder Unfolded Point to Point Section View or Unfolded Point and Angle Section
View
Create an unfolded point and angle section view
1. Choose Home tabView groupUnfolded Point and Angle Section View .
3. Select an edge on the model to define the section view hinge line or if you prefer, use one of
the Vector Constructor options to define the hinge line.

A vector arrow is displayed showing the orientation of the hinge line and the direction that the
section line arrows point.
If necessary, change the arrow direction by clicking Reverse Vector.
4. Click Apply.
The Section Line Creation dialog box opens, allowing you to specify cut and arrow positions for
the section line symbol.
5. From the Section Line Creation dialog box, choose the segment type, either Cut Position or
Arrow Position.
6. Use an option from the Point Selection list to select the first cut position.
A cut segment symbol appears at the point you selected. After the cut segment is displayed, you
can change its angle by typing a value into the Angle box and then pressing Enter.
7. Select a second cut position.

8. In the Angle box, type the desired angle and then press Enter.
9. Place final cut segment.
10. In the Angle box, type the desired angle and then press Enter.
11. After you have completed placing and orienting the cut segments, click OK.
12. Drag the view to the desired location on the drawing.
The section view's boundaries are visible. Note that the view can only be moved along the hinge
line's arrow direction.

Create an oriented section view
1. Choose MenuInsertViewSectionOriented to display the Section Line Creation dialog

box.
By default, 3D Cut is selected and Alignment is set to None.
2. In the dialog box, select Cut Position.
3. From the Point Selection list, make sure Point on Curve/Edge is selected.
4. Select a point along the upper edge of the top view.

The hinge line orientation, cut and arrow directions are based on the tangent vectors of the edge
at the point you selected.
5. In the Section Line Creation dialog box, select 2D Cut.
Now the cut direction is parallel to your line of sight.

6. With the Arrow Position option active, select two cursor locations for the arrow segments.
7. Click Reverse Arrow Direction so that the arrow vector points to the left.
8. Click OK.
The section line symbol is generated in the parent view and a preview of the section view
appears at your cursor.
9. Drag the preview image to a location on the drawing sheet, then click to place it.
10. Click Cancel
Create a pictorial section view from a 3D view
1. Choose Home tabView groupPictorial Section View .

The parent view is where the section line symbol appears. You can select the parent view from
the View Selection list or directly from the current drawing sheet.
3. Define the view arrow direction by selecting geometry from the graphics window or by using
the Vector Construction list.
In this example, XC Axis has been selected.
The arrow vector defines the direction of sight for the section view. If it points in the wrong
direction, click Reverse Vector.
4. Click Apply to advance to Define Cut Direction.
5. Select ZC Axis from the Vector Construction list to define the cut direction.
The cut direction specifies the direction of the cutting plane and cannot be parallel to the arrow
direction.
A cut vector arrow appears, showing the direction of the cutting plane. If this direction is wrong,
click Reverse Vector.
6. From the Section View Orientation list, select Orthographic.
7. (Optional) Select the Create Centerline, View Label, and Scale Label check boxes if you want
to display this information in the pictorial section view.
8. (Optional) Type a name for the pictorial section view in the View Name box.
9. Click Apply to open the Section Line Creation dialog box.
10. From the Point Selection list, select a point to define the Cut Position.
11. Click OK to add the 3D section line to the parent view.
12. Drag the view into position and click to place it on the drawing sheet.
Create a half pictorial section from a 3D view
1. Choose Home tabView groupHalf Pictorial Section View .
The parent view is the view on which the section line symbol is created. You can select the
parent view from the View Selection list or directly from the drawing sheet.
3. From the Vector Construction list, select YC Axis to define the arrow direction.
The arrow vector defines the direction of sight for the section view and is perpendicular to the
cut direction. If it points in the wrong direction, click Reverse Vector.
4. Click Apply to advance to Define Cut Direction.
5. From the Vector Construction list, select ZC Axis to define the direction of the cutting plane.
An arrow appears showing the direction of the cut vector. If it points in the wrong direction, click
Reverse Vector.
6. From the Section View Orientation list, select Use Parent Orientation.
7. Click Apply to open the Section Line Creation dialog box.
8. Use an option from the Point Selection list and select a point to define the Bend Position.
9. Use an option from the Point Selection list and select a point to define the Cut Position.
10. Click OK.
11. Drag the view into position and click to place it on the drawing sheet.
Create an orthogonal break-out section view
1. Right-click the view you want to make the break-out section view and select Active Sketch
View.
2. Use the sketch curve commands to create curves representing the boundary of the break-out
section.
You can either create a set of closed curves or create an open curve and let NX automatically
close the boundary for you as you progress through the creation steps.
In this case a single spline has been added to the view, marking the extent of the break-out
section on the part.
3. Choose Home tabView groupBreak-out Section View .
4. Make sure Create is selected.
5. Select the view in which you have added the break-out curves.
6. Select a base point. You can select it from any of the views on the drawing sheet.
The base point and default extrusion direction appear in the views.
7. If necessary, use either Reverse Vector or an option from the Vector Constructor list to
specify a different extrusion vector if the default View Normal vector is not desired.
8. Click the middle mouse button to progress to Select Curves .

9. Select the curve.
10. Click the middle mouse button to progress to Modify Boundary Curves .
11. Select the construction line.
A vertex point breaks the construction line at the point you selected.
12. Drag the vertex point out so that it encloses the area to be broken out in the view. The
construction lines rubber-band with it.
13. Select the other construction line.
A vertex is placed on this line at the point you selected.
14. Drag the vertex point out so that it encloses the area to be broken out in the view.
15. Click Apply to create the break-out section view.
Non-contiguous boundary curves

In the previous example, a single spline was used as a boundary curve to construct the break-out
section view.
You can also select multiple curves to build the break-out boundary. If the curves are not contiguous,
system generated construction lines will close the boundary.
In this example, two separate splines have been placed in the view.
The region between the two splines needs to be broken out.

1. After the base point and extrusion vector have been defined, select one of the splines.
2. Move the cursor over the second spline.
A construction line appears between the two objects.
3. Position the cursor over the second object so that the construction line strings across adjacent
points on the two splines.
4. Click Apply to complete the boundary and create the break-out section.
Section View dialog box options
The following options appear in the Unfolded Point and Angle Section dialog box, as well as the
Pictorial Section and Half Pictorial Section dialog boxes.
Option Description
Creation steps Creation steps guide you through the interactive process of creating the section view.
Select Parent View Lets you select a view on the current drawing sheet
in which the section line symbol will appear.
Define Arrow Direction Lets you select an object in the graphics window
or use an option from the Vector Constructor list to define the direction of sight for
the Pictorial and Half Pictorial Section View.
Define Hinge Line Lets you select an object in the graphics window or
use an option from the Vector Constructor list to define the hinge line for an
Unfolded Point and Angle Section View.
Define Cut Direction Lets you select an object in the graphics window or
use an option from the Vector Constructor list to define a cut direction for the
Pictorial and Half Pictorial Section View. The cut direction cannot be parallel to the
arrow direction.
Create Section Line Opens the Section Line Creation dialog box in
which you place Cut and Bend positions in the parent view.
Place View Lets you drag the view to a position on the drawing sheet.
The initial view placement will be inside a corridor that is parallel to the arrow
segment in the parent view.
View Selection Displays a list of all possible parent views on the current drawing sheet. You can either
list select a parent view from this list or directly from the drawing sheet.
Distance Controls the distance between a parent view and a newly created section view.
Vector Defines vectors by choosing from a variety of methods.
Construction
list
Reverse Vector Reverses the direction of the arrow vector.

Associative Lets you associate the hinge line orientation to model geometry so that it updates when
Hinge Line the model is edited. Available for Unfolded Point and Angle Section View
Section View Allows you to create a section view in any view orientation.
Orientation
Orthographic
Generates a section view in which the cut direction is parallel to the plane of
the drawing sheet.
Inherit Orientation
Generates a section view with the same orientation of another view
Use Parent Orientation
Generates a section view which has the parent view's orientation.
Section Existing View

Generates sectioning in an existing view that you choose.
Create Creates automatic centerlines.

Centerline
View Label Creates an associative view label.
Scale Label Creates an associative scale label.
View Name Type a name for a view prior to placing it on the drawing. If a view name is not
specified, or if it is not valid or unique, a unique system name is generated for the view
(e.g. SX@8).
Reference Changes the status of a view prior to placing it on the drawing. Active views are views
you can work on directly, while reference views cannot be worked on directly. If you
change an active view to a reference view, the view geometry no longer displays, and a
reference marker appears in the view bound. Although the geometry in a reference
view does not display on the screen, it still plots. Views that are converted to reference
views do not update until made active again, even if the angle, scale, or hinge line is
changed.
Move Lets you move an existing view while the section view dialog box is open.
Create a Break-Out Section
See Break-Out Creation Steps for definitions of base point, extrusion vector, and boundary points.
The steps required to create a break-out section are as follows:
1. Select a view. Create geometry to use for a closed loop of break-out curves. You can either
create the closed loop in a member view (View Operation Expand) or create an open curve
in member view and close the curve during "Modify boundary points" of the interactive steps of
the Break-Out Section dialog.
2. Exit the member view.
3. Choose Insert View Break-Out Section.
4. Select the view where you have added break-out curves.
5. Select a base point.
6. Indicate the extrusion vector.
7. Select curves.
8. Modify boundary points.
9. Click the Apply button on the Break-Out Section dialog.

Tip
In the previous procedure, break-out curves were added in a member view using View Expand. You
can also add break-out curves in the Modeling application. This can make it easier to create break-out
curves in a pictorial view since it is easier to manipulate the WCS in the Modeling application. To make
the curves created in Modeling selectable for the break-out views, perform the following steps:
1. Choose Edit View View Dependent Edit.
2. Select a view.
3. Choose Model to View. The class selection dialog displays.
4. Select the break-out curves.
5. Choose OK. The modeling curves are converted to view dependent curves.
Orthographic Break-Out Section View
In the following figure we have selected an orthographic view and added two splines in the member view
(View Operation Expand or the middle mouse button expand). You must unexpand the view before
creating the break-out section view.
2. Select the orthographic view. After you select the orthographic view, the break-out section dialog
advances to the "Indicate Base Point" icon.
In this example, we want the break-out from the center of the part towards the viewer. We
indicate the center of one of the cylinders as shown in the following figure. The system
automatically chooses an extrusion vector. You can accept it by clicking the middle mouse button
or define a new vector by using the vector constructor options.
Indicate Base Point
3. Select an endpoint from one of the splines. The spline highlights. Pass the cursor over the
second spline from end to end. As the cursor moves over the second spline, a line rubber bands
at either endpoint. Select the endpoint that gives you a line that connects from the same side of
the splines.
Select Curves
4. Click the middle mouse button to accept the curves. The system adds a line so that the break-out
section curves form a closed loop. Note the small red circles on the boundary curves. These are
boundary points which allow you to reshape the boundary curves. To reshape a curve you click
on one of the boundary points once, then move your mouse without pressing down on any
buttons. The curve moves at the boundary point as the mouse moves. Click the left mouse button
to accept a new location for the boundary point.
5. Click the Apply button on the Break-Out Section dialog. The system generates the break-out
section view shown in the next figure.
Pictorial Break-Out Section View

In the following figure we have added a rectangle in the Modeling application.
1. Choose the Drafting application.

2. Choose Edit View View Dependent Edit.
3. Choose the pictorial view.
4. From Convert Dependency, choose Model To View. The Class Selection dialog displays.
5. Select the four lines of the rectangle and click OK.
7. Select the pictographic view. After you select the view, the break-out section dialog advances to
the "Indicate Base Point" icon. In this example, we want the break-out from the bottom of the part
to the top. Toggle Cut Through Model ON. We indicate a line endpoint which is below the base of
the part (this is a reference line) as shown in the following figure.
Indicate Base Point
8. The extrusion vector is automatically chosen. You can accept it by clicking the middle mouse
button or define a new vector by using the vector constructor options. We defined a vector using
the vector construction two points option. We used two arc centers so that the direction of the
vector is along the axis of the part as shown in the following figure.
Indicate Extrusion Vector
9. To select the rectangle as the boundary curves choose the Chain option. The chaining dialog
displays. Select any leg of the rectangle. Click the OK button on the Chaining dialog. The
selected rectangle displays with boundary points (small circles). To reshape a curve you click on
one of the boundary points once, then move your mouse without pressing down on any buttons.
The curve moves at the boundary point as the mouse moves. You can use the point constructor
to associate the point with geometry on the model. Click the left mouse button to accept a new
location for the boundary point.
Modify Boundary Point
10. Click the Accept button on the Break-Out Section dialog. The system generates the break-out
section view shown in the next figure.
Pictorial Break-Out Section View
Create Center Marks
Open the part

1. Open drf5_sym1_dwg.
Sheet Sheet 1 Work
3D view of model
Create a simple center mark
1. On the Annotation toolbar, from the Centerline Drop-down list, select Center
Mark .
2. In the Center Mark dialog box, in the Settings group, under Style, select the
Color swatch.
3. Double-click the contents in the ID box at the bottom of the Color dialog box
and type 135 to set the color to Dark Dull Azure.
4. Click OK.
5. On the Selection bar, make sure Arc Center is selected.

6. In the broken view, select the single hole at the right end of the bar.
Observe the drag handle that appears on the symbol.
7. Drag the handle upward until the c1 value is approximately 1.20.
8. In the Settings group, under Dimensions, select the Set Extension

Individually check box.
Now each extension has its own drag handle that can be independently moved.
9. Click Apply to create the center mark.
Create a linear centerline symbol

1. In the Settings group, clear the Set Extension Individually check box.
2. For the (C) Extension value, type 0.500.
3. Select the outer arcs of the two counterbored holes to create a linear
centerline.
A linear centerline is created when you select two or more points. All the points
you select must be collinear in order to be included in the symbol.
NX sizes the symbol components to the objects used to create it. Therefore,
when creating a linear centerline through countersunk or counterbored holes,
you need to be aware of the display differences when locating your centerline
through the inner or outer arcs of the holes.
4. Click Apply.

Create multiple individual center marks
1. in the Location group, select the Create Multiple Center Marks check box.
2. Select the two clearance holes shown in the views.
3. Click OK.
An individual center mark is added to each hole.
Apply centerline symbols to the auxiliary view

1. Choose InsertCenterlineAutomatic.
2. From the Settings group, under Angle, clear the Inherit Angle from View
check box.
3. Select the auxiliary view.
The centerline symbols are oriented parallel to the edges of the drawing sheet.
This is not the result you would ordinarily want.
4. Select the Inherit Angle from View check box and then click OK.
Now the symbols are correctly aligned with the auxiliary view's hinge line.
Note The inherited angle value is not associative and does not update if the hinge
line inside the parent view changes.
Create a Full Bolt Circle
Open the part

Sheet Sheet 1 Work
2. If necessary, start the Drafting application.
Create a full bolt circle centerline symbol

1. On the Annotation toolbar, from the Centerline Drop-down list, select Bolt
Circle Centerline .
2. In the Type group, make sure Through 3 or More Points is selected.
This method uses the first three points you select to define the diameter of the
bolt circle.
3. In the Placement group, make sure the Full Circle check box is selected.

5. Select the four arcs (shown below). These four arcs will serve as the defining
features through which the full bolt circle will pass.
You need not select the defining points in any particular order since the start and
end points of the symbol are the same.
6. Click OK.
Create a Partial Circular Centerline
Create a partial circular centerline symbol

1. Choose InsertCenterlineCircular.
2. In the Type group, select Centerpoint.
3. In the Placement group, clear the Full Circle check box.
4. On the Selection bar, make sure Arc Center is turned on.

5. Start by selecting the hole in the center of the model.
This will be the axis of the centerline symbol.
6. Select the hole to the right of the first one.

Note The second point determines the radius of the circular centerline. Any
subsequent points you select must lie on that radius in order to be included
in the symbol.
7. Select the remaining hole.
Observe how the symbol is being constructed in a counterclockwise manner.
8. Click OK.
Add a 2D centerline to the front view

1. On the Annotation toolbar, from the Centerline Drop-down list, select 2D
Centerline .
2. In the 2D Centerline dialog box, make sure the Type is set to From Curves.
3. Select the silhouette edge on one side of the part.
4. Select the other silhouette edge.
The centerline symbol appears in the view.
5. In the Settings group, select the Set Extension Individually check box.
An additional centerline handle appears at lower end of the symbol.

6. Select the lower centerline handle.
7. In the C2 box, type 2 and press Enter.
8. Click Apply.
Add a 2D centerline to the top view
1. In the 2D Centerline dialog box, from the Type list, select By Points.
2. In the Settings group, clear the Set Extension Individually check box.

4. Select the bottom edge of the flange in the top view.
5. Select the edge directly above it.
6. Drag the centerline handle upward to an approximate length of 0.5.

Both ends of the centerline symbol adjust to the new length.
7. Click OK.
Apply a 3D centerline symbol to an orthographic view

1. On the Annotation toolbar, from the Centerline Drop-down list, select 3D Centerline .
2. In the Settings group, under Dimensions, select the Set Extension Individually check box.
3. In the upper right-hand view, select the face of the flange.
4. Drag the upper centerline handle to an approximate length of 10.

5. Drag the lower centerline handle downward to an approximate length of 1.5.
6. Click Apply.
Apply a 3D centerline symbol to the trimetric view

1. In the Settings group, under Dimensions, clear the Set Extension Individually
check box.
2. In the TFR-TRI view, select the face of the swept feature.
3. In the Settings group, for the (C) Extension value, type 1.50.
4. Click OK.
Close the part without saving. Create and edit an Offset Center Point
Create an Offset Center Point symbol

Sheet Sheet 1 Work
2. Start the Drafting appllication.

3. Choose InsertCenterlineOffset Center Point Symbol.
4. In the Location group, from the Offset list, select Vertical Distance by
Position.
The Vertical Distance by Position method places an offset center point on the
YC axis, which is offset from the arc center by a distance calculated from the arc
center to the indicated screen position.
5. In the Settings group, from the Display as list, select Center Line with
Extension
6. Select the largest outside arc for creation of the offset symbol.
7. Click a screen position for the placement of the offset center point symbol.
In this case, it will be created on the vertical (YC) axis.
A preview of the resulting offset center point symbol appears in the view.
Edit the Offset Center Point parameters
1. In the Settings group, under Dimensions, type the following values:
(A) Gap 10.500

(B) Center Cross 13.000
(C) Extension 15.000
2. Click OK.
Create a section view with an 3 dimensional

orientation
1. Right-click the border of the top view and choose Add Section View.
2. For the first cut position, use Arc Center to select the center point of the
lower left hole.
3. Adjust the section line symbol to a horizontal orientation, and then right-click
and choose Lock Alignment.
4. Right-click and choose Add Segment.
5. For the next cut position, select the center hole.
6. For the last cut position, select the hole visible in either the right side view or
in the trimetric view.
7. Right-click and choose Place View but do not click to place the view just yet.
8. Right-click and choose Section OrientationInherit Orientation.
9. Select the trimetric view.
10. Drag the section preview below the top view, and then click to place it.
11. Press Esc to close the Section View dialog bar.

This option lets the system infer the dimension type to create based on the location of the cursor
and the object(s) you select.
Line - If you select a horizontal or vertical line, the system automatically creates a corresponding
horizontal or vertical dimension. If you select a line that is not horizontal or vertical, the system creates
either a horizontal, vertical, or parallel dimension depending on the location of the cursor. The following
figure shows how different dimension types can be created based on the direction that the cursor is
dragged. If the cursor is dragged parallel to the selected line, a parallel dimension is created. If the cursor
is dragged horizontally, a vertical dimension is created. If the cursor is dragged vertically a horizontal
dimension is created. Once the desired dimension is created, pressing the left mouse button places the
dimension on the drawing at the current cursor location.
Create multiple dimensions using the Rapid command

1. Choose Home tabDimension groupRapid .
2. (Optional) Click the Reset button to reset the options in the dialog box.
3. Select the arc center of the first boss.
4. Move the cursor around and observe the different dimensions that are temporarily displayed.
NX attempts to deduce the type of dimension you want to create based on your selection and the
location of the cursor.
5. Select the center of the second boss.
NX now infers a horizontal dimension.
6. Click to place the dimension.
7. Select the center of the two vertical holes, and click to place the vertical dimension.
Tip
If you select the wrong object, click the Reset button to clear your selection and reset the
options in the dialog box at any time.
8.
9. Select the inner edge of the rib.

Note Make sure to select the edge and not a point on the edge.
10.
11. Select the opposite rib edge.

12. Before placing the angular dimension, pause so the on-screen window appears and then click
the Edit button.
13. Click the Dimension Text access handle (1) and, in the After Appended Text on-screen text
box (2), type TYP.
14. Click the on-screen Edit button again to exit the edit mode.
15. Click to place the angular dimension.
16. Select the center of one of the bosses again, and then position the cursor until a cylindrical
dimension is displayed.
Notice that TYP is appended to the cylindrical dimension. Because the Rapid command is still
active, any changes you make to the display of the dimensions are retained until you use the Edit
button to make additional changes, reset the dialog box, or exit the Rapid command.
17. Click the Edit button and using the Dimension Text access handle, do the following:
o Clear the After Appended Text on-screen text box
o In the Before Appended Text on-screen text box, type 2X.
18. Click the
Edit button to exit the edit mode, then click again to place the dimension.
19. In the Rapid dialog box, click the Reset button to reset all the options.
20. In the Measurement group, from the Method list, select Diametral.
21. Select the outer edge of the base plate.
22. Click to place the diameter dimension.

23. (Optional) Using the Edit button and Dimension Text access handle, create the hole
dimension.
Horizontal
This option allows you to create a horizontal dimension between two selected points. You use the
Point Position options (e.g., control point, intersection point, arc center, etc.) to help select the points
you want to dimension to. If a single object such as a line is dimensioned, it must be selected at opposite
ends.
Vertical
This option allows you to create a vertical dimension between two selected points. You use the
Point Position options (e.g., control point, intersection point, arc center, etc.) to help select the
points you want to dimension to (e.g. control point, intersection point, arc center, etc.). If a single
object such as a line is dimensioned, it must be selected at opposite ends.
Parallel
This option allows you to create parallel dimensions between two selected points. You use the
Point Position options (e.g., control point, intersection point, arc center, etc.) to help select the
points you want to dimension to. The following figure shows an example of a parallel dimension
between two tangent points
Parallel Dimension Between Two Arc Tangents
This option allows you to create a perpendicular dimension between a base line and a defined
point. The base line can be an existing line, linear centerline, symmetrical line, or cylindrical
centerline. The dimension is created perpendicular to the selected line. The following figure shows a
perpendicular dimension measured between the angled edge at the back right of the part and the
intersection point defined by the witness lines.
A Perpendicular Dimension
Angular
This option allows you to create an angular dimension which defines in degrees the angle between
two non-parallel lines (a base line and a second line). Both major and minor angular dimensions
can be created.
An Angular Dimension
Cylindrical
This option allows you to create a cylindrical dimension which is the linear distance between two
objects or point positions. It enables you to dimension the profile view of a cylinder. A diameter
symbol is automatically appended to the dimension. The position of the diameter symbol relative to the
dimension text and the symbol used to represent the diameter are controlled through Preferences
Annotation Radial.
Example of a Cylindrical Dimension

Hole
This option allows you to dimension with a single leader the diameter of any circular feature. When
the dimension is created a diameter symbol is included in the dimension text. The diameter symbol
can be changed to another symbol using PreferencesAnnotationRadial.
Hole Creates a dimension with single leader attached to the selected edge.
A Hole Dimension
Diameter
This option allows you to dimension the diameter of a circle or arc. The created dimension has two
arrows that point to the opposite sides of the circle or arc. Depending on the current placement
setting in the dimensions dialog, arrows are placed either on the inside or the outside of the circle or arc.
Chamfer
The chamfer dimension type displays the chamfer dimension size. This option only supports 45
degree angle chamfers. You can use preference or style settings to set:
How the chamfer dimension displays.

Stub type
Leader type
Symbol type
Chamfer Dimension
Radius
This option allows you to create a radius dimension that uses a short arrow from the dimension
value to the arc. You can also obtain a radius dimension that measures the radius of curvature at a
specific point on a spline or conic. A radius symbol is automatically appended to the dimension text. The
symbol used and its placement with respect to the dimension is controlled in Preferences
Annotation Radial.
Radius of Curvature Radius Dimension (not to center)

Radius to Center
This option allows you to create a radius dimension that draws an extension line from the center of
the arc. A radius symbol is automatically appended to the dimension text. The symbol used and its
placement with respect to the dimension is controlled in PreferencesAnnotationRadial.
Radius to Center Creates a radius dimension that has an arrow line drawn
from the center of the arc to the dimension origin. The arrowhead can either be
inside or outside the arc.
Folded Radius
This option allows you to create a radius dimension for an extremely large radius arc-one whose
center lies off the drawing area. It is assumed that the center of this radius lies off the drawing (thus
requiring a foreshortened or folded radius display).
A Folded Radius Dimension Using an Offset Center Point
The following steps illustrate how to create a Folded Radius dimension using an Offset Center Point:
Thickness
You can create a thickness dimension between two curves (including splines). The thickness dimension
measures the distance between a point on the first curve and the intersection point on the second curve
in the normal direction from the point specified on the first curve.
1st Pick: Object Selection (Point on Curve Used f or Dimension)
2nd Pick: Object Selection.
Arc Length
This option allows you to create an arc length dimension which measures the distance around the
perimeter
An Arc Length Dimension
Ordinate Origin
All ordinate dimensions are measured from an ordinate origin. Unless you specify a direction for the
baseline, the vertical dimensions are measured from a line parallel to the bottom of the drawing. The
horizontal dimensions are measured from a line parallel to the side of the drawing (see the following
figure). When you specify a direction for the baseline, dimensions are measured from the ordinate origin
at a distance perpendicular to the baselines.
The Datum Origin with Both Horizontal and Vertical Ordinate Dimensions
Horizontal Ordinate Dimension with Vertical Exten sion Line
Ordinate Origin
The Datum Origin with Both Horizontal and Vertical Ordinate Dimensions
Vertical Ordinate Dimension with Horizontal Exten sion Line
You can create an ordinate origin at any of the following utility symbols:
Linear Centerline
Cylindrical Centerline
Bolt Circle control points
Block Centerline
Offset center point
Intersection Symbol
Horizontal Chain
This option lets you create multiple horizontal dimensions that are placed end to end. Dimensions
are successively continued from the extension line of the previous dimension and form a set of
chained dimensions. Use the Remove Last option to remove the last dimension added if
necessary.
See also: Editing Chain and Baseline Dimensions
Offset
The horizontal chain offset lets you set the vertical distance between successive
dimensions.
Each successive dimensions vertical location is offset by the value you enter in the text box. If
you enter a positive value, the offset direction is in the positive Y-axis direction. If you enter a
negative value, the offset direction is in the negative Y-axis direction.
Reverse Offset
The reverse offset toggle button reverses the positive or negative direction of the offset.
This option allows you to reverse the offset during creation. When you click the toggle, the + or -
sign in front of the reverse offset value changes to its opposite value.

Vertical Chain
This option lets you create multiple vertical dimensions that are placed end to end. Dimensions are
successively continued from the extension line of the previous dimension and form a set of
chained dimensions. Use the Remove Last option to remove the last dimension added if
necessary.
Basic Procedure for Vertical Chain

Offset
The vertical chain offset lets you set the horizontal distance between successive
dimensions.
Each successive dimensions horizontal location is offset by the value you enter in the text box. If you
enter a positive value, the offset direction is in the positive X-axis direction. If you enter a negative value,
the offset direction is in the negative X-axis direction.
Reverse Offset
This option allows you to reverse the offset during creation. When you click the toggle, the + or - sign in
front of the reverse offset value changes to its opposite value.
Basic Procedure for Vertical Chain
To create a vertical chain dimension:
1. From the Drafting Application, choose the Vertical Chain icon or choose
InsertDimensionVertical Chain.
2. Enter a value in the Offset text box if you desire a horizontal offset for each succeeding
dimension. In this example we accept the default value of zero.
3. Select the first end point.
4. Select succeeding end points until all end points are selected.
5. Drag the chain dimensions to the desired location of placement.
6. Click the left mouse button to place the vertical chain dimension.
Horizontal Baseline
This option lets you create a series of associative horizontal dimensions measured from a common
baseline. Each successive dimension is vertically offset to prevent overlaying the previous
dimension. The first object selected defines the common baseline. Use the Remove Last option to
remove the last dimension added if necessary.
Basic Procedure for Horizontal Baseline

Offset
The horizontal baseline offset lets you set the vertical distance between successive
dimensions.
Each successive dimensions vertical location is offset by the value you enter in the text box. If you enter a
positive value, the offset direction is in the positive Y-axis direction. If you enter a negative value, the
offset direction is in the negative Y-axis direction.
Reverse Offset
front of the reverse offset value changes to its opposite value.
Vertical Baseline
This option lets you create a series of associative vertical dimensions measured from a common
baseline. Each successive dimension is horizontally offset to prevent overlaying the previous
dimension. The first object selected sets the common baseline. Use the Remove Last option to
remove the last dimension added if necessary.
Basic Procedure for Vertical Baseline

Offset
The vertical chain offset lets you set the horizontal distance between successive
dimensions.
Each successive dimensions horizontal location is offset by the value you enter in the text box. If you
enter a positive value, the offset direction is in the positive X-axis direction. If you enter a negative value,
the offset direction is in the negative X-axis direction.
Reverse Offset
front of the reverse offset value changes to its opposite.
Creating Feature Dimensions
To create a feature dimension.
1. From Drafting, choose InsertFeature Parameters or choose the Feature Parameters icon
from the Drafting Annotation toolbar.
2. Click the plus sign to expand the features tree. If necessary, you can fully load assembly
component parts with the the right mouse button Open Fully pop-up option.
3. Choose a standard (ANSI, ISO-DIN, or JIS) for callouts from the Template options.
4. Select the Feature(s) you wish to annotate from the Feature Parameters Tree list. Note that
features you select from the tree list highlight in the Graphics window. Note: You can pick the
feature from the Graphics Window and the feature node on the tree list expands and highlights
the selected feature.
5. Click the middle mouse button to toggle to the view list box. Choose a view to annotate, then click
the Apply button.
6. The selected features are automatically annotated. The annotations are in drag mode and can be
relocated if desired. Click the middle mouse button if you wish to toggle back to the Feature
Parameter Tree List.
The figure shows a countersunk hole, a counterbore hole, and a two simple holes that were automatically
annotated.
Creating a Composite Feature Control Frame

Creating a Composite Feature Control Frame
The following example creates a Feature Control Frame from the Drafting application. You can also
create a Feature Control Frame from PMI.
To create a composite Feature Control Frame (FCF) on a drawing from Drafting:
1. Choose the Feature Control Frame icon from the Annotation toolbar. The Feature Control Frame
dialog box starts.
2. Set the Composite Frame option. A second FCF line appears.

3. From the Characteristic drop-down menu, choose the position symbol.
4. Fill out the dialog's entry boxes as in the following diagram.
Feature Control Frame entries
5.
6. Position the FCF below the hole diameter.
7. Click the left mouse button to place the FCF annotation.

Click to place the FCF annotation
8. Press Esc to exit the builder.

9. With your cursor over the FCF annotation, right-click and choose Origin.
10. Select the hole dimension.

11. On the Origin Tool dialog, choose or enter the following:
o Choose Offset Character.

o Choose Bottom-Left Alignment.
o Enter 0 for X Scale Factor.
o Enter 2 for Y Scale Factor.
o Set the Associative option.
o Click OK.
12. With your cursor over the FCF annotation, right-click and choose Style.
13. On the Lettering tab, choose Top-Left for the Alignment Position.
14. Click OK.
Create or Edit a Datum Feature Symbol
Create a Datum Feature Symbol

1. On the Drafting Annotation toolbar, click Datum Feature Symbol .
2. [Optional] On the Selection Bar, choose options you want.
3. [Optional] You can select a filled or unfilled datum feature triangle. For example, to select a filled
datum feature triangle, click Datum Feature Symbol Style. Click the Line/Arrow tab. In the left
arrow type list, choose Filled Arrow.
4. Select an edge.
Select an edge.
5.
6. Click, drag, and place the symbol.
Place the symbol.
7.
Edit a Datum Feature Symbol

1. Double-click a datum feature symbol.
2. On the Datum Feature Symbol dialog bar, click Datum Feature Symbol Style .
3. On the Datum Feature Symbol Style dialog box, modify your settings. Click OK.
Datum Target Symbol overview
The datum target symbol indicates a point, line, or area on a part to specify a datum.
The datum target symbol is a circle divided into upper and lower halves. The lower half has a datum letter
that indicates the datum, with the target's number to the right. For area types of datum targets, you can
place identifiers in the top half of the symbol to show the target area shape and size.
The figure below shows two datum targets.
Datum Target A1 is a point-type of datum target.
Datum Target A2 is a round area-type of datum target, and has a diameter identifier and size in
the top half of its symbol.
You can also use the Datum Target dialog bar options to define the datum target symbol's appearance
before you create it.
Utility Symbols overview
This option allows you to create various utility symbols such as centerlines, offset center points, target
points, and intersection symbols using the Utility Symbols dialog box. This dialog allows you to control
the display of each symbol.
Cylindrical Centerline Symbol
Inherit Angle From View Overview
The Inherit Angle from View option inherits the angle from the auxiliary view when creating single
associative centerlines. When you select this option, the system ignores the angle in the centerline angle
field and uses the angle of the hinge line for the auxiliary view's centerlines.
This angle is NOT associative, so if the hinge line angle changes, the centerlines do not reflect the new
angle.
Inherit Angle from View On Inherit Angle from Vie w Off
Creating a Centerline through an Angled Hole
To create a Centerline through an angled hole in a block:

1. Choose Insert Utility Symbol Block Centerline.
2. Select the first and second defining objects. Pick edges 1 and 2 as shown in the illustration.
3. Select the first and second limiting objects. Pick edges 3 and 4 as shown in the illustration.
4. Choose Apply.
Block Centerline through an Angled Hole (Numbers indicate sequence of selections)
Target Point
This option allows you to create an ANSI standard target point symbol. If you locate the symbol on
an existing object, the system places the symbol center on the object nearest to the position you
select (see the following figure). If the target points are not close enough to snap to existing data
they are created at screen positions.
If you locate the symbol on an existing object, the system places the symbol center on the object nearest
to the position you select.
Target Symbol Location
Automatic Centerline
This option automatically creates centerlines in any existing view(s) where the hole or pin axis is
perpendicular or parallel to the plane of the drawing view.
If the bolt circle holes are not a circular instance set, then a linear centerline is created for each hole.
The following views are not supported:
Faceted representation view
Unfolded section view
Revolved section view

Inherit Angle From View
Use the Inherit Angle from View option to inherit the angle from an auxiliary view when creating
centerlines.
Cylindrical Extension
You can set the centerline extension for cylindrical centerlines by entering a value in the Cylindrical
Extension text box.
Automatic Centerline with Cylindrical Extension Automatic Centerline with Cylindrical Extension
set to 0.6025 set to 0.800
ID Symbols Overview
The ID Symbol option allows you to create and edit ID symbols on your drawing. ID symbols can be
created as stand-alone symbols, or they can be created with leaders. The ID symbols dialog allows you to
specify the symbol type, text, size, and placement.
ID Symbols
You can insert control sequence text characters to obtain special characters and symbols. See the
Symbols and Text Control Characters topic. For further details on entering text, see the Symbol
Text option.
ID Symbol Types
The ID Symbol dialog contains a variety of ID Symbol Types for you to use. Each symbol type creates a
different type of ID Symbol. The following figure shows examples of ID Symbols you can create.
Divided Symbols
There are three divided symbols, the Divided Circle, Divided Square, and Divided Hexagon. These
symbols are divided by a horizontal line and allow you to enter upper and lower text strings. These text
strings are placed just above and below this line.
Quadrant circle Symbol
The Quadrant Circle symbol is made up of a circle that is divided into quarters by both a horizontal and
vertical line. For this symbol, the upper text string is placed in the upper left quadrant just above the
horizontal dividing line. The lower text string is placed in the lower right quadrant just below the horizontal
dividing line (see the following figure).
= Upper Text
= Lower Text
Leader From
You can control the leader placement for a symbol by using the Leader Inferred, Leader From Left,
or Leader from Right options located on the Selection Bar. Leader placement options are available
while rubberbanding.
Leader Inferred places the symbol on the left or right side of the symbol according to the systems
intelligent calculation for placement. Leader From Left places the leader on the left side of the
symbol. Choosing Leader from Right places the leader on the right side of the symbol (see the
following figure).
Leader from Left and Leader from Right Options

= Leader from Left
= Leader from Right
Leader Tool
The Leader Tool option (Selection Bar) allows you to create an ID symbol with one or more leaders.
When creating a leader, you may indicate up to seven intermediate points on your drawing (see the
following figure). Leader segments are created from the points indicated. After you have specified all of
the intermediate points, click OK on the Create Leader dialog box then indicate a position on the drawing
where you would like the ID symbol to be placed.
An ID Symbol Placed on Drawing with Two Intermediate Points
= Two intermediate points
Position on Object
When you indicate a location for an ID symbol, the first position indicated represents the leader end. If an
object is within the selection ball when you click the mouse, the leader attaches to that object (see the
following figure).
Position on Object
= Arrow touches the object because the object is inside the selection ball
= Selection ball
= Arrow touches object at point nearest cursor position
Position on Screen (not on object)
= Arrow to cursor position because there is no object inside the selection ball
= Selection ball
= Arrow points to cursor position

Multiple Leaders
You may create ID symbols with as many as seven (7) leaders. Any time you want to create a new leader
you can do so by pressing the Specify Leader button. After creating all desired leaders, click the Create
ID Symbol button and indicate a location on the drawing where you would like the symbol to be placed.
The system automatically connects the leaders to the symbol (see the following figure).
ID Symbol with Two Leaders

Custom Symbol Overview
Custom Symbols lets you create or edit an instance of a symbol from a Custom Symbol Library. The
libraries are either provided by the software or created by a designated Symbol Librarian. The Symbol
Library dialog displays with two list boxes. The upper box, the Library List box, contains the names of all
the libraries. The lower box, the Symbol List box, is initially blank. When you choose a library from the
Library List box, the lower list box updates and displays the icons for all the symbols in the chosen
Library.
Unigraphics Symbols Library

Crosshatch a boundary with a single selection
1. on the Drafting Annotation toolbar, click Crosshatching .
2. Click inside the face of the counterbore hole.
Select counterbore hole face Software crosshatches boundary
Click on insert drop down list > text > type the text in text input area >click on style to set the
Properties >ok > place the text in the drawing sheet as follows.
Tabular Label Overview
Tabular labels provide a means to automatically create table style labels for one or more objects at once
using an XML tabular label template. For example, you can use this feature to place tabular labels on
shipbuilding objects such as piping runs, flow details, flanges, etc.
Tabular Label
The system queries the selected object's NX attributes and uses the names and associated values as the
content of the tabular label. You can choose from one or more formats where each format contains a set
of attribute name-value pairs.
Tabular Note Overview
The Tabular Note options allow you to create and edit tables of information on drawings. Tabular notes are
often used to define the dimensional values of similar parts within a family of parts. You also use them for hole
charts and material lists. You can use the Import option to import expressions, attributes, and spreadsheet
data. The following figure shows an example of a tabular note on a drawing where the sizes of different valves
are defined. The next figure shows an example of a tabular note used for a hole chart.
Tabular notes can reference expressions, part attributes, and object attributes. Elements of tabular notes
which reference expressions or attributes, remain associative and update as these values change in the
part.
A Tabular Note on a Valve Drawing
A Tabular Note Used for a Hole Chart

Parts List Overview
Parts lists provide an easy way for you to create a bill of materials for your assembly. There are a large
variety of options that allow easy customization. You can create one or more parts lists at any time during
the creation of your assembly. The parts list can be made to automatically update as your assembly
grows or update on demand. Individual piece numbers can either be locked or renumbered as needed.
Automatic callouts can also be generated and updated as the parts list updates.
You can define columns in parts lists so that the values of attributes display in the cells for the row
representing a component occurrence. Key fields help to determine when component occurrences are
considered as the same items, giving the capability to count items that are alike.
If a parts list format was defined in a version of NX prior to NX 2, this earlier format is used to create the
parts list with the Insert Parts List option. Otherwise, a generic parts list is created with three columns: a
callout column, a general column referencing the member name, and a quantity column.
Table Options
Tables Options
Edit Lets you edit a table's cell using a dynamic input box.
Edit Text Lets you edit a table's cell using the Text Editor dialog box.
Insert This pull-down menu provides the following options:
Rows
o Insert Row Above - Inserts one or more rows

above the selected row. o Insert Row Below -
Inserts one or more rows below the selected row.
o Insert Header Row - Inserts a header row.
Columns
o Insert Column to the Left - Inserts one or more

columns to the left of the selected columns
o Insert Column to the Right - Inserts one or more
columns to the right of the selected columns.
Resize Lets you resize a table by dragging a horizontal or vertical table grid line.
Select This pull-down menu provides the following options for selection:
Cells
Rows
Columns
Section/Table
For example, with a cell selected, you choose the entire row that
the cell belongs to with the rows option.
Import This pull-down menu provides the following options:
Import Attributes - Starts the Import Attributes dialog.
Import Expressions - Starts the Import Expressions dialog.
Import Spreadsheet - Starts the Import Spreadsheet dialog.
Merge Cells Merges adjacent cells.
Unmerge Cells Unmerges merged cells.
Sort Sorts a table by column values.
Lock/Unlock Applies only to Parts Lists. Turns on or off the lock state of the selected rows. Rows
Rows that are locked have a symbol displayed to the left of the row.
Attach/Detach Applies only to Parts Lists. Attaches or detaches rows to/from parent rows or the entire
Rows table.
Automatic Text Applies only to Parts Lists. Restores the default text of the respective columns to each
of the selected cells. This operation first erases the contents of the cells.
Goto Cell URL Launches the default Internet browser and loads the URL as specified in the cell styles
for the cell. This item is only available if a URL was specified for the cell.
Update Parts Manually updates the parts list. Parts lists can also be updated from the drawing
List navigator.
Autoballoon Let's you automatically create balloon callouts for parts lists and tabular notes.
Export Starts the Exports Parts List dialog. Lets you export the parts list to an external file or
browser.
Save As
Let's you save a customized parts list template file in the tables palette. You can drag
Template
and drop the template onto a drawing.
Edit
Displays a single dynamic input box where you can enter text for a cell. When you choose this option, the
input box displays any existing text in the cell. If you press the TAB or ENTER key, the system stores
resulting text in the cell and the input box goes away.
If you exit this option with the TAB key, the option automatically re-starts at the next adjacent cell to the
left, right, above or below, depending on the Direction to Move on TAB option from the Preferences
Annotation Cells dialog. If you select another cell while editing a current cell, the current cell updates
and the dynamic input box opens with the contents of the other cell.
Cell Dynamic Input Box
Control Characters
You can enter symbols using control characters. For example, if you enter <&4>, then the cylindricity
symbol displays in the cell.
Merge
Merges the selected cells. Merging cells has the effect of causing multiple cells to appear as a single
larger cell. If you merge a range of cells and more than one cell contains text, all other cells are erased.
The following shows an example of a tabular note with merged cells.
Merged Cells
Sort Overview
The Sort dialog provides you with options for sorting a table by column value. With tables that contain
multiple column headers, the dialog displays the name of the header row that is closest to the main body
of the table in the dialog list window.
For parts list, the system stores the sorting information. These stored sort options are automatically
applied when the parts list updates if the Sort on Update option is selected on the Parts List tab in the
Style dialog for parts list.
PC NO PART NAME QTY
1 SPECIAL_KEY 1
2 HANDLE_BALL 2
3 SLIDE_KEY 2
4 FLAT_HEAD_25
Before Sort
PC NO PART NAME QTY
1 FLAT_HEAD_25 4
2 SLIDE_KEY 2
3 HANDLE_BALL 2
4 SPECIAL_KEY
Reverse Sorted on QTY Value
Autoballoon
Autoballoon lets you automatically create ID symbol callouts from one or more views associated to a parts
list. You can set the type of ID symbol to use, whether to display reference callouts and other parameters
from the Parts List property page (See Related Topics at the top of the page). Callouts only display for
those components in a view that are visible. Creation of new callout symbols for row/view combinations
that don't have callout symbols occurs during the update of the parts list.
Note the following items:
If you delete a callout balloon, then the member to which it pointed can no longer be automatically
ballooned when the parts list updates. To cause the balloons for these members to be created,
perform the autoballoon function in that view again.
If multiple callout columns are used in a parts list that is autoballooned, the left-most callout
column is the one that updates the callout balloon symbols.
Autoballoon Callouts
Create a hole table for a single part
You can only create hole tables in the drawing state. That is, a drawing sheet must be displayed and
contain at least one view before you can create a hole table.
1. Choose Home tabTable groupHole Table .
2. Use Select Origin to select a geometric object in the view as the origin for the table.
Two perpendicular baselines are placed at the table origin and subdivide the view into quadrants.
The baseline arrows indicate the positive direction of measurement.
3. Use one of four available selection methods to select holes.

As you make your selections, labels appear in the view.
4. Middle-click to advance to Specify Location .
A preview of the table appears at the cursor.
5. Click to place the table on the drawing sheet.

6. Click Close.
You can then drag the table or hole label positions as needed.
Add an exploded view to a drawing
1. Start the Assemblies application.
The Assemblies application must be active in order to access the exploded view commands.
2. Do one of the following:
o If your drawing is contained in the same part as your assembly, start the Modeling
application.
o If your drawing is contained in a separate part, you must make the drawing the current
work part, and then start the Modeling application.
3. Choose Assemblies tabExploded Views groupNew Explosion
4. Create the explosion.
See the Exploded View section of the Assemblies Help for information about how to create an
exploded view.
5. (Optional) Use Save As command to create a custom view.
It is good practice to create a custom view for an explosion. By creating a custom view, you can
set the view to always display the explosion, and you can set the orientation of the view so that
it provides the optimal viewing angle for the explosion.
6. Start the Drafting application and, if necessary, add a drawing sheet.

7. Choose Home tabView groupBase View
8. If you placed the exploded view in the non-master drawing part, make sure that the drawing
part is selected in the Loaded Parts list in the Parts group of the Base View dialog box.
9. In the Model View group, from the Model View to Use list, select the view that contains the
explosion.
10. (Optional) Before placing the view, right-click and select Settings and, in the Settings dialog
box, set display preferences for the view using the options under the Common node.
For example, you may wish to deselect the Centerline option so that no centerlines appear in
your exploded view. You may also wish to set the traceline appearance using the Tracelines
options.
11. (Optional) Add additional views as needed.

Click on insert > image> open >select any image file > ok
Enter the width and height of the image > press.

Click on insert > sheet > set the sheet size , units, projection type to open a new sheet.
To switch from one sheet to another sheet, click on the part navigator icon in the resource bar and left
click twice on the name of the sheet.

Move/Copy View Options
Drawing
View Selection
List
To a Point
Horizontally
Vertically
Perpendicular to
a Line
To Another
s
MSelects one or more views to be moved or copied.

ov
e/
Moves or copies views to a new point location on the drawing.
C
opMoves or copies views in a horizontal direction.
y
ViMoves or copies views in a vertical direction.
ew
OMoves or copies views perpendicular to a defined hinge line.
pti
onMove or copies views to another drawing.
Copy Views Copies existing views and moves them to a new location on the drawing.
View Name Enter a name for a view that is to be copied onto the drawing. The view name must be
entered into the field prior to placing it on the drawing. If a view name is not specified,
or if it is not valid or unique, a unique software name is generated for the view (e.g.
ORTHO@8).
Distance Controls the distance that a view is moved/copied relative to the originally selected
view. If the Distance check box is selected, the view is moved/copied at a distance
equal to the value specified in the distance field. If more than one view is selected, the
views are moved/copied based on the first view that was selected.
Vector Defines vectors by choosing from a variety of methods. Depending on which option
Construction you choose, the software interprets the selected object(s) accordingly. For details on
Options specific options see Vector Construction Options.
Deselect Views Deselects views. This is useful if you make a mistake selecting views.
Align View Options
Align View Options
View Selection Selects the views you want to align. Both active and reference view can be selected. In
List addition to selecting views from the list, views can also be selected directly from the
graphics screen.
Align views both horizontally and vertically so that they may be superimposed one
upon the other.
Overlay Infer
Horizontally
Vertically
Perpendicular to
a Line
view points that are selected. The example steps below describe how to align views
horizontally using the three different alignment methods.
Horizontally
aligns selected Vertically aligns selected views with each other. The way in which the views are
views with each aligned depends on the alignment option chosen (Model Point, View Centers, or Point
other. The way in to Point), and the view points that are selected. The Vertically option works in the
which the views same manner as the Horizontally option, except that the views are aligned vertically
are aligned instead.
depends on the
alignment option Aligns a selected view perpendicular to a specified reference line.
chosen (Model
Point, View
Centers, or Point
to Point), and the
Aligns views based on the matrix orientation of a selected stationary view.
Alignment Controls the way in which views are aligned.

Options
Snap Point Defines point locations by choosing from a variety of methods. Depending on which
Options option you choose, the software interprets the selected object(s) accordingly.
Vector Defines vectors by choosing from a variety of methods. Depending on which option
Construction you choose, the software interprets the selected object(s) accordingly.
Options
Deselect Views Is useful if you make a view selection error when aligning views. You can use this
option to clear the selection and start again.
View Boundary Overview
Edit View View Boundary allows you to specify the view boundary type for specific member views
on a drawing. The available boundary types include, Break Line/Detail, Manual Rectangle, Automatic
Rectangle, and Bound By Objects. In addition to specifying a boundary type, View Boundary also
allows you to create view anchor points.
Boundary Types
The View Boundary option menu allows you to choose from several different boundary types. To make
this menu available for use, you must first select a view. The following paragraphs briefly describe each
option. Procedures for using each method are described in the pages that follow.
Break Line/Detail allows you to use user-defined curves to define a Break Line or a Detail View
Boundary. The defined curves must reside in a drawing member view.
In general ellipses cannot be selected as curves for a Break Line/Detail View Boundary. However, if
you first simplify the ellipse using Insert Curve Operation Simplify you can select the simplified
curves (which make up the ellipse) for use in a Break Line/Detail View Boundary.
Manual Rectangle allows you define a view boundary using a manual ly created rectangle.
This method is commonly used to hide unwanted geometry in a particular view.
Automatic Rectangle allows you to define a view boundary which autom atically resizes (if required)
after model updates. This option is used when you want to show all of the geometry in a particular view. It
is also used when you want to have a section line of a section view determine the view boundary.
Bound By Objects allows you to define a view boundary which autom atically resizes to include
selected solid edge(s) and points on the model geometry. This option is commonly used for rectangular
detail views whose size or shape might need to change because of model changes.
Create a Break Line/Detail View Boundary
The steps outlined below show how to use the Break Line/Detail View Boundary option to create a
break line and break line view boundary.
1. Place your cursor over a parent view, right-click and choose Add Detail View.
2. Create a circular detail view.

Create a Circular View
3.
4. Choose Insert Sketch and select the detail view.
5. Click OK .
6. Sketch boundary curves as shown below.
Sketch Boundary Curves (shown in red).

7.
8. Click Finish Sketch to exit the Sketcher.
9. Choose Edit View View Boundary.
10. Select the detail view.

11. Choose Break Line/Detail.
12. From the Label on Parent View drop-down menu, choose Boundary.
13. Choose Chain.
14. Select all the Sketch curves.

15. Choose OK. Results: the software creates a detail boundary view.
Detail Boundary View (right)
Section Line Overview
Edit View Section Line allows you to edit an existing section line. You can use this option to add,
delete, or move segments of a section line. You can also use it to redefine an existing hinge line, or to
move the rotation point of a revolved section view.
For unfolded section lines the dialog labels read Add Point, Delete Point, and Move Point instead
of Add Segment, Delete Segment, and Move Segment.
Edit Section Line Options
Select Section Selects a section view in preparation for editing a section line.
View
View Selection List Located directly below the Select Section View option, the View Selection List lets
you select a section view from the current drawing.
Add Segment Adds a new cut segment to a section line.
Delete Segment Deletes a segment from a section line.
Move Segment Moves individual segments of a section line.
Move Rotation Edits the rotation point for a revolved section view.
Point
Redefine Hinge Edits a section view's hinge line.

Line
Redefine Cut Edits the cut vector from the section cut view of a pictorial member view. This option
Vector is only available when you edit a pictorial section line. Both the Reverse Vector and
Vector Construction options are available with this option.
Redefine Arrow Edits the arrow vector from the section cut view of a pictorial member view. This
Vector option is only available when you edit a pictorial section line. Both the Reverse
Vector and Vector Construction options are available with this option.
Cut Angle Edits the cut angle of an unfolded section line when using either the Add Segment or
Move Segment options.
Point Defines point locations by choosing from a variety of methods.

Construction
Options
Vector Defines vectors by choosing from a variety of methods.

Construction
Options
Reverse Vector Reverses the section line arrow direction when you are using the Redefine Hinge
Line option.
Associative Makes the hinge line associative to geometry. When the geometry for the hinge line
Hinge Line changes the section view orients itself to the hinge line angle.
Reset Undoes your section line edits and allows you to start over.
Common Concepts
Section lines and section views are associative. Changes made to the section line can affect the section
view. After you edit a section line and choose the Apply or OK button, the section view automatically
updates. The following figure shows an example of a part whose section line now includes a second hole
after editing.
Section Line Associativity
Components of a Section Line

When using EditSection Line you can Add, Delete, or Move individual segments of the section line.
Section Lines are made up of Cut, Arrow, and Bend Segments.
Components of a Section Line - Cut, Arrow, and Bend Segments
Arrow Segment
Cut Segment
Bend Segment
Move Segment
This option allows you to move individual segments of a section line while maintaining the angle and
connection to adjacent segments (see the following figure). Segments that may be moved include cut
segments, bend segments, and arrow segments. To move a segment you must:
1. Select the section line you want to edit. The bounds of the section view highlights.
2. Select the Move Segment option.
3. Select the segment you want to move. For point to point unfolded section lines, select a segment
close to the point you want to move. The selected segment highlights.
4. Indicate a new location for the segment using the appropriate Point Construction option.
5. Click Apply or OK to change the currently selected section line and update the section view.
For half section views, if you move a cut segment outside the bounds of the geometry box a warning
message displays and the software reverts back to the original half section.
Original Section Line New Section Line with Moved Cut Segment
Select the Segment you want to Indicate a New Position to Move Segment. Use the Point
Move Position Options.
Delete Segment
This option allows you to delete a cut segment from a section line (see the following figure). You can also
delete user-defined bend and arrow segments. To delete a segment you must:
1. Select the section line you want to edit. The bounds of the section view highlights.
2. Select the Delete Segment option.
3. Select the segment you want to delete. For point to point unfolded section lines, select a segment
close to the point you want to delete.
4. Choose Apply or OK to change the currently selected section line, and update the section view.
This option is not intended to delete the entire section line. You must delete the associated section
view using the right mouse buttonDelete to delete the section line.
This option can be used to change a user-defined arrow or bend segment to a software-defined
segment. See details on the differences between these two types.
Redefine Hinge Line
This option allows you to edit a section view's hinge line. If geometry that defines the hinge line was
suppressed or deleted the hinge line displays as retained. After you redefine the hinge line and update
the view, the section view reorients itself to the hinge line if necessary.
Associative Hinge Line Option
To make the section view associative to the hinge line, select Associative Hinge Line. The Associative
Hinge Line Option is on when the hinge line is associative; otherwise, the Associative Hinge Line option is
off.
For example, Associative Hinge Line is on and suppose you select a linear edge to define the hinge line.
If the angle of that linear edge changes, the section view changes based on the new hinge line angle.
Redefining a Hinge Line
The following steps describe how to use the Redefine Hinge Line option.
1. Select the section line to edit. The view bounds of the section view highlights.
2. Select the Redefine Hinge Line option.
3. Select a new hinge line using the Vector Construction options. When you select the hinge line,
an arrow displays which indicates the direction of the section line arrows.
4. Select or Clear the Associative Hinge Line option. Selecting this option makes the hinge line
associative.
5. Click Apply to reorient the section view using the new hinge line. Note that if Preferences
Drafting View Delay View Update is on the view does not reorient and the drawing
becomes out-of-date.
Section Components in View
Edit View Section Components in View allows you to edit assembly components of a Section View
to be either sectioned or non-sectioned. For multiple occurrences of a component in a section view, you
can specify individual occurrences to have either sectioned or non-sectioned properties. This option
allows you to:
control the sectioning of individual components within different views in the drawing.
edit the sectioning properties (sectioned or non-sectioned) of an occurrence of a component in a

Section View and takes precedence over the component's user-defined part attribute (if it exists).
For more details on the user-defined part attribute (section-component) see Section Views in
Assembly Drawings.
Section Components in View Options
Selection Step Provides two selection step icons, Select View and Select Component. The
Icons highlighted icon indicates the current step.
Section View Allows you to select a view from the list box. You can also select a view from the
Name list box graphics window.
Make Non- Allows you to make components in a view non-sectioned.

Sectioned
Make Sectioned Allows you to make components in a view sectioned.
Remove View Removes the view specific sectioning property from selected components. You can
Specific use Information Other View to show view specific sectioning properties. This
information option lists the number of sectioned and non-sectioned components in the
specified view.
All Occurrences Allows you to include all occurrences of the selected component in a view. After you
in View select the first occurrence, you can toggle this option on to select all of the occurrences
of that component.
Action Buttons Action buttons include OK, Apply, and Cancel.
How to Edit Section Components in a View

Default Sectioned Assembly View
Non-Sectioned Occurrences
To edit section components in a View:

1. Choose EditView Section Components in View.
2. Choose a sectioning property (for example, Make Non-Sectioned).
3. Select a view. You can select a view from the Graphics window or from the View Name list box.
4. Select component(s). You can choose All Occurrences in View to select all of the component's
occurrences. You can use Shift+the left mouse button to deselect occurrences.
6. Choose Edit ViewUpdate Views.
7. Choose All from the Update Views dialog.
9. The drawing view updates with the specified sectioning property.
Update views:
Any modification in the part file , to update in the drawing sheet we use update option.
Suppose if we increase the length of the box in the part file by selecting start >modeling> double click on
the model change the length, later click on start drawing , the views on the drawing sheet will not be
updated as mentioned below.
Now click on edit views > update views icon> select all the views in the list >ok.
After updating the views
MANUFACTURING
AswediscussedinChapter1abouttheproductrealizationprocess,themodelsanddrawings
createdbythedesignerhavetoundergootherprocessestogettothefinishedproduct.Thisbeing
the essence ofCAD/CAM integration, the mostwidely andcommonly usedtechnique is to
generate programcodesforCNCmachines tomill thepart.Thistechnological development
reduces the amount of human intervention in creating CNC codes. This also facilitates the
designerstocreatecomplexsystems.Inthischapter,wewillcovertheManufacturingModuleof
NX5togenerateCNCcodesfor3AxisVerticalMachiningCenters.Themanufacturingmodule
allowsyoutoprogramanddosomepostprocessingondrilling,milling,turningandwirecut
edmtoolpaths.
GETTINGSTARTEDWITHMANUFACTURINGMODULE
AfewpreparatorystepsneedtobeperformedoneveryCADmodelbeforemovingitintothe
CAMenvironment.Throughoutthischapter,wearegoingtoworkwithoneofthemodelsthat
weregivenintheexerciseproblems.Forachange,alltheunitsarefollowedinmillimetersin
thismodelandmanufacturingofthecomponent.
Beforegettingstarted,itwouldbehelpfulifyoucangetintoaCAMExpressRole.Todothis,
gotothe Roles menuonthe ResourceBar andclickonthe INDUSTRYSPECIFIC tab.A
dropdownmenuwillpopupinwhichthe CAMExpress rolecanbeseenasshowninthe
figure.
CreationofaBlank
Aftercompletingthemodeling,youshoulddecideupontherawmaterialshapeandsizethat
needstobeloadedonthemachinefortheactualmachining.ThisdatahastobeinputinNX5.
Thiscanbeachievedintwoways.Thefirstmethodisbycreatingorimportingthemodelofthe
rawmaterialasaseparatesolidinthesamefileandassigningthatsolidastheBlank.Thesecond
methodisbylettingthesoftwaredecidetheextremedimensionsofthedesignedpartandsome
offsetvaluesifwanted.Thelatermethodallowsaquickwayofassigningtherawsizedetailsbut
itcanonlybeusedforprismaticshapes.
OpenthefileDie_cavity.prtoftheexerciseprobleminChapter6
ClickonSTARTMODELING
Createablockwiththefollowingdimensionsand
positioning.Length=150mm
Width=100mm
Height=80mm
UsingthePointConstructoriconlocatedonthetoolbarasshown:
Positiontheblockatthepoint(75,50,80).Thisblockenclosestheentiredesignpartsowe
willchangethedisplaypropertiesoftheblock.
ClickontheEDITOBJECTDIPLAYicononthetoolbarasshown.
Twofeatures,labeledasBLOCK,showupintheQUICKPICKmenu,oneforthedesignpart
andonefortheblock.
Moveyourmouseonthelabelstoseewhichonerepresentstheblock
Selecttheblockyoucreated
ClickOK
Whenthewindowpopsup,changethedisplaycolorandchangetheTranslucencyto50
ThenclickOK
HidetheblockyoujustcreatedbyrightclickingontheblockinthePartNavigator.Thiswill
maketherawblockdisappearfromtheenvironment.Wheneveryouwanttovieworworkon
thissolid,reversetheblanks.Thisisdonebypressing<Ctrl>+<Shift>+B.
SettingMachiningEnvironment
NowwearesettogetintotheManufacturingmodule.
SelectSTARTMANUFACTURING
AwindowwillpopupaskingfortheMachiningEnvironmentSetup.Therearemanydifferent
customized CAM sessions available for different machining operations. Here, we are only
interestedintheMillingoperation.
ForCAMSessionConfiguration,selectcam_generalandforCAMSetup,select
mill_contour.ThiswindowpopsupwhenyoustarttheManufacturingApplication
ClickINITIALIZE
9.1.3OperationNavigator
AssoonasyougetintotheManufacturingenvironment,youwillnoticemanychangesinthe
mainscreensuchasnewiconsthataredisplayed.
ClickontheOPERATIONNAVIGATORtabontherightontheRESOURCEBAR
TheOperationNavigatorgivesinformationabouttheprogramscreatedandcorresponding
informationaboutthecutters,methods,andstrategies.
Thelistofprogramscanbeviewedindifferentcategoricallists.Therearefourwaysofviewing
the list of programs in the Operation Navigator. The four views are Program Order view,
MachineToolview,GeometryviewandMachiningMethodview.Ifyouwanttoviewthelistof
programsunderdifferentcuttertools,youcandosobyclickingtheparticulariconinthetop
toolbar.
MachineCoordinateSystem(MCS)ClickontheGeometryViewiconinthetoolbarto
initiatesetupforprogramming
OntheOperationNavigatorwindow,doubleclickonMCS_MILL
ApopupwindowwillallowyoutosettheMCShowever,youwant.NX5bydefaulttakesthe
originalWCSastheMCS.
Clickonthebuttonshown.ThiswillhighlightthedefaultWCSofthepartandassignitasthe
MCS
ClickOKtoselectitastheMCS
ClickOKwhenyouaredoneorientingandpositioningtheMCS
GeometryDefinition
DoubleclickonWORKPIECEintheOperationNavigator.Ifyoudontseeit,clickonthe
plussignnexttoMCS_MILL
ThepopupwindowMILL_GEOMappears.Thisiswhereyoucanassignthepartgeometry,
blankgeometry,andcheckgeometryifany.
ClickontheParticonSelectthedesignpartandclickOK
NowwehavetoselecttheBlankGeometry.
ClicktheBlankicon
ThiswillopentheBlankGeometryWindow.Asmentionedearliertherearemanywaystoassign
theblank.YoucanuseasolidgeometryastheBlankorcanallowthe
softwaretoassignaprismaticblockwithdesiredoffsetsin
theX,Y,andZdirections.Aswehavealreadycreateda
RectangularSolidGeometry,wecanusethatastheBlank
geometry.Rememberthatourblockishidden.
Retrievetheblockbypressing<Ctrl>+<Shift>+B
IntheBlankGeometrywindow,makesuretheGeometry
radiobuttonisselected
SelecttheblockandclickOK
Bring the part geometry back by pressing <Ctrl> +

<Shift>+Bonceagain
ClickOKontheMILL_GEOMdialogbox
NowwearefinishedassigningthePartandBlankgeometries.
SometimesitmayberequiredtoassignCheckgeometry.
Thisoptionismoreusefulforshapesthataremorecomplexor
5AxesMillingoperationswheretheToolcuttershavea
higherchanceofdashingwiththefixtures.Inourcase,it
isnotveryimportanttoassignaCheckGeometry.
CREATINGOPERATIONANDPARAMETERSETTING
CreatinganewOperation
TheManufacturingsetupisnowreadyforustoworkfurtherwithProgrammingStrategies.
Therearemanydifferentstrategiesinvolvedinprogrammingandittakespracticetoknowwhich
oneisthemostefficient.Here,thebasicguidelinesaregivenforthemostwidelyandfrequently
used strategies. The chapter will also cover important parameters that are to be set for the
programstofunctionproperly.
ClickontheCreateOperationiconinthetoolbarasshown
TheCreateOperationwindowwillpopup.
MakesuretheTypeofOperationismill_contour
TherearemanydifferentsubtypesunderMillContour,namelyCavityMill,ZLevelFollow
Cavity,FollowCore,FixedContour,andsoon.Thesedifferentsubtypesareusedfordifferent
situationsandprofilesofthedesignpart.Asmentionedbefore,howyouselectastrategyforany
situationdependsonyourexperience.
ClickontheCAVITY_MILLiconatthetopleftasshowninthe
figureChangetheProgramfromNC_PROGRAMtoPROGRAM
ChangetheUseGeometrytoWORKPIECE
The thedefault
program name
takes
CAVITY_MILL
ClickOK
Theprogramparameters windowwithCAVITY_MILLinthetitle barwillpopup.Onthis

window,youcansetalltheparametersfortheprogram.Abriefintroductiononeveryimportant
parameterandterminologywillbegivenaswegothroughthesequence.
ToolCreationandSelection
Oneofthemostimportantdecisionstomakeisselectingtherightshapeandsizeofthetoolto
use.BeforestartingwiththeToolparametersettings,wemustfirstknowaboutthetypesofTool
cutters.TheMillingtoolcuttersarecategorizedintothreemainformsofcutters.Whenselecting
acutter,itisimportanttotakeintoconsiderationthesize,shape,andprofilesofthedesignparts.
Forexample,ifthecornerradiusofapocketis5mm,thepocketshouldbefinishedbyacutter
withdiameterlessthanorequalto10mm.Otherwiseitwillleavematerialatthecorners.There
areotherspecialformsofcuttersavailableinmarketsthataremanufacturedtosuitthisneed.
FlatEndMillCutters:
Thesecuttershaveasharptipattheendofthecutterasshowninthefigure.Thesecuttersare
usedforfinishingpartsthathaveflatverticalwallswithsharpedgesattheintersectionofthe
floorsandwalls.
BallEndMill:
Thesecuttershavethecornerradiiexactlyequaltohalfthediameteroftheshank.Thisformsthe
ballshapedprofileattheend.Thesecuttersareusedforroughingandfinishingoperationsof
Bull Nose
Cutters:
Thesecuttershavesmallcornerradiiandarewidelyusedforroughingand/orsemifinishingthe
partsaswellasforfinishingofinclinedandtaperedwalls.
ThecutterthatwearegoingtousetoroughoutthishugevolumeisBUEM12X1(BullnoseEnd
Millwith12diameterand1cornerradius).
IntheCAVITY_MILLpopupmenuclickon
the
CreateNewbuttonintheTOOL,dialogbox
ClickNEW
OntheNewToolwindow,selecttheMillicon
TypeinBUEM12X1astheNameandclickOK
Thiswillopenanotherwindowtoenterthecutterdimensionsandparameters.Youcanalso
customizethelistoftoolsthatyouwouldnormallyuseandcallthecuttersfromthelibrary.
Enterthevaluesasshowninthefigurebelow.
ClickOKIntheCAVITY_MILLmenuclickonthePathSettingsoption
9.2.4ToolPathSettings
Therearedifferentoptionsinwhichthetoolcanmove.Thefollowingisadescriptionofeach.
ZigZag:Thistooltakesazigzagpathateverylevelofdepth.Itsavestimebyreducing
amountofaircuttingtime(idlerunning).Theclimbandconventionalcutsalternate
Zig:Thistakesalinearpathinonlyonedirectionofflow.
ZigwithContour:Thistakesthepathinonedirectioneitherclimborconventional.Theunique
thingisthatitmovesalongthecontourshapenonlinearly.
FollowPeriphery:Thistakesthepathdependingupontheperipheryprofile.Forexample,
theouterperipheryofourpartisrectangular.Sothetoolpathwillbegeneratedsuchthatit
graduallycutsthematerialfromoutsidetoinsidewiththeStepovervalue.Thisoptionismostly
usedforprojectionsandcoresratherthancavities.
Follow Part: This is the most optimal strategy where the tool path is manipulated
depending on the part geometry. If there are cores and cavities in the part, the computer
intelligentlyconsidersthemtoremovethematerialsinanoptimalway.Thisiswidelyusedfor
roughingoperations.
Trochoidal: Thiscutterishugeandisusedforremovingalargeamountofmaterial.The
bulkofmaterialisremovedbygradualtrochoidalmovements.Thedepthofcutusedwillbevery
highforthisstrategy.
Profile:Thistakesthecutonlyalongtheprofileofthepartgeometry.Itisusedforsemi
finishingorfinishingoperations.
Forthisexercise,selecttheFollowParticonfromtheCutPatterndropdownmenusincewe
havebothprojectionsandcavitiesinourpart.
StepOverandScallopHeight:
StepOver:
This is the distance between the consecutive passes of

milling.Itcanbegivenasafixedvalueorthevaluein
terms of cutter diameter. The stepover should not be
greaterthantheeffectivediameterofthecutterotherwise;
itwillleaveextramaterialateverylevelofcutandresult
inanincompletemillingoperation.Thenumericvalueor
values required to define the stepover will vary
dependingonthestepoveroptionselected.Theseoptions
include Constant, Scallop, Tool Diameter, etc. For
example,Constantrequiresyoutoenteradistancevalue
inthesubsequentline.
ScallopHeight:
ScallopHeightcontrolsthedistancebetweenparallelpassesaccordingtothemaximumheightof
material(scallop)youspecifytobeleftbetweenpasses.Thisisaffectedbythecutterdefinition
andthecurvatureofthesurface.ScallopallowsthesystemtodeterminetheStepoverdistance
basedonthescallopheightyouenter.
FortheStepover,selectTOOLDIAMETERandchangethePercentto70.
Depthpercut
Thisisthevaluetobegivenbetweenlevelstoslicethegeometryintolayersandthetoolpath
cutsasperthegeometryateverylayer.Thecutdepthvaluecanvaryforeachlevel.Levelsare
horizontal planes parallel to the XY plane. If we do not give cut levels, the software will
unnecessarilytrytocalculateslicesfortheentirepartandmachineareasthatarenotinour
interest.
ChangetheGlobalDepthperCutvaluetobe0.5
Nowwewilladdthelevelranges.ThiswillsplitthepartintodifferentlevelsalongtheZ
directiontobemachined.
ClickonCUTLEVELSasshownbelowThiswillpopupaDialogboxforCutlevels.Onthis
thereareupanddownarrowbuttonsthatcanbeusedtoviewtherangeofthedifferentlevels.
WearenotgoingtomilluptothebottommostfaceofthePart,butuptothefloorat40mmfrom
top.Therefore,wemustdeletethelastlevel.
UsetheupanddownscrollbuttonsuntilyoureachthelevelthathasaRangeDepthof80
ClickontheDeleteicon
todeletethislevelSelectOKaftermakingtheseadjustments
CuttingParametersOntheparameterswindow,clickCUTTINGPARAMETERS
Thispopsupanotherdialogbox.UndertheStrategytabbutton,changetheCutOrderfrom
LevelFirsttoDEPTHFIRST
ChangingthecutordertoDepthFirstordersthesoftwaretogeneratethetoolpathsuchthatit
willmilloneislandcompletelyuptothebottommostdepthbeforejumpingtoanotherlevel.The
DepthFirststrategyreducesthenoncuttingtimeoftheprogramduetounnecessaryretractsand
engagesateverydepthofcut.
ClickontheStocktab
ChangethevalueofthePartSideStockto0.5
Thisvalueistheallowancegiventoeverysideofthepart.Ifyouwanttogivedifferentvalues
tothefloors(ortheflathorizontalfaces)unchecktheboxnexttoUseFloorSameAsSide
andenteradifferentvalueforPartFloorStock.
ChooseOK
AvoidanceClicktheNONCUTTINGMOVESClicktheAVOIDANCEtabThis
windowconsistsofmanyavoidancepointslike,StartPoint,GoHomePoint,etc.Ofthese,
weareconcernedwiththreepoints.Theyareasfollows.
FromPoint:
Thisisthepointatwhichthetoolchangecommandwillbecarriedout.Thevalueisnormally50
or100mmabovetheZ=0leveltoenhancethesafetyofthejobwhenthecutterischangedbythe
AutomaticToolChanger(ATC).
ClickFROMPOINTChooseSPECIFYInthePointConstructor,enterthecoordinates
ofXC,YCandZCas(0,0,50)ChooseOKChooseOKagaintogobacktotheAvoidance
window
StartPoint:
Thisisthepointatwhichtheprogramstartsandends.Thisvalueisalso50or100mmabove
theZ=0leveltoenhancesafety.Itisalsothepointatwhichthemachineoperatorchecksthe
heightofthetoolmountedonthespindlewithrespecttotheZ=0levelfromthejob.Thiscross
checksthetooloffsetenteredinthemachine.
ClickonSTARTPOINTChooseSPECIFYEnterthecoordinates(0,0,50)inthePoint
ConstructorClickOK
ClearancePlane:
Thisistheplane,onwhichthetoolcutterwillretractbeforemovingtothenextregionorisland.
This can also be known as retract plane. Sometimes the clearance plane is considered the
previouscuttingplane.However,whenthetoolhastomovefromoneregiontoanother,itis
necessarytomovetotheclearanceplanebeforedoingso.Thevalueoftheclearanceplane
shouldbeatleast2mmabovethetopmostpointoftherawpieceorfixtureorwhicheverisfixed
tothemachinebed.
ClickontheTRANSFER/RAPIDtab
ChoosePLANEintheCLEARANCEOPTION
EntertheOffsetvalueas3inthePlaneconstructorwindow
ClickontheXYPlaneicontowardthebottomofthewindow
ClickOKtwicetogobacktotheparameterswindow
9.2.8SpeedsandFeeds
ChooseFEEDSANDSPEEDStoenterthefeedandspeedparameters
Speed:
Speednormallyspecifiestherpmofthespindle(spindle
speed).However,technicallythespeedreferstothe
cuttingspeedofthetool(surfacespeed).Itisthelinear
velocityofthecuttingtipofthecutter.Therelative
parametersaffectingthislinearspeedarerpmofthe
spindleandthediameterofthecutter(effectivediameter).
EntertheSpindleSpeedvalueas4500rpm
FortheSurfaceSpeedandtheFeedperTooth,youshouldentertherecommendedvalues
givenbythemanufacturersofthecutter.Byenteringthesevalues,thesoftwarewill
automaticallycalculatethecuttingfeedrateandspindlespeed.Youcanalsoenteryourown
valuesforfeedratesandspindlespeeds.
Feeds:
Therearemanyfeedsinvolvedinasingleprogram.ThemostimportantistheCuttingfeed.Thisis
thefeedatwhich,thetoolwillbeinengagementwiththerawworkpieceandactuallycutting
thematerialofftheworkpiece.Itistherelativelinearvelocity,atwhichthecuttermoves
withrespecttothejob.
Theotherfeedsareoptional.Somemachinecontrolsystemsusetheirdefaultretractsand
traversefeed.Inthosecases,evenifyoudonotenterthevaluesofotherfeeds,therewouldnot
beanyproblems.Somecontrolsystemsmaylookforthesefeedratesfromtheprogram.Itcan
beslightlylessthanthemachinesmaximumfeedrate.
Forthisexercise,enterthevaluesasshowninthe
figure.MakesuretoentertheCutvalueas1200
mmpm
ClickOK
PROGRAMGENERATIONANDVERIFICATION
GeneratingProgram
Nowwearedoneenteringalltheparametersrequiredfortheroughingprogram.Itistimeto
generatetheprogram.
ClickontheGenerateiconatthebottomofthewindow
Youcannowobservethesoftwareslicingthemodelintodepthsofcutsandcreatingtoolpathat
everylevel.Youcanfindonthemodelcyan,blue,redandyellowlinesasshowninthefigure.
Duringthegeneration,youwillbepromptedwithaDisplayParameterswindow.
UnchecktheboxnexttoPauseAfterEachPath
ThenclickOKtoseethedisplayofcutlevelsandtoolpaths
Afterthegenerationisdone,clickOKintheparameterswindow
ToolPathDisplay
Wheneveryouwanttoviewtheentiretoolpathoftheprogram,rightclickontheprogramin
OperationNavigatorandclickReplay.ItwillgivethedisplayasshownintheFigure.
You can now observe that next to the program in the Operation Navigator is a yellow
exclamation point instead of a red mark. This means that program has been generated
successfullybuthasnotbeenpostprocessed.Ifanychangeismadeinthemodel,theprogram
willagainhavearedmarknexttoit.Thisimpliesthattheprogramhastobegeneratedagain.
However,thereisnoneedtochangeanyparametersintheprogram.
ToolPathSimulation
Itisveryimportanttochecktheprogramsyouhavecreated.Thispreventsanyimproperand
dangerousmotionsfrombeingmadeinthecuttingpath.Itispossiblethatwrongparametersand
settingswillbegiventhatcausecostlydamagestotheworkpiece.Toavoidsuchmistakes,NX5
andotherCAMsoftwareprovideToolpathverificationandaGougecheck.
Verify:
TheToolPathverificationcanbeusedtoviewthecuttermotionintheentireprogram.Youcan
observehowthetoolisengagedandhowitretractsaftercutting.Italsoshowstheactualmaterial
beingremovedthroughgraphicalsimulation.Youcanalsoviewthespecificzoneofinterestby
movingthelineoftheprogram.
RightclickontheprogramintheOperationNavigatorandchooseTOOLPATH
VERIFYorclickontheVerifyToolPathbuttoninthetoolbar
Youcanalsoviewthevisualizationin
differentmodesbychangingtheoptionsin
thedropdownmenunexttoDisplay.
Clickonthe3DDYNAMICtabonthe
samewindowClickontheDISPLAY
OPTIONSbuttononthesamewindow
ChangetheNumberofMotionsto50
ChangetheAnimationAccuracyto
FINE
ChangetheIPWColortoGreenClickOKClickonthePlaybutton
againThesimulationwilllookasshowninthefigurebelow.
Withthisoption,youwillbeabletoviewtheactualcuttingsimulationandmaterialremovalthrough
computergraphics.Thisis3DDynamic,whereyoucanrotate,panandzoomthesimulationwhenit
isplaying.Thecuttingsimulationis3D.Letustrythe2DDynamicsimulation.Whenthis
simulationisplaying,youcannotdoanyotheractionsinNX5.Unlike3D,
youcannotrotateorzoomwhileplaying.Ifyouwanttoseetheothersideofthepart,you
havetostopthesimulation,rotateandplayagain.Thisisfasterthan3DDynamic.
GougeCheck
GougeCheckisusedtoverifywhetherthetoolisremovinganyexcessmaterialfromtheraw
materialwithrespecttoPartGeometry.ConsideringaDesignTolerance,anymanufacturing
processmayproducedefectivepartsbytwoways.Oneisremovingexcessmaterial,whichis
alsocalledLessMaterialCondition.Theotheroneisleavingmaterialsthataresupposedtobe
removedwhichisMoreMaterialCondition.Inmostcases,theformerismoredangeroussince
itisimpossibletoreworkthedesignpart.Thelatterissafersincetheleftovermaterialcanbe
removedbyreworkingthepart.Thegougecheckoptionchecksfortheformercasewherethe
excessremovalofmaterialwillbeidentified.
RightClicktheprogramintheOperationNavigator
ChooseTOOLPATHGOUGECHECK
Afterthegougecheckiscompleted,amessageboxwillpop
upsayingNogougedmotionswerefound.Ifincasethere
areanygougesfound,itisnecessarytocorrecttheprogram.
ClickOKonthemessagebox
Closethepopupwindow,whichsaysthatthereareno
gaugemotionsfound.
OPERATIONMETHODS
Roughing
Anymillingoperationshouldberoughmilledbeforefinishingthejob.Thispracticeisstrictly
followedinindustry.Themainpurposeofroughingistoremovebulkmaterialatafasterrate,
without affecting the accuracy andfinish ofthejob. Stockallowances are giventoprovide
enoughmaterialforthefinishingoperationtogetanaccurateandgoodfinishjob.Whatwedid
inthepreviouschapterisgeneratearoughingprogram.Nowwehavetomoderatelyremoveall
theunevenmaterialleftoverfromthepreviousprogram.
SemiFinishing
SemiFinishingprogramsareintendedtoremovetheunevenmaterialandkeepevenpartstock
allowancefortheFinishingoperations.Oncewearedonewiththefirstroughingprogram,semi
finishingisalwayseasierandsimplertoperform.
NowwewillcopyandpastethefirstprogramintheOperationNavigator.Inthenewprogram,
youonlyhavetochangeafewparametersandcuttingtooldimensionsandjustregeneratethe
program.
RightclickCAVITY_MILLprogramintheOperationNavigatorandclickCOPY
RightclickCAVITY_MILLagainandchoosePASTE
RightclickthesecondCAVITY_MILL_COPYyoujustmadeandclickRENAME.Rename
thesecondprogramCAVITY_MILL_1
Youcanseethatnexttothenewlycreated CAVITY_MILL_1isaredmark,whichindicates
thattheprogramisnotgenerated.
CutterSelection:
Letusnowsettheparametersthatneedtobechangedforthesecondprogram.Beforeweeven
start,weshouldanalyzethepartGeometrytofigureouttheminimumcornerradiusforthecutter
diameter.Inourmodel,itis5mmandattheflooredges,itis1mm.Therefore,thecutter
diametercanbeanythinglessthan10mm.Foroptimaloutputandrigidity,wewillchooseaBull
NoseCutterwithadiameterof10andalowerradiusof1.
DoubleclickCAVITY_MILL_1onOperationNavigatortoopentheparameterswindow
Justaswedidinthepreviousprogram,wehavetocreateanewcutter.IntheTOOLtab,you
willseethecutteryoufirstchose.
ItwillshowBUEM12X1asthecurrenttool.
CreateanewcutterandnameitBUEM10X1.It
shouldhaveadiameterof10andalowerradiusof
1ClicktheGlobalDepthperCutas0.25inthe
PathSettings
tab.ThenclickonCUTTINGPARAMETERStabClickontheSTOCKtabbutton
UnchecktheboxnexttoUseFloorSameAsSideEnter0.25forPartSideStockEnter
0.1forPartFloorStock
ClickontheCONTAINMENTtabbuttonInthedropdownmenunexttoInProcess
Workpiece,chooseUSE3D
InProcess Workpiece is a very useful option in NX5. The software considers the previous
programandgeneratesthecurrentprogramsuchthatthereisnounnecessarycuttingmotionin
theNomaterialzone.Thisstrategyreducesthecuttingtimeandaircuttingmotiondrastically.
Thealgorithmwillmakethecutteronlyremovethematerialleftinthepreviousprogramand
maintainthecurrentpartstockallowance.
ChooseOKtoreturntotheparameterswindowClickFEEDSANDSPEEDSEnterthe
SpeedandFeedvaluesasshowninthe
followingfigures
ThenclickOK
Theparametersandsettingsarefinishedforthesemi
finishingprogram.
Regeneratetheprogrambyclickingonthe GenerateiconAfterthesoftwarefinishes
generatingclickOK
ThenreplaytheToolPathvisualization.TheoverallToolPathgeneratedinthesecondprogram
willlooklikethefollowingfigure.
FinishingProfile
Sofar,wearedonewiththeroughingandsemifinishingprogramsforthepart.Thereisa
sufficientamountofmaterialleftintheWorkpiecetoberemovedinthefinishingprogramsto
obtaintheaccuratepartgeometryasintendedinthedesign.Thefinishingprogramsshouldbe
generatedsuchthateverysurfaceinthepartshouldbeproperlymachined.Therefore,itisbetter
tocreatemorethanoneprogramtouniquely machine setsofsurfaces withrelevant cutting
parameters and strategies rather than make one program for all the surfaces. The following
illustrateshowtogrouptheprofilesandsurfacesandcreatethefinishingprograms.
OuterProfile:
Thisprogramisintendedtofinishtheouterinclinedwallsontothebottomofthefloor.Because
theprogramshouldnottouchthecontoursurfaceonthetop,wehavetogiveCheckandTrim
boundariesintheprogram.
Repeatthesameprocedureasbeforetocopyand
pasteCAVITY_MILL_1onOperationNavigator
RenametheprogramCAVITY_MILL_2
DoubleclickCAVITY_MILL_2tomakeparameter
changes
Inthepopupparameterswindow,changetheCutPatterntoProfileandtheStepover
percentageto40asshowninthefigure
ClickontheSpecifyTrimBoundariestab
TheTrimBoundarywindowwillpopup.Makesuretocarryoutthefollowingprocedureinthe
rightsequence.KeepthedefaultsettingofTRIMSIDEtoINSIDE.
Thistellsthesoftwarethatthecuttershouldnotcutmaterialanywhereinsidetheboundary.Trim
allowsyoutospecifyboundariesthatwillfurtherconstrainthecutregionsateachcutlevel.
UnchecktheIgnoreHolesandchecktheboxinfrontofIgnoreIslands
ChangeFilterTypetoCURVES
ChangethePlanetabfromAutomatictoManual
Anewwindowwillpopupasshownbelow.Thewindowwillaskforthe
modeofselectionoftheplaneonwhichthecurvesshouldbeprojected.
This should normally be over the topmost point of the part geometry.
Precisely,itshouldbeovertheMCS.
ClickontheZCConstanticonunderPrincipal
Planes
Enteravalueof3nexttoit
ClickOKNowwewillstartselectingedgesfromthepart.Theseselectededgeswill
beprojectedontheZ=3planeascurvesandusedastheboundary.
Selectallthetopouteredgesonthewallalongthecontoursurfaceasshowninthe
figure.Makesuretoselectall8edgesandinacontinuousorder
ChooseOK
EntertheGlobalDepthperCutas0.2ClickCUTTINGPARAMETERSInthepopup
Dialogbox,clickonSTOCKtabEnterthePartSideStockandPartFloorStockvaluesto
be0.00
Intol:
Intolallowsyoutospecifythemaximumdistancethatacuttercandeviatefromtheintended
pathintotheworkpiece.
Outtol:
Outtolallowsyoutospecifythemaximumdistancethatacuttercandeviatefromthe
intendedpathawayfromtheworkpiece.
EntertheIntolandOuttolvaluestobe0.001asshowninthefigure
ClickonCONTAINMENTtabChangetheInprocessWorkpiecetoNONE
ClickOKClickontheGenerateicon
togeneratetheprogramintheMainParameterswindow
ClickOKontheparameterswindowwhentheprogramgenerationiscompleted
Thefinishingprogramfortheouterprofileisnowready.Youcanobservewhilereplayingthe
toolpaththatthecutternevercrossestheboundarythathasbeengivenfortrimandcheck.The
cutterretractstotheZ=3planeforrelocation.
Innerprofile:
Repeat the same procedure as before to copy and paste CAVITY_MILL_2 on Operation
Navigator.RenametheprogramCAVITY_MILL_3.Wewillrepeatthesameprocedureasfor
CAVITY_MILL_2butthistimewewillselecttheinnerloopastheboundary.
DoubleclickCAVITY_MILL_3toedittheparametersorrightclickonitandchooseEdit
SelecttheSpecifyTrimBoundariestabandchooseTrimSidetobeOUTSIDEinthePopup
dialogbox.
Thiswillpreventthecutterfrompassingoutsidetheboundary.
SelecttheFilterMethodtobeCURVES
ChangetheplanemanuallytobetheZCplaneandentertheoffsetdistanceas3
ClickOK
Selectallthetopinneredgesalongthecontoursurfaceasshowninthefigure.Again,make
sureall8edgesareselectedinacontinuousorder
ThenclickOK
ChooseOKtoreturntotheparameterswindow
Generatetheprogram.ClickOKwhenthegenerationisfinished.ClickonOKifyougetany
warningmessageaboutthetoolfitting
Thefinishingprogramfortheouterprofileisnowready.Byreplayingthetoolpath,youcan
observethatthecutternevercrossestheboundarythathasbeengivenfortrimandcheck.
FinishingContourSurface
Nowwehavetouseadifferenttypeofstrategytofinish
thetopfreeformsurface.
ClickontheCreateOperationiconToolbar
ThenclickontheFIXED_CONTOURiconasshowninthefigure
ChoosePROGRAMforProgram
ChooseWORKPIECEforGeometry
Keepthedefaultnameofprogram
ClickOK
Ontheparameterswindow,underDriveMethod,selectBOUNDARYevenifitisalready
shown
SelecttheToolPositiontobeON
Thetoolpositiondetermineshowthetoolwillpositionitselfwhenitapproachestheboundary
member.Boundarymembersmaybeassignedoneofthreetoolpositions:On,Tanto,orContact.
InanONposition,thecenterpointofthetoolalignswiththeboundaryalongthe
toolaxisorprojectionvector.
InaTantoposition,thesideofthetoolalignswiththeboundary.
InaContactposition,thetoolcontactstheboundary.ForthePlane,chooseUSER
DEFINEDAgain,settheplanetobeZ=3ClickOKSelecttheouterloopofthetop
contoursurfaceasshowninthefigure.Remembertoselect
theedgesinacontinuousorder.
ClickOKWehavetrimmedthegeometryoutsidetheloop.Nowwe
havetotrimthegeometryinsidetheinnerloopsothattheonlygeometryleftwillbethearea
betweenthetwoloops.ChoosetheModetobeCURVES/EDGESChoosetheMaterialSide
tobeINSIDEandTool
PositiontobeONChoosetheplanetobeuserdefinedatZ=3
Selecttheinneredgesofthecontoursurfaceasshown
ClickOKtwicetoreturntotheBoundaryDriveMethodwindow
ChangetheStepovermethodtoSCALLOPandentertheheighttobe0.001and
clickOK
IntheCuttingParameterswindow,
ChangetheTolerancevaluessothatthePartIntolandPartOuttolis0.001
ClickontheMOREtabbuttonandenterthevalueofMaxStepas1.0
ClickOK
ThenclickontheFEEDSANDSPEEDSiconontheparameterswindow
EntertheSpeedparametersasshowninthe
followingfigure
ClickOK
InthemainParameterswindow,
CreateanewtoolandnameitBEM10
Changethediametertobe10mmandthelower
radiustobe5mm.ClickOK
GeneratetheprogramThecontoursurfaceisnowfinishedandyoucanviewthesimulationby
ToolPathverification.
Flooring
Flooringisthefinishingoperationperformedonthehorizontalflatsurfaces(Floors)ofthepart.
Inmostofthemillingprocesses,flooringwillbethefinaloperationoftheprocess.All
thehorizontalsurfaceshavetobefinished.Thisplanaroperationrunsthecutterina
singlepassoneveryface. ClickontheCreateOperationicononthe
ToolbarChangetheTypetobemill_planaratthetopofthewindowChangeall
theoptionsasshowninthefigureClickOK
In the parameters window, change the Cut
PatterntobeFollowPart
Changethepercentofthetooldiameterfor
Stepovertobe40
Inflooringoperations,itisalwaysbettertokeeptheStepovervaluetobelessthanhalfofthe
diameterofthecutterinordertoachievemoreflatnessontheplanarsurfaces.
Unlikepreviousprograms,wehavetoselectacutarea. ClickontheSpecifyCutAreatab
Selectthehighlightedsurfacesshowninthefigure
belowClickOKClickonFEEDSANDSPEEDSBecausethisisaFlooringoperation,
itisbettertomakethespindlespeedhighandthefeedrates
ClickOK
ClickonCUTTINGPARAMETERSinthemainparameterwindow
ChoosetheSTOCKtabbuttonandentertheIntolandOuttolvaluesasshowninthe
figure
lowcomparedtothepreviousoperations.
Enterthevaluesexactlyasshowninthefigure
ChooseOK
Generate the program. Then replay and verify

thecutterpath
ThefollowingfigureshowstheToolPathdisplayfortheflooring.
POSTPROCESSING
The primary use of the Manufacturing application is to generate tool paths in order to
manufactureparts.Generally,wecannotjustsendanunmodifiedtoolpathfiletoamachineand
startcutting becausetherearemanydifferenttypes ofmachines. Each typeofmachine has
unique hardware capabilities, requirements and control systems. For instance, it can have a
verticalorahorizontalspindle;itcancutwhilemovingseveralaxessimultaneously,etc.The
controlleracceptsatoolpathfileanddirectstoolmotionandothermachineactivity(suchas
turningthecoolantoraironandoff).
Naturally,justaseachtypeofmachinehasuniquehardwarecharacteristics; controllers also

differinsoftwarecharacteristics.Forinstance,mostcontrollersrequirethattheinstructionfor
turningthecoolantonbegiveninaparticularcode.Somecontrollersalsorestrictthenumberof
Mcodesthatareallowedinonelineofoutput.ThisinformationisnotintheinitialNX5NXtool
path.
Therefore, the tool path must be modified to suit the unique parameters of each different
machine/controllercombination.Themodificationiscalledpostprocessing.Theresultisapost
processedtoolpath.
Therearetwostepsinvolvedingeneratingthefinalpostprocessedtoolpath.
1 Createthetoolpathdatafile,otherwisecalledCLSF(CutterLocationSourceFile).
2 PostprocesstheCLSFintoMachineCNCcode(Postprocessedfile).Thisprogramreads
thetoolpathdataandreformatsitforusewithaparticularmachineanditsaccompanying
controller.
CreatingCLSF
Afteranoperationisgeneratedandsaved,theresultingtoolpathisstoredaspartoftheoperation
withinthepartfile.CLSF(CutterLocationSourceFile)providesmethodstocopytheseinternal
pathsfromtheoperationsinthepartfiletotoolpathswithintheCLSF,whichisatextfile.The
GOTOvaluesarea"snapshot"ofthecurrenttoolpath.Thevaluesexportedarereferencedfrom
the MCS stored in the operation. The CLS file is the required input for some subsequent
programs,suchaspostprocessors.
ClickononeoftheprogramsthatyouwanttopostprocessintheOperationNavigator
ClickTOOLSOPERATIONNAVIGATOROUTPUTCLSF
AwindowwillpopuptoselecttheCLSFFormat.
Choose CLSF_STANDARD and enter a

locationforthefile
ChooseOK
TheCLSFfilewillbecreated.Itwillbesimilartothefigurebelow.Thecontentsofthefile
containthebasicalgorithmofthecuttermotionwithoutanyinformationaboutmachinecodes
and control systems. This file can be used for postprocessing any machine control. The
extensionofthefileis.cls(XXX.cls).
AnyprogramthathasbeenoutputtoCLSForpost
processedwillhaveagreencheckmarknexttoitinthe
OperationNavigator.
PostProcessingClickonaprogramintheOperationNavigatorthatyouwanttopost
process.ClickTOOLSOPERATIONNAVIGATOROUTPUTNX
POSTPROCESSING
SelecttheMILL_3_AXISmachineandenteralocationforthefile
SelectOK
Thiswillcreatethepostprocessedfileforthedesiredmachine.Youcanfindthe
blocknumbers
WithGandMcodesconcerningtheMachinecontrollertype.Theextensionofthefileis.ptp
(XXX.ptp).
Thefinaloutput(XXX.ptp)filecanbetransferredtothemachinethroughDNCorpunchedtapes
andtheactualmillingoperationbedone.Thisentiresequencestartingfromthetransferofthe
modelintotheManufacturingmoduletothetransferofthefilestothemachineandcuttingthe
rawpieceintothefinalpartiscalledComputerAidedManufacturing.
Cut Between Levels Zlevel
Top off critical depths in a Zlevel operation with gaps
Topping off critical depths affects the gap regions for Zlevel. The figure below shows how a single gap
region is broken into two regions (A) by the Top Off Critical Depths tool path.
Top Off Critical Depths Tool Path

To top off critical depths:
1. In the operation dialog box, click Cut Levels .
2. In the Cut Levels dialog box, click Single .
3. Select the Top Off Critical Depths check box.

Tops and Bottoms of Ranges
Gap tool paths are restricted to Cut Area surfaces that are also inside the defined Cut Levels range.
Surfaces are not cut when:
they were not selected as a cut area surface

or,
they are outside of the Zlevel range

When the top or bottom of a range is at a horizontal surface, and the surface is selected as a cut area,
the tool path is generated based on the parameters set for Cut Between Levels. In the figure below,
the orange faces are the cut area. The top of the pad (1) is at the top of the Cut Levels range, so it is
cut. The floor of the pocket (2) is outside of the cut levels, so it is not cut. The flat face across the
entire block is within the cut levels, but not part of the orange cut area, so it is not cut.
Gap Tool Path

Sequencing Gap and Zlevel Tool Paths
The Zlevel and gap tool paths are sequenced and ordered as follows:
The Zlevel tool path is machined top-down and uses the same connection methods as it would
without the Cut Between Levels option.
1. After each zlevel cut is completed, the tool begins to cut the level below it.
2. While cutting the lower level, the system looks for gaps between lower level and the
previous level above it.
3. When a gap is found, the system cuts the gap, and then continues cutting the lower
level until if finds another gap, or completes the level.
4. The system connects the gap cutting with the lower cut level based on the Max
Traverse Distance value.
If Max Traverse Distance is exceeded, a traverse to the next level takes places. If the move to the
next level is within the Max Traverse Distance value, the tool makes a direct on-part move (shortest
distance) to the next level without traversing.
Level-to-level connections that violate a gap region are replaced with a traversal move.
The start point of a new level is placed so that it isn't adjacent to a gap region. (This applies to
a closed boundary.) This prevents the connection to the next level going through the gap.
Gap machining engages and retracts from the gap paths along the tool axis. Engage/retracts to
and from standard zlevel cuts use the style you specified.
The gap tool path is machined immediately after its lower trace.
Connections are made from the zlevel cut to the gap area. After the gap area is cut, the tool
returns to the lower level.
The lower trace is split in order to minimize retracts and engages to and from the gap tool
path.
Effect of Max Traverse Distance
When the tool moves between gap regions, depending on the Max Traverse Distance value, it either
traverses along the part to the start point on the lower contour, or retracts and traverses to the next
Zlevel or gap machining area. To eliminate motions where the tool is not cutting, set Max Traverse
Distance to zero. Engages and retracts then occur directly along the tool axis.
The figures below show how the tool moves from the lower Zlevel tool path to the gap tool path area.
Moving from Lower Zlevel to the Gap Tool Path
Same Part with Max Traverse Distance Exceeded

Traversing Multiple Sub-Regions
The figure below illustrates how the software traversed between multiple sub-regions.
Traversing Between Multiple Sub-Regions

Groove Milling operation
Use the Groove Milling operation to machine linear grooves, slots, and clevises using T-Cutters. The
operation provides several strategies to sequence the cutting passes, and automatically changes the
tracking point for top and bottom cutting. You can efficiently use multiple operations to rough and
finish machine the groove.
Groove geometry
You define the groove geometry once. NX subtracts the in-process feature for each operation from the
material remaining in the groove. You can:
Specify the areas to machine from within the operation using the Groove Geometry
command, or inherit the groove geometry from a feature group.
Display the in-process feature for the operation.

Control how NX calculates the in-process feature by using the in-process workpiece options.
o To extend the in-process feature to the end of the in-process workpiece, select the Use
3D option.
o To include only the material in the groove, select the None option.
Cut levels and level sequencing

When you specify the number of cut levels, you can also control the cutting sequence. The cut levels
display helps you to visualize the cutting sequence. This example uses the following settings:
Level Sequencing = Center to Ceiling to Floor

Depth per Cut = Passes
Number of Passes = 3
Preview
Preview Display
Where do I find it?
Application Manufacturing
Command Finder
Create Operation
Location in dialog Create Operation dialog boxType listmill_planarOperation Subtype
box
groupGROOVE_MILLING
Create a single level Planar Mill operation
This example shows the basic steps you would use to create a single level Planar Mill operation. You
can select additional parameters to create the desired tool path.
1. Choose Home tabInsert groupCreate Operation .
2. In the Type group, from the list, select mill_planar.
3. In the Operation Subtype group, click Planar Mill .
4. In the Location group, set the following:
o Program = NC_PROGRAM
o Tool = EM-.75-.03
o Geometry = WORKPIECE
o Method = MILL_ROUGH
5. Click OK.
The Planar Mill dialog box is displayed.
6. In the Geometry group, click Specify Part Boundaries .
7. In the Boundary Geometry dialog box, select the Ignore Holes check box.
8. Select the top face of the part to be machined.
9. Click OK.
The boundary is created and the holes are ignored as specified.

10. Click Specify Floor .
11. Select the floor geometry.
The selected Floor Plane is the final depth of the tool path.
12. Click OK to return to the Planar Mill dialog box.
13. In the Path Settings group, from the Cut Pattern list, select Profile.
14. Click Generate .
The tool path is generated and displayed.

15. Click OK to save the operation.
Create an open profile Planar Milling operation
Open profile paths are created when only a portion of the part is to be cut. This example shows the
basic steps you would use to create an open profile Planar Mill operation. You can select additional
parameters to create the desired tool path.
4. In the Location group, select the following:
o Tool = EM-.5-.03
5. Click OK.
6. Click Specify Part Boundaries .
7. From the Mode list, select Curves/Edges.
8. From the Type list, select Open.
9. From the Material Side list, select Right.

10. In the graphics window, select the edges shown.
11. Click OK until you return to the Planar Mill dialog box.
The boundary is created and displayed.
This is the final depth of the tool path.
14. Click OK.

16. Click Cut Levels .
17. In the Depth Of Cut Parameters dialog box, type .125 in the Maximum box.
18. Click OK to return to the Planar Mill dialog box.
20. Click OK to complete the operation
Create a multi-level Planar Mill operation

Multi-level tool paths are created when the tool path cannot be completed in a single depth of cut.
This example shows the basic steps you would use to create a multi level Planar Mill operation. The
boundaries you select must be in the plane where they are to be recognized. You can select additional
parameters to create the desired tool path. The boundaries must also be parallel to the floor plane.
o Tool = EM-.5-.03
5. Click OK.
6. Click Specify Part Boundaries .
7. Select the Ignore Holes check box.
8. Select the top face of the part to be machined.
9. Click OK.
The boundary is created and displayed, and the holes are ignored as specified.
This is the final depth of the tool path.
12. Click OK.
14. Click Cut Levels .
15. In the Depth Of Cut Parameters dialog box, type .125 in the Maximum box.
16. Click OK.

Create a Cavity Mill operation
This example shows how to create a Cavity Mill operation with minimal inputs. You can specify
additional parameters to create the tool path you need.
2. In the Create Operation dialog box, in the Operation Subtype group, click CAVITY_MILL .
3. In the Location group, set the options as shown:
o Program = PROGRAM
o Tool = MILL
4. Click OK.
5. In the Cavity Mill dialog box, in the Actions group, click Generate .
The geometry is inherited from the WORKPIECE Geometry group (parent). The geometry options
are not available for selection.
Specify Part
Specify Blank
Specify Check
For information on creating a geometry parent, see Create a geometry parent.
6. To view the tool path, click Verify .
7. In the Tool Path Visualization dialog box, click the 2D Dynamic tab.
8. Click Play .
9. Click OK to close the Tool Path Visualization dialog box.
10. Click OK to save the operation and close the Cavity Mill dialog box.
Create a Cavity Mill operation with an IPW
When you use an In Process Workpiece (IPW), you can create sequential Cavity Mill operations to
reduce the material left behind by the IPW in each operation. You would generally have to use a
different milling operation for the finishing.
This example shows how to create a Cavity Mill roughing operation with an IPW.
2. In the Create Operation dialog box, in the Operation Subtype group, click Cavity_Mill .
3. In the Location group, set the options as shown:
o Program = PROGRAM
o Tool = MILL
4. In the Cavity Mill dialog box, click Cutting Parameters .
5. In the Cutting Parameters dialog box, click the Containment tab.
6. In the Blank group, from the In Process Workpiece list, select Use Level Based.
This creates the IPW. Use Level Based is the recommended IPW option in most cases.
7. Click OK to accept the settings and close the Cutting Parameters dialog box.
8. In the Cavity Mill dialog box, set the Path group settings as needed.
Note Variables such as cutting tool lengths and diameters, draft angles and undercuts, fixture and
tool clearances, affect the amount of material that each operation leaves behind.
9. Click Generate .
10. To view the tool path and material removal, click Verify .
12. Click Play .

The IPW represents uncut material from the current operation.
14. Click OK to save the operation and close the Cavity Mill dialog box.
The IPW is saved with the operation.
You can use the same procedure in a subsequent operation to further reduce the amount of material
that remains in the IPW. You would have to adjust the settings as needed.
Cut Levels
Use the Cut Levels command to specify Cut Ranges and the depth of the cut within each range. Cavity
Mill and Z-Level Milling operations complete cutting at one level before moving along the tool axis to
the next level.
The following visual aids help you identify cut range and cut depth levels:
Cut Range
Local Depth per Cut

The graphic on the left shows the top level tool path. The graphic on the right shows a lower level tool
path progressing down through the Cut Levels.
Add a user defined cut range to a Cavity Mill operation

1. Add a new cut level to an existing Cavity Mill or Zlevel Milling operation.
a. In a Cavity Milling or Zlevel Milling dialog box, click Cut Levels .
The graphic shows a Single Range Type that spans from the bottom plane located at the
bottom of the blank stock, up to the top plane located at the top of the blank stock.
b. In the Cut Levels dialog box, in the Ranges group, from the Range Type list, select
User Defined.
c. In the Range Definition group, click Add New Set .
The new range appears in the list box.
d. In the Range Definition group, click Select Object .
e. Select the part face.
f. In the Depth per Cut box, type 0.20, and then press Enter.
In the range that was added:
The bottom plane of the new range is positioned at the base of the edge that
was selected.
The new range spans from the bottom plane up to the bottom of the next range
above it. If there are no ranges above, the new range spans to the top level.
The new range is associative to the part face that was selected.
2. Create an additional range.
a. In the Cut Levels dialog box, in the Range Definition group, click Add New Set.
b. In the Range Definition group, click Select Object.
c. Select the part edge.
d. In the Depth per Cut box, type 0.050, and then press Enter.
e. Click OK.
The Cavity Mill dialog box is displayed.
3. In the Actions group, click Generate .
4. Verify the tool path.
a. Click Verify .
The Tool Path Visualization dialog box is displayed.
b. Click the 2D Dynamic tab.
c. Click Play to verify the tool path.
d. Click OK.
The Cavity Mill dialog box is displayed.
5. Click OK to accept the tool path and close the dialog box.
Engrave text
Open the part

1. Open mnf11_contour_engrave_setup_1.
Select the part geometry

1. In the Geometry view of the Operation Navigator, right-click in the background
and choose Expand All.
2. Double-click WORKPIECE.
The Mill Geom dialog box is displayed.
3. In the Geometry group, in the Specify Part row, click Display .
The pre-selected solid body is displayed.
4. Click OK.
Create the operation

1. On the Insert toolbar, click Create Operation .
The Create Operation dialog box is displayed.
2. Set Type to mill_contour.
3. In the Operation Subtype group, click Contour Text .

o Tool = ENGRAVE
o Method = MILL_FINISH
5. Click OK.
The Contour Text dialog box is displayed.
Select the text and define the depth

1. In the Geometry group, click Specify Drafting Text .
The Text Geometry dialog box is displayed.
2. In the graphics window, select the text.
The text you select should be parallel to the floor plane.

For information on how to create text, see the Planar and Cavity MillingEngrave
TextText EngravingPlanar and Contour text engraving activity.
3. Click OK.
The Contour Text dialog box is displayed.
4. In the Path Settings group, in the Text Depth box, type 0.015.
The selected text projects along the tool axis to the part surface. The default tool
axis is +ZM. Text Depth is the depth to which the tool will cut below the part
surface when engraving.
Generate the tool path and visualize material removal

2. Click Verify .
3. Click the 2D Dynamic tab.
4. Click Play .
5. Click OK to close the No blank message box.
The Blank Geometry dialog box is displayed.
6. In the Type group, from the list, select Offset from Part.
7. In the Offset box, type .010.
8. Click OK.

11. Close the part without saving it.
Machine uncut areas using a Flowcut operation
Examine the current operations

1. Open mnf19_flow_cut_1_setup_1.
2. On the Resource bar, click the Operation Navigator tab .
3. In the Program Order view of the Operation Navigator, right-click 1234 and
choose Tool PathVerify .
5. Click Play .
The No Blank message box is displayed.
6. Click OK to close the message box.
7. Set Type to Bounding Block.
8. Click OK.
Notice there is a substantial amount of material that remains in corners and filleted
areas.

Machine uncut areas using a Flowcut operation
Create the Flowcut operation

The Flowcut Reference Tool operation is the operation that you use to remove material that
remains after a previous operation.
2. Set Type to mill_contour or DieMold_Exp.
3. In the Operation subtype group, click Flowcut Reference Tool .

o Program = 1234
o Tool = EM-.2_1
o Geometry = MILL_AREA
o Method = MILL_FINISH
The previous operation used an EM-.5_.25 end mill that was too large to fit into
some of the corners and filleted areas of the part. You will now use the EM-.2_1 end
mill to remove the remaining material.
5. Click OK.
The Flowcut Ref Tool dialog box is displayed.
6. In the Drive Method group, in the Method row, click Edit .
The Flow Cut Drive Method dialog box is displayed.

7. In the Reference Tool group, from the Reference Tool list, select EM_.5_.25.
The reference tool is the tool that was used in the previous operation. NX calculates
the bi-tangency contact points from the specified reference tool diameter and then
uses these points to define the cut region for the current operation.
8. Click OK.
Notice how the tool path is created only in the concave corners and fillets areas
where the larger tool used in the previous operation could not fit.
Modify the cut pattern for steep and non-steep cut areas
1. In the Drive Method group, in the Method row, click Edit .
2. In the Flow Cut Drive Method dialog box, set the following:
Non-steep Cutting group

o Non-steep Cut Pattern = Zlevel Zig Zag
Steep Cutting group

o Steep Cut Pattern = Zig Zag
3. Click OK.
4. Generate the operation.

5. Zoom in on the part.
Notice the change in the cut pattern between the non-steep and steep areas of the
part.
6. Edit the Flow Cut drive method as shown.

o Non-steep Cut Pattern = Zlevel Zig Zag.
Steep Cutting group

o Steep Cut Pattern = Zlevel Zig Zag with Lifts.
Notice the change in the cut pattern fillet intersection.
Create a more uniform cut pattern

1. Edit the Flow Cut drive method as shown.

o Zlevel Cut Levels = Optimized.
Notice that the Optimized cut levels option outputs a more uniform depth per cut in
the tool path. This option requires more processing time to calculate the optimized
cut levels.
Constant Optimized
3. Click OK to save the operation.
Simulate material removal

1. In the Program Order view of the Operation Navigator, right-click 1234 and
choose Tool PathVerify.
3. Click Play .
4. Click OK to close the message box.
5. Make sure that Type is set to Bounding Block and click OK.

Turning workflow
In this course, you will:
Define parameters that are commonly used when creating turning operations.
Initialize a turning setup.
Define part and blank geometry.
Specify cut region containment.
Create an operation that uses various parameters.
Generate a tool path.
Create and retrieve tools.
Common turning options
Tool group
Tool Selects a previously defined tool from the Operation Navigator.
Creates a new tool definition for the current operation and places
it in the Machine Tool View of the Operation Navigator for use
Create New by other operations.
Displays the current tool and a dialog box of the tool's

Edit or parameters.
Display
Accesses options to define tracking points for the tool. A tracking

Select point is a reference point on the tool used to calculate tool paths.
Tracking
Output Displays the current parameters for Tool Number, Adjust, Cutcom,
and Z Offset and their related inheritance status.
Tool Change Displays the current settings for the Manual Tool Change and Text
Settings Status. It also displays the Holder Number and Inheritance status.
Tool Orientation group
Flip Tool Around
Flips the tool across the tool holder to cut in the opposite direction.
Holder
Reorient Tool
Allows rotating the tool holder.
Holder
Specifies an angle, measured relative to the WCS, to use for the tool holder in the
Tool Holder Angle
operation.
Lets you rotate the tracking point cluster with the tool holder, or leave the cluster
stationary.
Rotate Tracking Point with Holder
Rotate Tracking
Point with Tool
Holder
Rotate Tracking Point with Holder
Path Settings group

Lets you create a new Method group for this operation and place it in
the Machining Method View of the Operation Navigator for use by
Create other operations. For example: Roughing or Finishing.
Method New
Lets you edit the selected Method definition.

Edit
Lets you control settings that are common to the cutting operation subtypes. This
includes tolerances, cutter clearance angles, minimum clearance, contour types,
cut constraints and cut control.
The available parameters are determined by the Subtype, and Cut Strategy of the
operation and include parameters for:
Strategy
Cutting Parameters Stock
Corners
Contour Types
Profiling
Specifies movements that position the tool before, after, and between cutting
moves. Options include:
Engage and Retract
Clearance
Non Cutting Moves
Approach and Departure
Local Return
Specifies spindle speeds and feed rates.
Sets the rate at which the tool advances. You can inherit the value of the feed
Feeds and Speeds parameters from the Method group.
Feed Rates Set Speeds on the Feed Rate dialog.

Machine Control group
Specifiy machine events such as tool changes, user defined start and end events,
or special post commands. This option controls the type of motion output.
Start of Path Machine Control options can also be defined at the boundary level, at the
Events boundary member level, and the group level, using Custom Boundary Data.
End of Path Events

Copy From lets you copy special post commands from another operation or
Machine from an operation template.
Edit lets you add post commands to the start or end of the path.
Linear Only converts a series of linear moves to a single circular move.
Circular converts linear or circular moves to a rational B-spline curve, if enough of

Motion Output the GOTO points lie on the same arc.
Machine Cycle enables CYCLE95 output and displays the Subroutine Name box.
You can accept the default name or change it.
Program group
Specifies the program to place the operation in.
Creates a new program and places it in the Program View of the

Operation Navigator. For example, you could create a program called
Program Create TAPE2 or O1234 to use for postprocessing.
New
Modifies the selected program.

Edit
Layout and Layer
Lets you save the geometry for the operation on a separate layer.
Options group
Controls the tool path display options such as color and type of tool display.
Edit Display
Specifies the parameters (text fields, buttons, and option menus) that appear in
the dialog.
Customize Dialog
Actions group
Generates the tool path.
Generate
Refreshes the graphics window and replays the tool path.

Replay
Provides options for animating the tool path.

Verify
Displays a text listing of the tool path in an Information window.

List
Turn - Tooling
As in other NX/CAM applications, the turning processors use the tool's cutter information to calculate
the tool path. If the tool contains multiple cutters, only the information about the active cutter being
used by the operation is considered by the processor. The cutter's parameters are based on the
orientation of the tool assembly mounted on a turret position of a machine tool.
Selecting a Tool
In Turning, you can either work with a tool from the database or you can create a new tool.
Use the Create Tool icon to create a new tool at any point during a session.
Use the Group Editing section of the Operation Dialog to edit, reselect another tool from the
tool library, or display the current tool.
The following turning tool types are supported (refer to Turn Tool Definition):
Supported Turning Tool Types

Based on the tool's origin, the system will either show the shape of the cutter using interactively
specified parameterization or, if the tool is loaded from a database, display the entire tool assembly
loaded from an external part file.
The insert shape, orientation angle and tracking point control the material removed in the cutting
passes.
Part
outline
Tool
path
Inse
rt
Insert shape and orientation do not match part outline.

Insert shape and orientation match part outline.
Insert shape and orientation effect on tool path
Create geometry
New geometry is created in the Create Geometry dialog. Access this as follows:
Select the Create Geometry icon or
In the main menu bar select Insert Geometry or
In the geometry view of the Operation Navigator, MB3 at the position where you would like to
insert geometry and select Insert Geometry
You may create the following types of geometry:
Machine Coordinate System
Workpiece (for solid selection)
Workpiece (blank + part)
Part
Containment
Avoidance
Create curves from solids
You can select a solid as part or blank geometry. The software automatically derives the 2D shape it
requires for turning operations and for defining custom member data and projects this onto the lathe
work plane for programming. To create a 2D shape from a solid, proceed as follows:
1. Create a solid body in Modeling, or reference one in an assembly structure.

2. Enter the Manufacturing application. The software has automatically created the following
structure for you:
GEOMETRY
MCS_SPINDLE
WORKPIECE
TURNING_WORKPIECE
3. Edit the WORKPIECE.
4. Click the Part or Blank icon, depending on which type of machining geometry the
solid represents. Later, the system creates a 2D shape for turning of the same type, part or blank,
from that solid.
5. Choose Select and select the solid.
6. Confirm the dialogs with OK.
7. Edit TURNING_WORKPIECE. The system automatically creates a filled, planar, 2D shape for
turning. This 2D shape represents a silhouette of the part or workpiece as it is spinning during
lathe work.
8. Blank the solid to better see the 2D shape.

Some points to remember:
The 2D shape is associative to its respective solid body. If you change the solid, the 2D shape
changes as well. Boundary member data remains associative, where applicable.
Each 2D shape is listed as a Sheet Body in the Part Navigator.
The 2D shape is created on the current work layer.
Once you create the 2D shape, you can select it as geometry in a group that is not contained in
the above structure.
You can select portions of this 2D shape as the drive curve in Teachmode.
If creation of the 2D shape fails for a given solid, check the solid's geometry and ensure the
body does pass checking.
When using multiple bodies to create a single spun outline, the bodies must touch. You can
define each body as separate sets.
Updating Programs that Use Pre-NX 4 Boundaries to Using Solid Selection Boundaries
You can update your existing programs (pre-NX 4) to solid selection boundaries. This gives you the
added associativity from the solid body to the 2D shape that represents the spinning silhouette of that
solid for turning operations.
Caution When you convert the part boundaries, you lose all custom member data created for the lathe
cross-section curves.
To update existing programs to use a spinning silhouette 2D shape:

1. Create a new WORKPIECE group under the MCS SPINDLE group (Create Geometry
WORKPIECE).
2. Edit the new WORKPIECE and select the solid as Part or Blank.
3. Edit the TURNING_WORKPIECE contained within the WORKPIECE group. The software creates
the 2D shape.
4. Add custom member data as defined for the legacy boundaries to the new 2D shape.
5. Move all operations from the geometry group containing the legacy boundaries to the
TURNING_WORKPIECE group.
6. Regenerate all operations.
7. Verify that the operations have generated correctly.
8. Delete the old geometry group containing the legacy boundaries.

Select a part
1. A part is selected in the Part Dialog. Access this as follows:
o in the Operation Navigator, geometry view, MB3 on the part geometry and choose Edit
or
o in the Turning Operation Dialog click on the Geometry radio button and choose Edit
2. Choose Select if you have not yet selected boundaries and Reselect if you would like to choose
new boundaries.
3. Choose Display to show the part boundary you have chosen.

Selecting an open part boundary
Selecting a part boundary is discussed extensively in Manufacturing General Boundaries. When
selecting open boundaries in Turning, it is important to ensure that the material side is properly
specified. If you look in the same direction as the cutting direction, the material side will be the side
where your part is found. This is shown in the following diagram.
Material Side is Left

Selecting a closed part boundary
If you select a closed boundary (start point = end point), the software automatically determines the
proper location of the material side. In addition, the start point of this boundary selection is irrelevant.
For a better visual feedback of the rest material when using Show filled 2D Workpiece, click
TURN_BNDPartEditClosed
See also:
Selecting Geometry
Selecting the Blank Geometry
Select the blank

There are several possible types of blank stock for turning, depending on the geometry to be
machined.
Choose Bar Stock if the geometry of the part to be machined is solid.
Choose Tube Stock if the workpiece has a centerline drill.
Curve Stock has been pre-worked to provide an initial geometry. Choose this type if your
blank exists as a modelled part in NX.
Choose a blank From Workspace to select a prior In Process Workpiece as your blank.
Create a roughing operation
Here's how an expert user describes the task of creating a simple OD Roughing Operation in Turning.
Tasks I Completed Prior to Creating Roughing Operation
Oriented the part model on the screen as desired (setup).
Defined the machine axes and program zero using the MCS (setup).
Defined the part and blank geometry to the CAM system (setup).
Defined the roughing tool (setup).
Created a facing operation to face off the part.

Creating an OD Roughing Operation
1. Set the operation navigator to the program order view.
2. Find the creation icons in the tool bar and select the Create Operation icon.
3. When the Create Operation dialog appears, I make sure that the Type on that dialog is set to
Turning.
4. Within the icon cluster on that same Create Operation dialog, I select the ROUGH_TURN_OD
icon.
5. Near the bottom of that same Create Operation dialog, I set the following:
o Program is set to Program, which is the name of my program in the program order view.
o Use Geometry is set to Workpiece, which is the name of the object in the geometry
view where I defined the part and blank boundaries.
o Use Tool is set to the name of the OD roughing tool that I created in the machine tool
view.
o Use Method is set to the LATHE_ROUGH method in the method view.
o NAME defaults to a ROUGH_TURN_OD name determined by the system, but I can type
in another new name if I want to. I accept the default.
o When I select the OK button on the Create Operation dialog, the ROUGH_TURN_OD
operation dialog appears.
o Set the cut pattern. On this ROUGH_TURN_OD operation dialog, I first select the icon
that gives me the type of cut pattern that I want. I select the Linear Zig icon, which will
create parallel cuts in the same direction. I want to rough toward the head stock, which is
from right to left on the machine that I am programming.
6. Check the level angle. I always check the angle of cut in the Level Angle option to make sure
that the direction of cut is correct. In this case, I know that when I selected the
ROUGH_TURN_OD icon to create this operation, the level angle value was pre-set to 180 degrees,
which is correct for my case. This angle must be set correctly before the system can correctly
determine the cut region.
7. Look at the cut region. The Turning system is smart and is designed to automatically determine
and suggest a cut region. It will consider 1) the current tool shape, 2) the part geometry shape,
and 3) the current shape of the workpiece (IPW) and can determine the cut region(s) to be turned
by the current tool. So, to cause the Turning system to suggest a cut region, I find the Cut Regions
section of the dialog and select the Display button to see what the Turning system thinks can be
cut. I like this capability because I don't have to pick and re-pick geometry in each operation, and
that saves me a lot of time.
8. Knowing that I had previously faced the part, the Turning system displays the autodetected cut
region for this OD roughing operation, shown below.
9. Modify the cut region. I want to shorten this cut region so that the cutter just cuts beyond the
largest diameter of the part and stays away from the chuck. To do this, I use the containment
capability (found on the roughing dialog) which allows me to modify the autodetected cut region.
10. Setting a trim point. In addition to shortening this cut region, I also want to form a 45 degree
angle at that shortened end. This angle will eliminate the creation of rings when I rough the
backside of the part later. So, in the Containment dialog, I activate Trim Point 1 and define it by
selecting the lower left end of the round (arc) on the left side of the largest diameter of the
part. I then activate Angle 1 and set its value to 135 degrees.
11. I then select the Display Cut Regions button at the bottom of the Containment dialog to see the
resultant cut region . Note the trim point and angle at .
12. The cut region looks good so I select the OK button and the system returns to the
ROUGH_TURN_OD dialog.
13. Set the reversal mode. Now I want to prevent the cutter from descending down into the large
groove on the OD of the part. This is an example of a reversal in Turning. So I find the section
on the dialog that controls reversals and set the Reversal Mode to Omit. This does not change the
display of the cut region, but it does prevent the cutter from sliding down its heel angle and
descending into that recessed region. Note the direction of the level angle .
14. Set the undercut mode. I want to make sure the cutter does not enter into the OD face groove
during roughing. To prevent this, I select the button named Cutting and on the Cutting dialog, I
make sure that the Undercut option is not active. Then I select OK to return to the
ROUGH_TURN_OD dialog.
15. Check the cut depth. I set the Cut Depth option to Variable Avg because this causes the Turning
system to match cut levels to diameters on the part. In the shop, this reduces wasted time by
eliminating very thin cuts. This is a very good option and should be the default setting.
16. Set the cut depth range. The Variable Avg cut depth requires a minimum cut depth and a
maximum cut depth. The minimum can be set to zero, but the minimum and the maximum should
not be equal.
17. Set the speeds and feeds. I select the Feed Rates button and set the spindle speed (Speeds tab)
and all the feed rates (General tab) that I want. I check that the spindle direction is set to
automatic and is correct.
18. Set the stock. To make sure that the roughing operation leaves the desired amount of stock for
the finishing operations later, I select the Stock button and examine the settings. On the Stock
dialog, I set the desired amount of face and radial stock in the Rough Stock section. Then I select
OK and return to the ROUGH_TURN_OD dialog.
19. Generate the tool path. I select the Generate icon on the dialog to create and display the
tool path. Notice that the cutter does not descend down into the reversal.
20. Verify the tool path. Before I accept the operation, I check it by selecting the Verify button.
Accept the operation. It looks good in Verify, so I select OK and return to the ROUGH_TURN_OD
dialog. There I select OK to accept the operation and tool path.
21. View the In Process Workpiece (IPW) . The Turning system updates the In Process Workpiece
(IPW) to show what material remains after the roughing operation that I just created. I like to see
that resultant workpiece shape before proceeding on to the next operation. I want to make sure
it is correct because it will be automatically passed to the next operation in sequence as the
workpiece shape for the next operation. To display the new workpiece shape, I place the cursor
on the roughing operation that I just created and press MB3. This brings up a dialog and I select
Workpiece near the bottom of that dialog. Then I select Show 2D in the next dialog and the
system displays a complete 2D silhouette shape of the workpiece. It looks good. Try the Show 3D
option.
I have now successfully generated a typical roughing operation.

Finishing options
Note See Common dialog box options and Common Turning options for common options not discussed
here.
For Finish Turn OD, Finish Bore ID, Finish Back Bore, Groove OD, Groove ID, and Groove Face
operations.
Finishing operations support automatic detection of remaining material.
You can customize the Finishing dialog box to suit your needs. The following is an overview of the
available options. For more information about customizing your environment see CAM Manufacturing
General Customizing your Environment.
Geometry
Selects the location that contains the geometry definitions to be inherited by this
operation.
Lets you create a new geometry group for this operation and place it
in the Geometry View of the Operation Navigator for use by other
Create operations.
New
Geometry
Lets you add or remove geometry from the geometry group that this
operation inherits from. When editing, the software requests
Edit confirmation before deleting existing geometry.
Custom Part
Lets you define custom data for specific portions of the boundary.
Boundary Data
Lets you modify cut regions for this operation.

Edit
Cut Regions Displays the cut regions for the operation's current settings so
Display (all that you can assess the accuracy of your machining strategy.
geometry
types)
Note
An unavailable Display button indicates that geometry has not yet been
specified.
Turn off the Update IPW option to generate an operation that creates the
corresponding tool path without changing the In Process Workpiece. For example,
Update IPW
you can create mirrored cycles for simultaneous roughing with multiple tools
(merging lathes) that you can then fine-tune in the Synchronization Manager.
Cut Strategy
Determines which elements of the geometry will be cut and in which order. These are the same
strategies that are used in Profiling for roughing operations.
Diameters Only
Faces Only
Diameters First then Faces
Faces First then Diameters
Towards Corners
Away from Corner
Down Only
Finish All
Path Settings
Lets you define the orientation for the individual level cuts for straight linear
Level Angle
operations for more control over the automatically identified cut regions.
Controls the (initial) cutting direction for finishing/profiling passes with respect to
the direction given by boundary orientation. Backward passes are always generated
exactly opposite to forward passes (i.e., stop at and overlap points do not change
Direction
their positions). Only the transition and approach moves change because of the
different cut order of the partial cuts (see the individual profiling/finishing
strategies).
Specifies the orientation for the individual level cuts which are computed by the
software. The cuts are measured counter-clockwise from the spindle centerline and
defines the orientation and direction for the linear cuts.
Angle from XC
Note A proper cut angle is important for the system, so it can detect the
operation's machining side, and for automatic generation of non-
cutting/avoidance moves.
Lets you specify whether fillets adjacent to faces (steep zones) or diameters (level
zones) are:
added to faces (steep zones) exclusively
Cut Fillets added to diameters (level zones) exclusively
split in the middle if adjacent to both, faces (steep) and diameters (levels)
or
omitted
Stepover
Multiple Passes Lets you create a series of finishing passes at varying depths.
Finish Passes Lets you alternate the cut direction of finsish passes.
Spring Passes Specifies the number of additional finishing passes the system should make. If you
specified multiple passes above, the software applies additional spring passes after
the last multiple pass.
None Does not add spring passes.
Maintain Cut
Direction
Alternate Performs alternating finish spring passes in zig zag strategy by
reversing the cutting direction and starting in the opposite
direction of the last finish cut.
Determines whether or not the reversals of a cut region (i.e. the valleys of the part
Omit Reversals
boundary found in this cut region) are visited for material removal.
Create a roughing OD operation
Open the part and set preferences

1. Open mnf13_turn_rough_1.
2. Click PreferencesManufacturing.
The Manufacturing Preferences dialog box is displayed.
3. On the User Interface tab, set the following:

o = Display Selected Objects
o = Display Turning IPW of Selected Objects
You will create an operation that roughs the outside diameter of the part.
2. In the Type group, from the list select turning.
3. In the Operation Subtype group, click ROUGH_TURN_OD .

4. In the Location group, specify the options as follows.
o Program = PROGRAM
o Tool = OD_55_L
o Geometry = AVOIDANCE
o Method = LATHE_ROUGH
5. Click OK.
The Rough Turn OD dialog box is displayed.
Verify the cut region containment

The operation inherits the Axial and Radial trim planes specified in the CONTAINMENT object.
1. In the Geometry group, in the Cut Regions row, click Edit .
The Cut Regions dialog box is displayed.
The axial trim plane (1) prevents the tool from colliding with the chuck and the
radial trim plane (2) prevents the tool from cutting to the centerline.
2. Click OK to accept the containment.

Set the cut depth
The Cut Depth value determines the maximum depth of cut to be made on each roughing
pass.
1. In the Path Settings group, under Stepover, from the Cut Depth list, select
Constant.
2. Make sure that 0.250 appears in the Depth box.
Generate the tool path

1. In the Options group, click Edit Display .
The Display Options dialog box is displayed.
2. In the Tool group, from the Tool Display list, select 2D.
3. Click OK.
Add a profile pass

A profile pass allows you to perform a cleanup of the part surface after rough cuts have been
made.
1. In the Path Settings group, click Cutting Parameters .

2. Click the Profiling tab.
3. Select the Additional Profiling check box.
4. In the Path Settings group, from the Strategy list, select Finish All.
The Finish All option creates a single continuous cutting pass along the part
boundary.
5. Click OK.
The ROUGH_TURN_OD dialog box is displayed.
7. Refresh the graphics display.
Define faces and diameters

NX must be able to distinguish faces from diameters in order to apply face and radial stock
appropriately.
The Cutting Parameters dialog box is displayed.
2. Click the Contour Types tab.
A line or curve with a slope between 3 and 357 degrees is recognized as a diameter
(1), to which Radial Stock can be applied. A line or curve with a slope between 87
and 93 degrees is recognized as a face (2), to which Face Stock can be applied.
3. Click Cancel to return to the ROUGH_TURN_OD dialog box.

5. In the Operation Navigator, display the Program Order view.
ROUGH_TURN_OD is the first operation in the program.

NC_PROGRAM
Unused Items
PROGRAM
ROUGH_TURN_O
D
Create a facing operation
Open the part and set preferences

1. Open mnf13_turn_rough_2.

These preferences will make the tool path generation cleaner as you will see later in
the activity.

You will begin creating an operation that faces the end of the part.
2. In the Type group, from the list, select turning.
3. In the Operation Subtype group, click FACING .

4. In the Location group, specify the options as follows.
o Program = PROGRAM
o Tool = UGTI0101_011
5. Click OK.
The Facing dialog box is displayed.
Specify radial cut region containment

Cut region containment that is defined within the operation overrides the containment that is
defined in the CONTAINMENT object. You will redefine the cut region containment in this
operation so that only the end of the part is faced.
1. In the Geometry group, in the Cut Regions row, click Edit .
The Cut Regions dialog box is displayed.
2. In the Radial Trim Plane 1 group, from the Limit Option list, select Point.
Close the Alerts message that is displayed. You will update the containment
geometry.
3. From the Point list, click Inferred Point and then select the center point of
the horizontal line as shown.
Specify axial cut region containment
1. In the Axial Trim Plane 1 group, from the Limit Option list, select Point.
2. From the Point list, click Inferred Point and then select the center point of
the horizontal line as shown.
3. In the Preview group, click Display .
The cut region is limited to the area above the radial trim line and to the right of
the axial trim line.
The Facing dialog box is displayed.

1. In the Action group, click Generate .
Visualize the material removal

1. In the Actions group, click Verify .
2. On the Replay tab, from the Tool list select Assembly.
3. Select the 2D Material Removal check box.
4. Move the Animation Speed slider to 2.
5. Click Play .
6. Click OK to complete the tool path visualization.
8. In the Operation Navigator, display the Program Order view.
FACING is the second operation in the program.

NC_PROGRAM
Unused Items
PROGRAM
ROUGH_TURN_OD
FACING
Create a finishing OD operation

Open the part and change preferences
1. Open mnf13_turn_finish_1.

These preferences will make the tool path generation cleaner as you will see later in
the activity.
Create a finishing OD operation
Replay the first roughing operation

You will replay the first roughing operation to see how much material remains.
1. In the Program Order view of the Operation Navigator, right-click in the

background and choose Expand All.
2. Double-click ROUGH_TURN_OD to display the operation dialog box.
NC_PROGRAM
Unused Items
PROGRAM
ROUGH_TURN_OD
ROUGH_TURN_OD_1
3. In the Actions group, click Replay .

4. In the Geometry group, in the Cut Regions row, click Display .
The cut region (1) represents the material removed by this operation. A 0.5000 rough
stock (2) remains on the part.
5. Click Cancel.
Replay the second roughing operation

You will replay the second roughing operation and see how most of the material is removed.
1. In the Operation Navigator, double-click ROUGH_TURN_OD_1 to display the

operation dialog box.
NC_PROGRAM
Unused Items
PROGRAM
ROUGH_TURN_OD
ROUGH_TURN_OD_1
2. In the Actions group, click Replay .
3. In the Geometry group, in the Cut Regions row, click Display .
The Cut Region (1) represents the material removed by this operation. A 0.120 rough
stock (2) remains on the part.
4. Click Cancel to close the dialog box.
Create the finishing operation

2. Make sure that turning is selected in the list in the Type group.
3. In the Operation Subtype group, click FINISH_TURN_OD .

4. In the Location group, specify the options as shown.
o Program = PROGRAM
o Tool = OD_55_L
o Method = LATHE_FINISH
5. Click OK.
The Finish Turn OD dialog box is displayed.
6. In the Cut Strategy group, from the Strategy list, select Finish All .
Create the finishing operation

2. Make sure that turning is selected in the list in the Type group.
3. In the Operation Subtype group, click FINISH_TURN_OD .

4. In the Location group, specify the options as shown.
o Program = PROGRAM
o Tool = OD_55_L
o Method = LATHE_FINISH
5. Click OK.
The Finish Turn OD dialog box is displayed.
6. In the Cut Strategy group, from the Strategy list, select Finish All .

You will generate the finish tool path and observe how the tool moves directly to the return
point.

2. Click Verify .
3. On the Replay tab, select the 2D Material Removal check box.

4. Move the Animation Speed slider to 2.
5. Click Play .
FINISH_TURN_OD is the third operation listed in the Operation Navigator.

NC_PROGRAM
Unused Items
PROGRAM
ROUGH_TURN_OD
ROUGH_TURN_OD_1
FINISH_TURN_OD
Display the in-process workpiece in 3D

Now that the solid-modeled part is visible, you can graphically display the in-process
workpiece.

2. Right-click ROUGH_TURN_OD and choose WorkpieceShow Spinning 3D.
A shaded image enhances the 3D image.

3. Right-click in the background of the graphics window and choose Rendering
StyleShaded .
Create a Groove OD operation

Open the part
1. Open mnf13_turn_groove_1.

Display the In Process Workpiece

Before creating the operation, you will display the in process workpiece (IPW). The IPW
graphically illustrates the material removed by previous operations and the remaining
material.
1. In the Program Order view Operation Navigator, right-click in the background

and choose Expand All.
2. Right-click ROUGH_TURN_OD and choose WorkpieceShow 2D.
NC_PROGRAM
Unused Items
PROGRAM
CENTERLINE
CENTERLINE_SPOTDRILL
CENTERLINE_DRILLING
ROUGHING
ROUGH_TURN_OD
3.
4. The outside diameter has been roughed (1). You will plunge cut the remainder of
the groove (2).

You will create a groove operation that roughs the outside diameter of the part using plunge
cuts.

2. In the Type group, from the list, select turning.
3. In the Operation Subtype group, click GROOVE_OD .

4. In the Location group, set the options as shown.
o Program = ROUGHING
o Tool = OD_GROOVE_L
o Geometry = TURN_WORKPIECE
5. Click OK to begin creating the
Specify the cutting strategy

Plunge cutting allows you to cut the groove using a series of movements along the length of
the tool holder.
1. In the Groove OD dialog box, in the Cut Strategy group, from the Strategy list
select Plunge Alternate .
Specify the stepover

The stepover defines how far the tool moves from side to side as it plunges.
1. In the Path Settings group, under Stepover, from the Stepover list, select
Constant .
2. In the Distance box, type 80.
The tool will stepover 80% of the tool width for each plunge.
3. In the Path Settings group, from the Cleanup list, select None.
The None option will eliminate the cleanup profiling pass and allow only plunge
cuts. You will be able to see the in process workpiece very clearly.
4. Make sure that 180 appears in the Angle from XC box.
The 180 degrees angle causes the tool to step horizontally between plunges.
Define the axial trim planes

You will define two axial trim planes to restrict the sides of the cut region.
1. In the Geometry group, in the Cut Regions row, click (Edit) .

2. In the Cut Regions dialog box, in the Axial Trim Plane 1 group, from the Limit
Option list select Point.
3. Select the end point of the vertical line as illustrated.
4. In the Axial Trim Plane 2 group, from the Limit Option list select Point option.
5. Select the end point of the vertical line as illustrated.
Define the radial trim planes

You will define a radial trim plane at the bottom of the groove. This will allow the full depth
of the groove to be cut.
1. In the Radial Trim Plane 1 group, from the Limit Option list select Point option.
2. Select a point on the horizontal line as illustrated.
The cut region is limited to the area above the Radial trim plane (3) and between
the two Axial trim planes (1 and 2).
Display the cut region
The cut region (1) allows you to verify the area the tool will cut before generating the tool
path.
1. In the Preview group, click Display.
The tracking point of the tool helps determine the cut region. The cut region is
shifted to the left within the groove because the tracking point is positioned at the
lower left corner of the tool.

You will generate the tool path and observe how the plunge cuts remove material from the
groove.
1. In the Groove OD dialog box, expand the Options group and click Edit Display
.
2. In the Display Options dialog box, in the Tool group, from the Tool Display list
select 2-D.
3. Click OK.
4. In the Groove OD dialog box, in the Actions group, click Generate to create
the tool path.
Refresh the graphics displayDisplay the In Process Workpiece

1. In the Operation Navigator, right-click GROOVE_OD and choose
WorkpieceShow 2D.
NC_PROGRAM
PROGRAM
CENTERLINE
CENTERLINE_DRILLING
ROUGHING
ROUGH_TURN_OD
GROOVE_OD
Unused Items
2. The remaining material (1) is displayed.
3.

2D Material Removal graphically displays removal of the blank material.
1. On the Operations toolbar, click Verify Tool Path .

2. Select the 2D Material Removal check box.
3. Click Play .
Position the first plunge

Positioning the first plunge allows you to determine exactly where to begin cutting.
1. In the Operation Navigator, double-click GROOVE_OD to edit the operation.

NC_PROGRAM
PROGRAM
CENTERLINE
CENTERLINE_DRILLING
ROUGHING
ROUGH_TURN_OD
GROOVE_OD
Unused Items
2. In the GROOVE_OD dialog box, in the Path Settings group, click Non Cutting
Moves .
3. In the Non Cutting Moves dialog box, click the Engage tab.
Expand the Initial Plunge group, and from the Engage Type list select Point
4. Indicate a point at the approximate screen position as illustrated.

This will determine the position where the engage point for the first plunge is
located. It does not change the location of the first plunge.
5. Click OK to accept the point.
6. In the Groove OD dialog box, in the Actions group, click Generate .
Define chip control

Chip Control allows you to specify a method for clearing chips as you are plunging.

2. In the Cutting Parameters dialog box, click the Chip Control tab, and from the
Chip Control list, select Constant Clear.
The Constant Clear option allows you to define equal depth plunge moves. This
option allows the tool to fully retract out of the groove after every incremental step
while the Constant Break option does not. This retract move helps clear the chips
out of the groove.
3. In the Constant Increment box, type 0.1.

4. In the Safe Distance box, type 0.25.
The Constant Increment value defines the depth of cut between retracts. The Safe
Distance value defines the distance above the groove to which the tool retracts
between increments.
5. Click OK.
6. In the Groove OD dialog box, click Generate .

1. On the View toolbar, click Shaded .
2. In the Groove OD dialog box, in the Actions group, click Verify .

4. Move the Animation Speed slider to 5 or less.
5. Click Play .

Create a Thread OD Operation
Open the part

1. Open mnf13_turn_thread.
Display the In Process Workpiece

The In Process Workpiece graphically illustrates the material removed by previous operations
and the material remaining to be removed by subsequent operations.

2. Right-click FACING and choose WorkpieceShow 2D.
NC_PROGRAM
Unused Items
PROGRAM
ROUGH_TURN_OD
ROUGH_TURN_OD_1
FINISH_TURN_OD
CENTERLINE_PECKDRILL
FACING
3. The outside diameter has been roughed and finished. You will cut the thread along
the line indicated below.
4.
5. Refresh the graphics display.

You will create an outside diameter threading operation that cuts in incremental passes.

2. In the Create Operation dialog box, in the Type list, make sure turning is
selected.
3. In the Operation Subtype group, click THREAD_OD .

o Program = PROGRAM
o Tool = OD_THREAD_L
o Geometry = TURN_WORKPIECE
o Method = LATHE_THREAD
5. Click OK to begin creating
Specify thread geometry

1. In the Thread OD dialog box, in the Thread Shape group, make sure that Select
Crest Line is selected .
The end of the line you select determines the Start point. In this example, be sure
to select the line on the right hand side.
2. Select the line shown as the crest line, to define the start point and the outside
diameter of the thread.
Specify the thread depth

You may define the total depth by selecting a root line or by entering a depth value. A
tapered thread can be defined by selecting an angled line or by entering an angle.
1. Click Select Root Line .
2. Select the dashed line as illustrated as the root line.
Specify a constant depth increment

The Constant option defines a consistent cut depth for each pass. If the value is greater than
or equal to the Total Depth value, then a single cutting pass is generated.
1. In the Path Settings group, from the Cut Depth list select Constant.
2. In the Depth box, type 0.018.
3. In the Cut Depth Tolerance box, type 0.001.
4. Click Non Cutting Moves .

5. In the Non Cutting Moves dialog box, click the Clearance tab; in the Minimum
Clearance group, notice the Minimum Clearance value.
The Minimum Clearance (1) is 0.1000. This establishes a safety zone around the
workpiece for non-cutting tool motions.
6. Click OK.
Pitch/Lead TPI

1. In the Thread OD dialog box, in the Actions group, click Generate .
2. Zoom In on the end of the tool path.
Using Constant Depth Increment, NX takes the average of the last two passes to keep
them as close as possible to the specified constant increment value. There are:
o 1. Three passes at 0.0180 depth each
o 2. Two passes at 0.0095 depth each
Specify a variable depth increment

Variable increments define multiple cut depths and the number of times each cut depth is to
be repeated.
You will define the following depth increments.
Passes Distance
2 0.0150
4 0.0070
1 0.0030
If the sum of the passes is less than the Total Depth, the system repeats the last increment
value until the appropriate depth is reached. If the sum of the passes exceeds the Total
Depth, the system ignores the extra increments.
1. In the Path Settings group, from the Cut Depth list select Individual.
2. Under Individual, in the Number of Passes box, type 2.
3. In the Distance box, type 0.0150, and press Enter.
4. Click Add New Set .

5. In the Number of Passes box, type 4.
6. In the Distance box, type 0.0070 and press Enter.
7. Click Add New Set and enter the final increment values.

Although you specified one pass using a 0.0030 increment, this increment must be repeated
five times (3) to achieve the total cut depth.
1. Two passes at 0.0150 depth each

2. Four passes at 0.0070 depth each
3. Remaining depth at 0.0030 per pass
Specify a percentage increment

Percentage allows you to specify the increment depth of each pass as a percentage of the
remaining total roughing depth. This causes the depth of each cutting pass to decrease as the
tool moves deeper into the thread.
1. In the Path Settings group, from the Cut Depth list, select % Remaining.
2. Type the following values to define the percentage increments.
Percent of Remaining 30.0000

Maximum Distance 0.0100
Minimum Distance 0.0010
3. The Maximum Distance value prevents the initial passes from cutting too deeply.
As the tool approaches the total depth, the increment depth can become very small.
Therefore, to control the number of passes, you must enter a Minimum Distance
increment value so that the tool can reach the total depth.

1. 0.0100 Maximum
2. Each pass is 30% of remaining depth
Specify the start and end of cut

The tool path does not take into consideration the chamfer (1). This is because the initial
start of the cut was defined at the end of the selected crest line (2).
You will specify a start point that extends the beginning of the cut and an end point that
shortens the end of the cut.
1. In the Thread Shape group, expand the Offset subgroup.
2. In the Start Offset box, type 0.15.
3. In the End Offset box, type 0.50.
A positive value extends the cut length. A negative value shortens the cut length.
4. In the Options group, click Edit Display .

5. In the Display Options dialog box, in the Tool group, from the Tool Display list,
select 2D.
6. Click OK.
1. 0.1500 Start Offset

2. 0.5000 End Offset
Specify the engage and retract angles

Specify the angle at which the tool engages to the depth of each cutting pass, and the angle
at which the tool is retracted
1. In the Path Settings group, click Non Cutting Moves .

2. In the Non Cutting Moves dialog box, click the Engage tab, and from the Engage
list, select Angle.
3. In the Angle box, type 235.
4. From the Move Type list, select Thread.
5. Click the Retract tab, from the Retract list, select Angle.
6. In the Angle box, type 90.
7. From the Move Type list, select Thread.
8. Click OK.
9. In the Thread OD dialog box, in the Options group, click Edit Display .
10. In the Display Options dialog box, from the Tool Display list, select None.
11. Click OK.

o 1. Engage
o 2. Retract


CITD Ug MaterialNX9.0

Caricato da

Informazioni sul documento

Copyright

Formati disponibili

Condividi questo documento

Condividi o incorpora il documento

Opzioni di condivisione

Hai trovato utile questo documento?

Questo contenuto è inappropriato?

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

CITD Ug MaterialNX9.0

Caricato da

Copyright:

Formati disponibili

Basic

NX is an interactive Computer-Aided Design, Computer-Aided Manufacturing, and Computer-Aided

Basic Mouse Operations

Click = Left mouse button

Middle mouse button = Middle mouse button, or the wheel

Right-click = right mouse button

Select menus and select options in dialogs. Click

Cancel Press Alt + middle mouse button HP: Extend Char +

Display Cut/Copy/Paste popup menu Right-click in a text entry field

Select contiguous items. Shift + Click in a list box

Select or de-select non-contiguous items. Ctrl + Click in a list box

Launch an object-specific popup. Right-click over the object.

Pan a view. Drag the middle + right mouse buttons, or Shift +

Click on >start> all programs> Siemens NX 9.0> NX9.0

FILE NAME, WORKING DIRECTORY> CLICK ON 0K BUTTON

INITIALLY IT WILL BE OPENED INTO MODELING ENVIRONMENT AS FOLLOWS

INSERT > SKETCH IN THE TASK ENVIRONMENT

The NX Ribbon bar interface provides access to frequently used

3 Command Finds commands.

4 Full Screen Maximizes screen space.

5 Minimize Collapses the groups on the Ribbon tab.

6 Help Displays on-context Help (F1).

7 Lets you turn on or turn off commands in each group.

To clear a value, double-click the box and press BACKSPACE.

To unlock a value, clear the dynamic input box.

Snap Point options on the Selection Bar

Snap Point Options

To de-select a single object, press Shift and click an object.

select all the options as follows.

Lets you specify curve creation using X and Y coordinate values.

Pipe Vise Profile

Transitioning from a Line to an Arc

A Tangent and a Coincident constraint whenever applicable.

Snapping to Geometry Anywhere in an Assembly

Use his command to create lines with constraint inferencing.

Line Start Point With XC and YC Inputs

Line End Point With Length and Angle Inputs

To lock a mode, double-click either the XY or Parameters icon.

Line at a Relative Angle

Relative Angle 45.0

Arc by Three Points

Pass Cursor through Marker

Third Point becomes Endpoint

Lets you create circles using one of two methods:

Circle by Center and Diameter (left) and Circle by 3 Points (right)

Offsetting a Line From a Baseline

Creating a Line at the Midpoint of Two Parallel Lines

Constructing a Bisector Line

Trim single or multiple objects

2. To preview the trim, move the cursor over a curve.

Trim to a virtual intersection

5. To complete the trim, click the left mouse button.

Extend to a virtual intersection

5. To complete the extension, click the left mouse button.

Make Corner overview

Open splines (trimming only)

Unrim Leaves the input curves untrimmed.

Fillet two curves

To fillet two curves:

1. On the Sketch Curve toolbar, click Fillet , or choose InsertFillet.

Original Solution (Left) and Alternate Solution (Right)

6. Leftclick to complete the fillet.

Filleting with the crayon tool

To fillet three curves: